Skip to main content

Full text of "Principles of teaching"

See other formats


Principles 

"f . 

Teaching 


Principles  of 
Teaching 


BY  ADAM  S.  BENNION 
Superintendent  of  Church  Schools 


Designed  for  Quorum  Instructors  and  Auxiliary  Class 

Teachers  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of 

Latter-day  Saints. 


Published  by 

The  General  Boards  of  the  Auxiliary  Organizations 

OF  THE  Church 

1921 


1952 

Reprint  of  the  original 

FUNDAMENTAL  PROBLEMS  IN  TEACHING  RELIGION 

Copyright,  1921 

By  Adam  S.  Bennion 

For  the  General  Boards  of  the 

Auxiliary  Organizations 

of  the  Church 


Printed  by 

Deseret  News  Press 

Salt  Lake  City,  Utah 

1958 

Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America 


PREFACE 
to  the  1952  Edition 

Two  texts  have  been  written  for  the  teacher  training 
program  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day 
Saints  since  Dr.  Adam  S.  Bennion's  Book  Principles  of 
Teaching  was  published,  yet  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  this 
book  has  been  out  of  print  several  years  so  many  requests 
for  it  have  poured  in  that  the  General  Superintendency 
has  decided  to  satisfy  the  demand  with  this  new  edition. 

This  book  with  its  classic  qualities  in  many  ways  fits 
Shakespeare's  description  of  a  beautiful  woman  when  he 
said,  "Age  cannot  wither  her  nor  custom  dim  her  in- 
finite variety."  Anyone  who  knows  Dr.  Bennion  or  has 
read  his  writings  knows  that  neither  custom  nor  age  has 
dimmed  his  infinite  variety.  Furthermore,  a  glance  at 
the  table  of  contents  of  this  book  will  reveal  the  fact  that 
the  problems  and  principles  treated  herein  are  just  as 
real  today  as  they  were  when  the  text  was  written. 

This  little  volume  is  republished  in  the  hope  that  it 
again  will  become  one  of  the  basic  texts  in  the  teacher 
training  program  and  fulfill  its  mission  as  an  instrument 
in  the  hands  of  sincere  people  who  have  the  devout  wish 
of  learning  how  to  teach  the  principles  of  the  gospel  by 
the  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit. 

H.  A.  Dixon,  Chairman 
Teacher  Training  Committee 


Contents 

Chapter  Page 

Preface vii 

I     Purposes  Behind  Teaching 1 

II     What  Is  Teaching? 7 

III  The  Joys  of  Teaching 14 

IV  PersonaHty 20 

V     PersonaHty 26 

VI     Attainment 33 

VII     Native  Tendencies 40 

VIII  What  to  Do  With  Native  Tendencies      .     .  46 

IX     Individual  Differences 53 

X  Individual  Differences  and  Teaching   ...  61 

XI     Attention 68 

XII     What  Makes  for  Interest 74 

XIII  A  Laboratory  Lesson  in  Interest     ....  80 

XIV  The  More  Immediate  Problems  in  Teaching  88 
XV     Organizing  the  Lesson 96 

XVI  Illustrating  and  Supplementing  a  Lesson     .  103 

XVII    The  Aim Ill 

XVIII     Application 116 

XIX     Methods  of  the  Recitation 126 

XX     Review  and  Preview 134 

XXI  The  Question  as  a  Factor  in  Education    .     .  142 

XXII     The  Problem  of  Discipline 149 

XXIII  Creating  Class  Spirit 157 

XXIV  Conversion— The  Real  Test  of  Teaching     .  164 
Bibliography 171 


^ref 


ace^ 


That  ever-old  question,  "How  to  Teach,"  becomes  ever 
ne:vj  v^hen  made  to  read,  "How  to  Teach  Better."  This 
volume  aims  to  raise  those  problems  which  every  teacher 
sooner  or  later  faces,  and  it  attempts  to  suggest  an  approach 
by  way  of  solution  which  will  insure  at  least  some  degree 
of  growth  towards  efficiency.  These  chapters  originally 
were  prepared  for  the  course  offered  to  teacher-trainers  in 
the  Summer  School  of  the  Brigham  Young  University,  in 
1920.  The  teachers  in  that  course  were  an  inspiration  to 
the  author  and  are  responsible  for  many  of  the  thoughts 
expressed  in  the  pages  of  this  book. 

The  successful  teacher  ever  views  his  calling  as  an  oppor- 
tunity—  not  as  an  obligation.  To  associate  with  young 
people  is  a  rare  privilege;  to  teach  them  is  an  inspiration; 
to  lead  them  into  the  glorious  truths  of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus 
Christ  is  heavenly  joy  itself.  This  little  volume  hopes  to 
push  open  the  door  of  opportunity  a  little  wider,  that  more 
of  that  joy  may  be  realized. 

"Perchance,  in  heaven,  one  day  to  me 
Some  blessed  Saint  will  come  and  say, 

'All  hail,  beloved;  but  for  thee 
My  soul  to  death  had  fallen  a  prey'; 

And  oh  I  what  rapture  in  the  thought. 
One  soul  to  glory  to  have  brought." 

Adam  S.  Bennion. 


CHAPTER  I 

PURPOSES  BEHIND  TEACHING 

Outline — Chapter  I 

The  worth  of  souls. — The  Father's  joy  in  the  soul  that  is  saved. — 
The    teacher's    responsibility.  —  Teaching,    a    sacred    calling.  —  Our 
Church  a  teaching  Church. 
Our  three-fold  purpose  in  Teaching: 

a — To  guarantee  salvation  of  the  individual  members  of  the 

Church. 
b — To  pass  on  the  wonderful  heritage  handed  down  by  our 

pioneer  forefathers. 
c — To  make  more  easily  possible  the  conversion  of  the  world. 

"Remember  the  worth  of  souls  is  great  in  the  sight  of  God; 

"For,  behold,  the  Lord  your  Redeemer  suffered  death  in  the  flesh, 
wherefore  he  suffered  the  pain  of  all  men,  that  all  men  might  repent 
and  come  unto  him. 

"And  he  hath  risen  again  from  the  dead,  that  he  might  bring  all 
men  unto  him,  on  conditions  of  repentance; 

"And  how  great  is  his  joy  in  the  soul  that  repenteth. 

"Wherefore,  you  are  called  to  cry  repentance  unto  this  people; 

"And  if  it  so  be  that  you  should  labor  all  your  days  in  crying 
repentance  unto  his  people,  and  bring,  save  it  be  one  soul  unto 
me,  how  great  shall  be  your  joy  with  him  in  the  kingdom  of  my 
Father? 

"And  now,  if  your  joy  will  be  great  with  one  soul  that  you  have 
brought  unto  me  into  the  kingdom  of  my  Father,  how  great  will 
be  your  joy  if  you  should  bring  many  souls  unto  me?"  (Doc.  &  Cov., 
Sec.  18:10-16.) 

"For  behold,  this  is  my  work  and  my  glor)^ — to  bring  to  pass  the 
immortality  and  eternal  life  of  man."  (Moses  1:39.) 

If  this  is  the  work  and  glory  of  the  Lord,  how  great  must 
be  the  responsibihty  of  the  teachers  of  Zion,  His  copartners 
in  the  business  of  saving  humankind!  Next  to  parenthood, 
teaching  involves  us  in  the  most  sacred  relationship  known 
to  man.  The  teacher  akin  to  the  parent  is  the  steward  of 
human  souls — his  purpose  to  bless  and  to  elevate. 


2  Principles  of  Teaching 

The  first  great  question  that  should  concern  the  Latter- 
day  Saint  teacher  is,  "Why  do  I  teach?"  To  appreciate 
fully  the  real  purposes  behind  teaching  is  the  first  great 
guarantee  of  success.  For  teaching  is  "no  mere  job"  —  it 
is  a  sacred  calling — a  trust  of  the  Lord  Himself  under  the 
divine  injunction,  "Feed  my  sheep"  (John  21:15).  For 
the  teacher  who  has  caught  a  glimpse  of  his  real  responsi- 
bility there  is  no  indifference,  no  eleventh-hour  prepara- 
tion, no  feeling  of  unconcern  about  the  welfare  of  his 
pupils  between  lessons — for  him  there  is  constant  inspira- 
tion in  the  thought,  "To  me  is  given  the  privilege  of  being 
the  cupbearer  between  the  Master  and  His  children  who 
would  drink  at  His  fountain  of  truth." 

The  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints  has  been 
variously  designated  by  those  not  of  us:  "The  Great  Indus- 
trial Church,"  "The  Church  of  Pioneers,"  "The  Church  of 
Wonderful  Organization."  It  might  well  be  called  "The 
Teaching  Church."  There  is  scarcely  a  man  or  woman  in 
it  that  has  not  at  some  time  been  asked  to  respond  to  the 
call  of  teacher.  Our  people  have  been  a  remarkable  people 
because  they  have  been  remarkably  taught — taught  of  the 
Lord  and  His  prophets.  Our  future  can  be  secure  only  as 
it  is  guaranteed  this  same  good  teaching.  Every  teacher 
must  come  to  realize  that  "Mormonism"  is  at  stake  when 
he  teaches.  "Why  do  I  teach?"  goes  to  the  very  heart  of 
teaching. 

The  answer  to  this  question  is  to  be  found,  in  part  at 
least,  in  the  three -fold  objectives  of  our  Church.  First,  the 
salvation  and  exaltation  of  the  individual  soul.  As  already 
pointed  out,  this  is  the  very  "work  and  glory"  of  the 
Father.  Man  is  born  into  the  world  a  child  of  divinity — 
born  for  the  purpose  of  development  and  perfection.  Life 
is  the  great  laboratory  in  which  he  works  out  his  experi- 


Purposes  Behind  Teaching  3 

ment  of  eternity.  In  potentiality,  a  God — in  actuality,  a 
creature  of  heredity,  environment,  and  teaching.  "Why  do 
I  teach?"  To  help  someone  else  realize  his  divinity — to 
assist  him  to  become  all  that  he  might  become — to  make 
of  him  vi^hat  he  might  not  be  but  for  my  teaching. 

Someone  has  jocularly  said:  "The  child  is  born  into  the 
world  half  angel,  half  imp.  The  imp  develops  naturally, 
the  angel  has  to  be  cultivated."  The  teacher  is  the  great 
cultivator  of  souls.  Whether  we  say  the  child  is  half  angel 
and  half  imp,  we  know  that  he  is  capable  of  doing  both 
good  and  evil  and  that  he  develops  character  as  he  prac- 
tices virtue  and  avoids  vice.  We  know,  too,  that  he  men- 
tally develops.  Born  with  the  capacity  to  do,  he  behaves 
to  his  own  blessing  or  condemnation.  There  is  no  such 
thing  as  static  life.  To  the  teacher  is  given  the  privilege 
of  pointing  to  the  higher  life.  He  is  the  gardener  in  the  gar- 
den of  life.  His  task  is  to  plant  and  to  cultivate  the  flowers 
of  noble  thoughts  and  deeds  rather  than  to  let  the  human 
soul  grow  up  to  weeds.  This  purpose  becomes  all  the  more 
significant  when  we  realize  that  the  effects  of  our  teaching 
are  not  only  to  modify  a  life  here  of  three-score  and  ten 
— they  are  impressions  attendant  throughout  eternity.  As 
the  poet  Goethe  has  said,  "Life  is  the  childhood  of  our 
immortality,"  and  the  teachings  of  childhood  are  what 
determine  the  character  of  maturity.  The  thought  is  given 
additional  emphasis  in  the  beautiful  little  poem,  "Plant- 
ing," by  W.  Lomax  Childress: 

Who  plants  a  tree  may  live 

To  see  its  leaves  unfold, 
The  greenness  of  its  summer  garb, 

Its  autumn  tinge  of  gold. 

Who  plants  a  flower  may  live 

To  see  its  beauty  grow, 
The  lily  whiten  on  its  stalk. 

The  rambler  rose  to  blow. 


4  Principles  of  Teaching 

Who  sows  the  seed  may  find 

The  field  of  harvest  fair, 
The  song  of  reapers  ringing  clear, 

When  all  the  sheaves  are  there. 

But  time  will  fell  the  tree. 

The  rose  will  fade  and  die, 
The  harvest  time  will  pass  away. 

As  does  the  song  and  sigh. 

But  whoso  plants  in  love. 

The  word  of  hope  and  trust. 
Shall  find  it  still  alive  with  God — 

It  is  not  made  of  dust. 

It  cannot  fade  nor  change. 
Though  worlds  may  scattered  be. 

For  love  alone  has  high  repose 
In  immortality. 

If  the  teacher,  as  he  stands  before  his  class,  could  pro- 
ject his  vision  into  the  future — could  see  his  pupils  devel- 
oped into  manhood  and  womanhood,  and  could  see  all  that 
he  might  do  or  fail  to  do,  he  would  read  a  meaning  well- 
nigh  beyond  comprehension  into  the  question,  "Why  do 
I  teach?" 

A  second  answer  to  this  query  lies  in  our  obligation  to 
pass  on  the  wonderful  heritage  which  we  here  received  from 
our  pioneer  forefathers.  The  story  of  their  sacrifice,  devo- 
tion, and  achievement  is  unique  in  the  history  of  the  world. 
Only  recently  a  pioneer  of  1852  thrilled  a  parents'  class 
in  one  of  our  wards  with  the  simple  narrative  of  his  early 
experiences.  His  account  of  Indian  raids,  of  the  experience 
with  Johnston's  army,  of  privations  and  suffering,  of  social 
pastimes — all  of  these  things  rang  with  a  spirit  of  romance. 
None  of  his  auditors  will  ever  forget  the  story  of  his  aunt 
who  gave  up  her  seat  in  her  wagon  to  a  sick  friend  for 
whom  no  provision  had  been  made,  and  trudged  across  the 
plains  afoot  that  one  more  soul  might  rejoice  in  Zion. 
Every  pioneer  can  tell  this  sort  of  thrilling  story.    Could 


Purposes  Behind  Teaching  5 

our  young  people  enjoy  the  companionship  of  these  pio- 
neers there  would  be  little  need  of  alarm  concerning  their 
faith.  Unfortunately,  each  year  sees  fewer  of  these  pioneers 
left  to  tell  their  story.  It  is  to  the  teacher,  both  of  the  fire- 
side and  the  classroom,  that  we  must  look  for  the  perpetua- 
tion of  the  spirit  of  '47.  The  ideals  and  achievements  of 
the  pioneers  are  such  an  inspiration,  such  a  challenge  to 
the  youth  of  the  Church  today — that  teachers  ought  to  glory 
in  the  opportunity  to  keep  alive  the  memories  of  the  past. 
Our  pioneer  heritage  ought  never  to  be  forfeited  to  indiffer- 
ence. It  is  a  heritage  that  could  come  only  out  of  pioneer 
life.  Such  courage  to  face  sacrifice,  such  devotion  to  God, 
such  loyalty  to  government,  such  consecration  to  the  task 
of  conquering  an  unpromising  and  forbidding  desert,  such 
determination  to  secure  the  advantages  of  education,  such 
unselfish  devotion  to  the  welfare  of  their  fellows — where 
could  we  turn  for  such  inspiration  to  one  who  would  teach? 
Nor  is  it  enough  that  we  strive  to  perfect  the  individual 
membership  of  the  Church  and  preserve  the  social  heritage 
out  of  the  past — we  assume  to  become  the  teachers  of  the 
world.  It  is  our  blessing  to  belong  to  a  Church  builded 
upon  revelation — a  Church  established  and  taught  of  the 
Lord.  But  with  that  blessing  cornes  the  injunction  to  carry 
this  gospel  of  the  kingdom  to  every  nation  and  clime. 
"Mormonism"  was  not  revealed  for  a  few  Saints  alone  who 
were  to  establish  Zion — it  was  to  be  proclaimed  to  all  the 
world.  Every  Latter-day  Saint  is  enjoined  to  teach  the 
truth.  Whether  called  as  a  missionary,  or  pursuing  his 
regular  calling  at  home,  his  privilege  and  his  obligation  is 
to  cry  repentance  and  preach  the  plan  of  salvation.  The 
better  we  teach,  the  sooner  we  shall  make  possible  the  real- 
ization of  God's  purposes  in  the  world.  The  two  thousand 
young  men  and  women  who  go  out  each  year  to  represent 


6  Principles  of  Teaching 

us  in  the  ministry  should  go  out  well  trained,  not  only  that 
they  may  represent  our  Church  as  an  institution  which  be- 
lieves that  "the  glory  of  God  is  intelligence,"  but  also  that 
they  may  win  intelligent  men  and  women  to  the  truth. 
Only  he  who  is  well  taught  may  become  a  good  teacher 
— hence  the  need  of  intelligent,  devoted  service.  "Why  do 
I  teach?"  far  from  being  an  idle  question,  goes  to  the  very 
heart  of  the  future  of  the  Church. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  I 

1.  How  many  of  the  members  of  your  ward  are  actively  engaged 
in  other  than  parental  teaching? 

2.  What  significance  is  attached  to  calling  our  Church  a  teach- 
ing Church? 

3.  Discuss  the  significance  of  Jesus'  being  a  teacher. 

4.  Compare  the  responsibility  of  teaching  with  that  of  parenthood. 

5.  Enumerate  the  chief  purposes  behind  teaching. 

6.  In  your  opinion,  which  is  the  greatest  purpose?   Why? 

7.  To  what  extent  does  the  following  statement  apply  to  the 
welfare  of  our  Church: 

"That  nation  that  does  not  revere  its  past,  plays  little 
part  in  the  present,  and  soon  finds  that  it  has  no  future." 

8.  Discuss  our  obligation  under  the  injunction  to  teach  the  gospel 
to  the  world. 

9.  Discuss  the  need  here  at  home  of  better  teaching. 

10.    In  what  sense   are  we    trustees  of  the   heritage  left   by  the 
pioneers? 

Helpful  References 

Doctrine  &  Covenants:  James,  Talks  on  Psychology  and  Life's 
Ideals;  Brumbaugh,  The  Making  of  a  Teacher;  Weigle,  Talks  to 
Sunday  School  Teachers;  Strayer,  A  Brief  Course  in  the  Teaching 
Process;  Betts,  How  to  Teach  Religion;  Strayer  and  NorsworSiy, 
How  to  Teach;  Sharp,  Education  for  Character. 


CHAPTER  II 

WHAT  IS  TEACHMG? 

Outline — Chapter  II 

Teaching  a  complex  art. — ^What  teaching  is  not. — What  teaching  is. 
—What  it  involves. — Presentation  of  facts. — Organization  and  eval- 
uation of  knowledge. — Interpretation  and  elaboration  of  truth. — In- 
spiration to  high  ideals. — Encouragement  and  direction  given  to 
expression. — Discovery  of  pupils'  better  selves.— Inspiration  of  ex- 
ample as  well  as  precept. — Application  of  truths  taught  in  lives  of 
pupils. 

The  query,  "What  constitutes  teaching?"  cannot  be 
answered  off-hand.  It  is  so  complex  an  art,  so  fine  an  art, 
as  Professor  Driggs  points  out,  that  it  has  to  be  pondered 
to  be  understood  and  appreciated.  It  is  often  considered 
to  be  mere  lesson-hearing  and  lesson-giving.  The  differ- 
ence between  mere  instructions  and  teaching  is  as  great  as 
the  distinction  between  eating  and  digestion. 

The  following  definition  of  teaching,  contributed  by  a 
former  state  superintendent  of  schools,  is  rich  in  sug- 
gestion: 

"Teaching  is  the  process  of  training  an  individual  through  the 
formation  of  habits,  the  acquisition  of  knowledge,  the  inculcation  of 
ideals,  and  the  fixing  of  permanent  interests  so  that  he  shall  become 
a  clean,  intelligent,  self-supporting  member  of  society,  who  has  the 
power  to  govern  himself,  can  participate  in  noble  enjoyments,  and 
has  the  desire  and  the  courage  to  revere  God  and  serve  his  fellows." 

Teaching  does  not  merely  consist  of  an  inquisition  of 
questions  with  appropriate  answers  thrown  in;  it  surely  is 
not  mere  reading;  nor  can  it  be  mistaken  for  preaching  or 
lecturing.  These  are  all  means  that  may  be  employed  in 
the  process  of  teaching.  And  they  are  important,  too.  We 
have  been  cautioned  much,  of  late  years,  not  to  lose  our- 
selves in  the  process  of  doling  out  facts — but  that  rather 
we  should  occupy  ourselves  teaching  boys  and  girls.  That 


8  Principles  of  Teaching 

all  sounds  well — the  writer  of  these  lessons  has  himself 
proclaimed  this  doctrine — but  we  have  discovered  that  you 
cannot  teach  boys  and  girls  nothing.  They  no  more  can 
be  happy  listening  to  nothing  than  they  can  be  content 

doing  nothing. 

And  so  we  now  urge  the  significance  of  having  a  rich 
supply  of  subject  matter — a  substantial  content  of  lesson 
material.  But  the  doctrine  holds  that  the  teacher  ought  not 
to  lose  himself  in  mere  facts — they  are  merely  the  medium 
through  which  he  arrives  at,  and  drives  home  the  truth. 

"It  is  the  teacher's  task  to  make  changes  for  the  better  in  the 
abilities,  habits  and  attitudes  of  boys  and  girls.  Her  efficiency  can 
be  evaluated  fairly  only  in  terms  of  her  success  at  this  task.  In 
other  words,  if  a  teacher  is  rated  at  all,  she  should  be  rated  not 
only  by  the  clothes  she  wears,  or  the  method  she  chooses,  but  by 
the  results  she  secures." — Journal  of  Educational  Research,  May, 
1920. 

We  have  said  that  teaching  is  a  complex  art.  It  consists 
of  at  least  these  eight  fundamentals,  each  one  of  which, 
or  any  combination  of  which,  may  be  featured  in  any  one 
particular  lesson: 

1.  Presentation  of  facts. 

2.  Organization  and  evaluation  of  knowledge. 

3.  Interpretation  and  elaboration  of  truth. 

4.  Inspiration  to  high  ideals. 

5.  Encouragement  and  direction  given  to  expression. 

6.  Discovery  of  pupils'  better  selves. 

7.  Inspiration  of  example  as  well  as  precept. 

8.  Application  of  truths  taught  in  lives  of  the  pupils. 

I.     Presentation  of  Facts 

Facts  constitute  the  background  upon  which  the  mind 
operates.  There  may  be  many  or  few — they  may  be  pre- 
sented in  a  lecture  of  thirty  minutes,  in  the  reading  of  a 
dozen  pages,  or  they  may  be  called  forth  out  of  the  mind 


What  Is  Teaching?  9 

by  a  single  stimulating  question.  But  we  ought  not  to  con- 
fuse the  issue.  If  we  are  to  discuss  any  matter  in  the  hope 
of  reaching  a  conclusion  in  truth,  we  must  have  material 
upon  which  the  mind  can  build  that  conclusion.  We  are 
not  concerned  in  this  chapter  with  method  of  procedure  in 
getting  the  facts  before  a  class — the  important  thought  here 
is  that  the  facts  in  rich  abundance  should  be  supplied.  A 
certain  young  lady  protested  recently  against  going  to 
Sunday  School.  Her  explanation  of  her  attitude  is  best 
expressed  in  her  own  words:  "I  get  sick  and  tired  of 
going  to  a  class  where  I  never  hear  anything  new  or  worth 
while."  Exaggerated,  of  course,  but  students  are  crying 
for  bread,  and  ought  not  to  be  turned  away  with  a  stone. 

II.    Organization  and  Evaluation  of  Knowledge 

We  have  hinted  that  a  lesson  may  not  have  facts  enough 
to  justify  the  time  it  takes — there  is,  on  the  other  hand, 
danger  that  the  whole  time  of  the  class  may  be  consumed 
in  a  mere  rehearsal  of  facts  as  facts.  Only  recently  a 
significant  complaint  was  voiced  by  a  young  man  who 
has  gone  through  training  in  practically  all  of  our  or- 
ganizations. "I  don't  seem  to  know  anything  at  all,"  he 
said,  "about  the  history  of  Israel,  as  a  whole.  I  can  recall 
certain  isolated  facts  about  particular  persons  or  places, 
but  I  can't  give  any  intelligent  answer  at  all  to  such  ques- 
tions as  these: 

"Who  were  the  Israelites?  What  were  their  big  move- 
ments relative  to  the  Promised  Land?  What  is  the  history 
of  Israel  up  to  the  time  of  the  Savior?  What  is  their  his- 
tory subsequently?   Are  we  of  Israel  and  how?" 

The  young  man  was  not  complaining — he  merely  re- 
gretted his  ignorance  on  points  of  vital  interest.  He  was  in 
need  of  further  organization  of  the  knowledge  he  had.   Ho 


10  Principles  of  Teaching 

had  not  been  given  the  big  central  ideas  about  which  to 
build  the  minor  ones.  Relative  importance  had  not  been 
taught  him  through  that  organized  review  that  is  so  valu- 
able in  review.  The  teacher  ought  to  come  back  time  and 
again  to  pause  on  the  big  essentials — the  peaks  of  gospel 
teaching. 

III.     Interpretation  and  Elaboration  of  Truth 

It  is  really  surprising  how  many  various  notions  of  an 
idea  will  be  carried  away  by  the  members  of  a  class  from 
a  single  declaration  on  the  part  of  a  teacher.  A  phase  of 
a  subject  may  be  presented  which  links  up  with  a  particular 
experience  of  one  of  the  pupils.  To  him  there  is  only  one 
interpretation.  To  another  pupil  the  phase  of  the  subject 
presented  might  make  no  appeal  at  all,  or  linked  up  with 
a  diflFerent  experience  might  lead  to  an  entirely  different 
conclusion.  Truths  need  to  be  elaborated  and  interpreted 
from  all  possible  angles  —  all  possible  phases  should  be 
developed.  An  interesting  discussion  recently  took  place 
with  a  young  man  who  had  "gone  off"  on  a  pet  doctrinal 
theory.  His  whole  conception  built  itself  up  about  a  single 
passage  of  scripture.  Satisfied  with  a  single  notion,  he  had 
shut  his  eyes  to  all  else  and  "knew  that  he  was  right." 
Properly  to  be  taught,  he  needed  to  be  trained  to  suspend 
his  judgment  until  all  the  evidence  was  in. 

IV.     Inspiration  to  High  Ideals 

Men  and  women  like  to  be  carried  to  the  heights.  They 
like  to  be  lifted  out  of  their  lower  selves  into  what  they 
may  become.  It  is  the  teacher's  delight  to  let  his  class 
stand  tip -toe  on  the  facts  of  subject  matter  to  peep  into 
the  glories  of  the  gospel  plan  of  life  and  salvation.    In 


What  Is  Teaching?  11 

1903  Sanford  Bell,  of  the  University  of  Colorado,  reported 
the  results  of  a  survey  conducted  with  543  men  and  488 
women  to  ascertain  whether  they  liked  male  or  female 
teachers  better  and  just  what  it  was  that  made  them  like 
those  teachers  who  had  meant  most  in  their  lives.  The 
survey  showed  that  the  following  influences  stood  out  in 
the  order  named: 

Moral  uplift. 

Inspiration. 

Stimulus  to  intellectual  awakening. 

Spur  to  scholarship. 

Help  in  getting  a  firm  grip  on  the  vital  issues  of  life. 

Personal  kindness. 

Encouragement  in  crises. 

What  a  testimonial  to  the  force  of  inspiration  to  higher 
ideals  1 

V.     Encouragement  and  Direction  Given  to  Pupils' 
Expression 

Most  pupils  in  class  are  ordinarily  inclined  to  sit  silently 
by  and  let  someone  else  do  the  talking.  And  yet,  everyone 
enjoys  participating  in  a  lesson  when  once  "the  ice  is 
broken."  It  is  the  teacher's  task  first  of  all  to  create  an 
atmosphere  of  easy  expression  and  then  later  to  help  make 
that  expression  adequate  and  effective.  The  bishop  of  one 
of  our  wards  in  southern  Utah  declared,  not  long  ago,  that 
he  traced  the  beginning  of  his  testimony  back  to  a  Primary 
lesson  in  which  a  skillful  teacher  led  him  to  commit  him- 
self very  enthusiastically  to  the  notion  that  the  Lord  does 
answer  prayers.  He  said  he  defended  the  proposition  so 
vigorously  that  he  set  about  to  make  sure  from  experience 
that  he  was  right.  The  details  of  securing  this  expression 
will  be  more  fully  worked  out  in  the  chapter  on  Methods 
of  the  Recitation. 


12  Principles  of  Teaching 

VI.     Discovery  of  Pupils'  Better  Selves 

One  of  the  most  fascinating  problems  in  teaching  is  to 
come  to  know  the  real  nature  of  our  pupils — to  get  below 
surface  appearances  to  the  very  boy  himself.  Most  of  the 
work  of  solving  this  problem  necessarily  must  be  done  out 
of  class.  Such  intimate  knowledge  is  the  result  of  personal 
contact  when  no  barriers  of  class  recitation  interfere.  It 
involves  time  and  effort,  of  course,  but  it  is  really  the  key 
to  genuine  teaching.  It  makes  possible  what  we  have 
named  as  factor  number  eight,  which  may  be  disposed  of 
here  for  present  purposes.  We  read  of  bygone  days  largely 
because  in  them  we  hope  to  find  a  solution  to  the  problems 
of  Jimmie  Livingston  today.  How  can  we  effect  the  solu- 
tion if  all  that  we  know  of  Jimmie  is  that  he  is  one  of  our 
fifteen  scouts?  We  must  see  him  in  action,  must  associate 
with  him  as  he  encounters  his  problems,  if  we  would  help 
him  solve  them.  Our  discovery  of  our  pupils'  better  selves, 
and  intelligent  application,  go  together  hand  in  hand. 

VII.     Inspiration  of  Example  as  Well  as  Precept 

When  Emerson  declared,  "What  you  are  thunders  so 
loudly  in  my  ears  that  I  can't  hear  what  you  say,"  he 
sounded  a  mighty  note  to  teachers.  Hundreds  of  boys  and 
girls  have  been  stimulated  to  better  lives  by  the  desire  "to 
be  like  teacher."  "Come,  follow  me,"  is  the  great  password 
to  the  calling  of  teacher.  The  teacher  conducts  a  class  on 
Sunday  morning — he  really  teaches  all  during  the  week. 
When  Elbert  Hubbard  added  his  new  commandment,  "Re- 
member the  week-days,  to  keep  them  holy,"  he  must  have 
had  teachers  in  mind.  A  student  in  one  of  our  Church 
schools  was  once  heard  to  say,  "My  teacher  teaches  me 
more  religion  by  the  way  he  plays  basketball  than  by  the 


What  Is  Teaching?  13 

way  he  teaches  theology."  It  was  what  Jesus  did  that  made 
him  Savior  of  the  world.   He  was  the  greatest  teacher  be- 
cause he  was  the  greatest  man. 
Surely  teaching  is  a  complex  art! 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  II 

1.  What  is  teaching? 

2.  Why  is  it  essential  that  we  get  a  clear  conception  of  just  what 
teaching  is? 

3.  Discuss  the  importance  of  building  the  recitation  upon  a  good 
foundation  of  facts. 

4.  Why  are  facts  alone  not  a  guarantee  of  a  successful  recitation? 

5.  What  is  the  teacher's  obligation  in  the  matter  of  organizing 
knowledge? 

6.  Discuss  the  significance  of  teaching  as  an  interpretation  of 
truth. 

7.  Discuss  the  teacher's  obligation  to  discover  pupils'  better  selves. 

8.  What  is  the  relative  importance  of  expression  and  impression 
in  teaching? 

Helpful  References 

Betts,  How  to  Teach  Religion;  Gregory,  The  Seven  Laws  of  Teach- 
ing; Thorndike,  Principles  of  Teaching;  Brimibaugh,  The  Making 
of  a  Teacher;  Strayer  and  Norsworthy,  How  to  Teach. 


CHAPTER  III 
THE  JOYS  OF  TEACHING 

Outline — Chapter  III 

The  Joys  that  attend  Teaching:  Enrichment  of  the  spirit. — Guar- 
antee of  the  teacher's  own  growth  and  development. — Restraining 
and  uphfting  influence  on  the  moral  character  of  the  teacher. — Satis- 
faction that  attends  seeing  pupils  develop. — Inspirational  companion- 
ship.— Contentment  that  attaches  to  duty  done. — Outpouring  of  the 
blessings  of  the  Lord. 

Chapters  one  and  two  emphasized  the  thought  that  the 
purposes  behind  teaching  impose  a  sacred  obHgation  on 
the  part  of  those  who  aspire  to  teach.  But  lest  the  obliga- 
tion appear  burdensome,  let  us  remind  ourselves  that  com- 
pensation is  one  of  the  great  laws  of  life.  "To  him  who 
gives  shall  be  given"  applies  to  teaching  as  to  few  other 
things.  Verily  he  who  loses  his  life  finds  it.  The  devotion 
of  the  real  teacher,  though  it  involves  labor,  anxiety  and 
sacrifice,  is  repaid  ten-fold.  Only  he  who  has  fully  given 
himself  in  service  to  others  can  appreciate  the  joy  that 
attends  teaching — particularly  that  teaching  enjoined  upon 
us  by  the  Master  and  which  is  its  own  recompense. 

It  is  difficult  to  enumerate  all  of  the  blessings  that  attend 
the  service  of  the  teacher,  but  let  us  consider  a  few  that 
stand  out  pre-eminently. 

If  there  were  none  other  than  this  first  one  it  would 
justify  all  that  is  done  in  the  name  of  teaching;  namely, 
"the  enrichment  of  spirit."  "There  is  a  spirit  in  man:  and 
the  inspiration  of  the  Almighty  giveth  them  understand- 
ing." To  feel  the  thrill  of  that  inspiration  is  a  compensa- 
tion beyond  price.  The  Lord,  having  commanded  us  to 
teach  (see  Sec.  88:77-81,  Doc.  &  Cov.),  has  followed  the 
command  with  the  promise  of  a  blessing,  one  of  the  richest 
in  all  scripture. 


The  Joys  of  Teaching  15 

"For  thus  saith  the  Lord,  I,  the  Lord,  am  merciful  and  gracious 
unto  those  who  fear  me,  and  delight  to  honor  those  who  serve  me 
in  righteousness  and  in  truth  unto  the  end; 

"Great  shall  be  their  reward  and  eternal  shall  be  their  glory; 

"And  to  them  will  I  reveal  all  mysteries,  yea,  all  the  hidden  mys- 
teries of  my  kingdom  from  days  of  old,  and  for  ages  to  come  will 
I  make  known  unto  them  the  good  pleasure  of  my  will  concerning 
all  things  pertaining  to  my  kingdom; 

"Yea,  even  the  wonders  of  eternity  shall  they  know,  and  things 
to  come  will  I  show  them,  even  the  things  of  many  generations; 

"And  their  wisdom  shall  be  great,  and  their  understanding  reach 
to  heaven:  and  before  them  the  wisdom  of  the  wise  shall  perish,  and 
the  understanding  of  the  prudent  shall  come  to  naught; 

"For  by  my  Spirit  will  I  enlighten  them,  and  by  my  power  will 
I  make  known  unto  them  the  secrets  of  my  will;  yea,  even  those 
things  which  eye  has  not  seen,  nor  ear  heard,  nor  yet  entered  into 
the  heart  of  man."  (Doc.  &  Gov.  76:5-10.) 

This  constitutes  a  promissory  note  signed  by  our  heav- 
enly Father  Himself.  A  blessing  beyond  compare — a  divi- 
dend unfailing — and  our  only  investment — devoted  service! 
Companionship  with  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord!  That  is  what 
it  means,  if  we  serve  Him  in  faith  and  humility. 

"Be  thou  humble,  and  the  Lord  thy  God  shall  lead  thee  by  the 
hand,  and  give  thee  answer  to  thy  prayers."  (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec. 
112:10.) 

Like  all  other  gifts  and  attainments,  the  Spirit  of  the 
Lord  has  to  be  cultivated.  Teaching  insures  a  cultivation 
as  few  other  things  in  life  can.  An  enriched  spirit,  then, 
is  the  first  great  reward  of  the  teacher. 

A  second  satisfaction  is  the  guarantee  of  one's  own  growth 
and  development.  Teachers  invariably  declare  that  they 
have  learned  more,  especially  in  the  first  year  of  teaching, 
than  in  any  year  at  college.  A  consciousness  of  the  fact 
that  it  is  hard  to  teach  that  which  is  not  well  known  incites 
that  type  of  study  which  makes  for  growth.  A  good  class 
is  a  great  "pace-setter."  Intellectually  it  has  the  pull  of 
achievement.  The  real  teacher  always  is  the  greatest  stu- 
dent in  the  class.  The  "drive"  of  having  a  regular  task  to 


16  Principles  of  Teaching 

perform,  especially  when  that  task  is  checked  up  as  it  in 
by  students,  leads  many  a  person  to  a  development  un- 
known to  him  who  is  free  to  slide.  "Blessed  is  he  who  has 
to  do  things."  Responsibility  is  the  great  force  that  builds 
character.  Compare  the  relative  development  of  the  per- 
son who  spends  Tuesday  evening  at  home  with  the  evening 
paper,  or  at  some  other  pastime,  and  of  the  person  who, 
having  accepted  fully  the  call  to  teach,  leads  a  class  of 
truth-seekers  through  an  hour's  discussion  of  some  vital 
subject.  Follow  the  development  through  the  Tuesday 
evenings  of  a  lifetime. 

How  easy  to  understand  that  there  are  varying  degrees 
of  glory  hereafter. 

A  third  value  of  teaching  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  position 
of  teacher  exercises  a  restraining  influence  for  good  on  the 
moral  life  of  the  teacher.  He  is  sustained  by  a  conscious- 
ness that  his  conduct  is  his  only  evidence  to  his  pupils 
that  his  practice  is  consistent  with  his  theory.  His  class 
follows  him  in  emulation  or  in  criticism  in  all  that  he  does. 
"Come,  follow  me,"  lifts  the  real  teacher  over  the  pitfalls 
of  temptation.  He  cannot  do  forbidden  work  on  the  Sab- 
bath, he  cannot  indulge  in  the  use  of  tobacco,  he  cannot 
stoop  to  folly — his  class  stands  between  him  and  all  these 
things.  A  teacher  recently  gave  expression  to  the  value  of 
this  restraining  force  when  she  said,  "I  urge  my  girls  so 
vigorously  not  to  go  to  the  movies  on  Sunday  that  I  find 
my  conscience  in  rebellion  if  anyone  asks  me  to  go." 

Many  a  man  in  attempting  to  convert  another  to  the 
righteousness  of  a  particular  issue  has  found  himself  to  be 
his  own  best  convert.  He  comes  to  appreciate  the  fact  that 
the  trail  he  establishes  is  the  path  followed  by  those  whom 
he  influences.  He  hears  the  voice  of  the  child  as  recorded 
in  the  little  poem: 


The  Joys  of  Teaching  17 

I  Stepped  in  Your  Steps  All  the  Way 

"A  father  and  his  tiny  son 

Crossed  a  rough  street  one  stormy  day, 
'See  papa!'  cried  the  Httle  one, 
'I  stepped  in  your  steps  all  the  wayl' 

"Ah,  random,  childish  hands,  that  deal 

Quick  thrusts  no  coat  of  proof  could  stay! 
It  touched  him  with  the  touch  of  steel — 
'I  stepped  in  your  steps  all  the  way!' 

"If  this  man  shirks  his  manhood's  due 
And  heeds  what  lying  voices  say, 
It  is  not  one  who  falls,  but  two, 
'I  stepped  in  your  steps  all  the  way!' 

"But  they  who  thrust  off  greed  and  fear. 

Who  love  and  watch,  who  toil  and  pray. 
How  their  hearts  carol  when  they  say, 
'I  stepped  in  your  steps  all  the  way!' " 

Still  another  joy  that  attends  teaching  is  the  satisfaction 
of  seeing  pupils  develop.  The  sculptor  finds  real  happi- 
ness in  watching  his  clay  take  on  the  form  and  expression 
of  his  model;  the  artist  glories  as  his  colors  grow  into  life; 
the  parent  finds  supreme  joy  in  seeing  himself  "re-grow" 
in  his  child;  so  the  teacher  delights  to  see  his  pupils  build 
their  lives  on  the  truths  he  has  taught.  The  joy  is  doubly 
sweet  if  it  is  heightened  by  an  expression  of  appreciation 
on  the  part  of  the  pupils.  Few  experiences  can  bring  the 
thrill  of  real  happiness  that  comes  to  the  teacher  when  a 
former  student,  once  perhaps  a  little  inclined  to  mischief 
or  carelessness,  takes  him  by  the  hand  with  a  "God  bless 
you  for  helping  me  find  my  better  self." 

An  oflFicer  of  the  British  army,  in  recounting  those  expe- 
riences which  had  come  to  him  in  the  recent  world  war, 
and  which  he  said  he  never  could  forget,  referred  to  one 
which  more  than  compensated  him  for  all  the  effort  he  had 
ever  put  into  his  preparation  for  teaching.   Because  of  his 


18  Principles  of  Teaching 

position  in  the  army  it  became  his  duty  to  discipline  a 
group  of  boys  for  what  in  the  army  is  a  serious  offense.  In 
that  group  was  a  boy  who  had  formerly  been  a  pupil 
under  the  officer  in  one  of  our  ward  organizations.  Chagrin 
was  stamped  on  the  face  of  the  boy  as  he  came  forward 
for  reprimand.  Regret  and  remorse  were  in  the  heart  of  the 
officer.  They  soon  gave  way  to  pride,  however,  as  the  boy 
assured  him  that  worse  than  any  punishment  was  the  hu- 
miliation of  being  brought  before  his  own  teacher,  and 
he  further  assured  him  that  never  again  would  he  do  a  thing 
that  would  mar  the  sacred  relations  of  pupil  and  teacher. 

A  further  compensation  attached  to  teaching  is  that  of 
inspirational  companionship.  It  is  a  blessed  privilege  to 
enjoy  the  sunshine  of  youth.  Every  pupil  contributes  an 
association  with  one  of  God's  choice  spirits.  To  live  and 
work  with  children  and  adolescents  is  one  of  the  finest  of 
safeguards  against  old  age.  The  teacher  not  only  partakes 
of  the  joy  of  his  group  —  they  constitute  him  a  link  be- 
tween his  generation  and  theirs.  Their  newness  of  life, 
their  optimism,  their  spontaneity,  their  joy,  they  gladly 
pass  on  to  their  teacher. 

Moreover,  the  teacher  enjoys  the  uplifting  associations 
of  his  fellow  teachers.  Among  those  consecrated  to  a  noble 
service,  there  is  a  spirit  unknown  to  him  who  has  not  en- 
joyed such  communion.  Whether  he  is  conscious  of  it  or 
not,  the  teacher  responds  to  the  pull  of  such  a  group. 
Scores  of  teachers  have  testified  that  the  associations  they 
have  enjoyed  as  members  of  a  local  board,  stake  board,  or 
general  board,  are  among  the  happiest  of  their  lives. 

And  finally  there  is  the  contentment  of  mind  that  comes 
as  a  result  of  a  duty  well  done.  The  human  soul  is  so  con- 
stituted that  any  task  well  performed  brings  a  feeling  of 
satisfaction,  and  this  is  doubly  heightened  when  the  duty 


The  Joys  of  Teaching  19 

performed  is  of  the  nature  of  a  free  will  offering.  Still 
more  so  when  it  is  shared  in  by  others  to  their  blessing. 
Just  as  we  hope  for  an  eventual  crowning  under  the  bless- 
ing, "Well  done,  thou  good  and  faithful  servant,"  so  we 
treasure  those  benedictions  along  the  way  that  attend  the 
discharge  of  a  sacred  obligation. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  III 

1.  Quote  some  of  the  promises  of  the  Lord  to  those  who  do  His 
will. 

2.  How  is  teaching  one  of  the  surest  guarantees  of  the  blessings 
of  eternal  life? 

3.  What  are  the  immediate  joys  attached  to  teaching? 

4.  Discuss  the  application  to  teaching  of  the  truth — "He  who 
loses  his  life  shall  find  it." 

5.  What  types  of  companionship  are  assured  him  who  teaches? 

6.  As  you  now  recall  them,  what  distinct  pleasures  stand  out  in 
your  teaching  experience? 

7.  Discuss  Section  76  of  the  Doctrine  &  Covenants  as  one  of  the 
most  valuable  promissory  notes  ever  given  to  mankind. 

8.  Discuss  the  force  of  a  duty  done  as  a  guarantee  of  joy. 

Helpful  References 

Doctrine  and  Covenants:  Slattery,  Living  Teachers;  Sharp,  Edu- 
cation for  Character;  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teachers; 
Betts,  How  to  Teach  Religion. 


CHAPTER  IV 


PERSONALITY 


Outline — Chapter  IV 


The  worth  of  a  great  teacher. — Good  teachers  not  necessarily  horn. 
— Some  boys'  observations  on  teachers. — A  high  school  survey. — 
Clapp's  Essential  Characteristics. — Betts'  Three  Classes  of  Teachers. 
— His  list  of  qualities. 

"A  great  teacher  is  worth  more  to  a  state,  though  he  teach  by 
the  roadside,  than  a  faculty  of  mediocrities  housed  in  Gothic  piles." — 
Chicago  Tribune,  September,  1919. 

We  may  stress  the  sacred  obligation  of  the  teacher;  we 
may  discuss  in  detail  mechanical  processes  involved  in 
lesson  preparation;  we  may  analyze  child  nature  in  all  of 
its  complexity;  but  after  all  we  come  back  to  the  Per- 
sonality of  the  Teacher  as  the  great  outstanding  factor  in 
pedagogical  success.  That  something  in  the  man  that 
grips  people! 

Very  generally  this  Personal  Equation  has  been  looked 
upon  as  a  certain  indefinable  possession  enjoyed  by  the 
favored  few.  In  a  certain  sense  this  is  true.  Personality 
is  largely  inherent  in  the  individual  and  therefore  differs 
as  fully  as  do  individuals.  But  of  recent  years  educators 
have  carried  on  extensive  investigations  in  this  field  of  per- 
sonality and  have  succeeded  in  reducing  to  comprehensible 
terms  those  qualities  which  seem  to  be  most  responsible  for 
achievements  of  successful  teachers.  Observation  leads  us 
all  to  similar  deductions  and  constitutes  one  of  the  most 
interesting  experiments  open  to  those  concerned  with  the 
teaching  process. 

Why,  with  the  same  amount  of  preparation,  does  one 
teacher  succeed  with  a  class  over  which  another  has  no 
control  at  all? 


Personauty  21 

Why  is  it  that  one  class  is  crowded  each  week,  while 
another  adjourns  for  lack  of  membership? 

The  writer  a  short  time  ago,  after  addressing  the  mem- 
bers of  a  ward  M.  I.  A.,  asked  a  group  of  scouts  to  remahi 
after  the  meeting,  to  whom  he  put  the  question,  "What  is  it 
that  you  like  or  dislike  in  teachers?"  The  group  was  a 
thoroughly  typical  group — real  boys,  full  of  life  and  equally 
full  of  frankness.   They  contributed  the  following  replies: 

1.  We  like  a  fellow  that's  full  of  pep. 

2.  We  like  a  fellow  that  doesn't  preach  all  the  time. 

3.  We  like  a  fellow  that  makes  us  be  good. 

4.  We  like  a  fellow  that  tells  us  new  things. 

Boylike,  they  were  "strong"  for  pep — a  little  word  with 
a  big  significance.  Vigor,  enthusiasm,  sense  of  humor,  at- 
tack, forcefulness  —  all  of  these  qualities  are  summed  up 
in  these  three  letters. 

And  the  interesting  thing  is  that  while  the  boys  liked  to 
be  told  new  things,  they  didn't  want  to  be  preached  at. 
They  evidently  had  the  boy's  idea  of  preaching  who  char- 
acterized it  as,  "talking  a  lot  when  you  haven't  anything 
to  say." 

Still  more  interesting  is  the  fact  that  boys  like  to  be 
made  to  be  good.  In  spite  of  their  fun  and  their  seeming 
indifference  they  really  are  serious  in  a  desire  to  subscribe 
to  the  laws  of  order  that  make  progress  possible. 

A  principal  of  the  Granite  High  School  carried  on  an 
investigation  through  a  period  of  four  years  to  ascertain 
just  what  it  is  that  students  like  in  teachers.  During  those 
years  students  set  down  various  attributes  and  qualities, 
which  are  summarized  below  just  as  they  were  given : 


22  Principles  of  Teaching 


Desirable  Characteristics 

Congeniality.  Optimism — cheerfulness. 

Broadmindedness.  Sympathy. 

Wide  knowledge.  Originality. 

Personality  that   makes  discipline  Progressiveness. 

easy.  Effective  expression. 

Willingness  to  entertain  questions.  Pleasing  appearance  —  "good 
Realization    that     students    need  looking." 

help.  Tact. 

Sense  of  humor — ability  to  take  a  Patience. 

joke.  Sincerity. 

Among  the  characteristics  which  they  did  not  like  in 
teachers  they  named  the  following: 

Undesirable  Characteristics 

Grouchiness.  Hazy  explanations. 

Wandering  in  method.  Failure  to  cover  assignments. 

Indifference  to  need  for  help.  Distracting  facial  expressions. 

Too  close  holdmg  to  the  text.  .....    ,^    °r  »i     i-  „  L  ^„^^« 

Distant  attitude-aloofness.  ^"^^^^^  ^^    ^°^^^^S  ''  °^^'- 

Partiality.  Sarcasm. 

Excitability.  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^  dress. 

Irritability.'  Bluffing — "the  tables  turned." 

Pessimism— "in  the  dumps."  Discipline  for  discipline's  sake. 

Indifferent  assignments.  "Holier  than  thouness." 

Desirable  Capabilities 

They  also  reduced  to  rather  memorable  phrases  a  half 
dozen  desirable  capabihties: 

1.  The  ability  to  make  students  work  and  want  to  work. 

2.  The  ability  to  make   definite   assignments. 

3.  The  ability  to  make  clear  explanations. 

4.  The  ability  to  be  pleasant  without  being  easy. 

5.  The  ability  to  emphasize    essentials. 

6.  The  ability  to  capitalize  on  new  ideas. 

7.  The  ability  to  be  human. 

A  number  of  years  ago  Clapp  conducted  a  similar  survey 
among  one  hundred  leading  school  men  of  America,  asking 
them  to  list  the  ten  most  essential  characteristics  of  a  good 
teacher.    From  the  hsts  sent  in  Clapp  compiled  the  ten 


Personality 


23 


qualities  in  the  order  named  most  frequently  by  the  one 
hundred  men: 


1.  Sympathy. 

2.  Address. 

3.  Enthusiasm. 

4.  Sincerity. 

5.  Personal  Appearance. 


6.  Optimism. 

7.  Scholarship. 

8.  Vitality. 

9.  Fairness. 

10.  Reserve  or  dignity. 


George  Herbert  Betts,  in  his  stimulating  book,  How  to 
Teach  Religion,  says  there  are  three  classes  of  teachers: 

"Two  types  of  teachers  are  remembered:  One  to  be  forgiven  after 
years  have  softened  the  antagonisms  and  resentments;  the  other  to 
be  thought  of  with  honor  and  gratitude  as  long  as  memory  lasts. 
Between  these  two  is  a  third  and  a  larger  group:  those  who  are 
forgotten,  because  they  failed  to  stamp  a  lasting  impression  on  their 
pupils.  This  group  represents  the  mediocrity  of  the  profession,  not 
bad  enough  to  be  actively  forgiven,  not  good  enough  to  claim  a  place 
in  gratitude  and  remembrance." 

Mr.  Betts  then  goes  on  with  a  very  exhaustive  list  of 
positive  and  negative  qualities  in  teachers — a  list  so  valua- 
ble that  v^e  set  it  down  here  for  reference. 


Positive  Qualities 

1.  Open  -  minded,    inquiring, 
broad. 

2.  Accurate,      thorough,      dis- 
cerning. 

3.  Judicious,  balanced,  fair. 

4.  Original,    independent,    re- 
sourceful. 

5.  Decisive,  possessing  convic- 
tions. 

6.  Cheerful,  joyous,  optimistic. 

7.  Amiable,  friendly,  agreeable. 

8.  Democratic,  broadly  syrmpa- 
thetic 

9.  Tolerant,    sense    of  humor, 
generous. 


Negative  Qualities 

Narrow,    dogmatic,   not    hungry 

for  truth. 
Indefinite,  superficial,  lazy. 

Prejudiced,  led  by  likes  and  dis- 
likes. 

Dependent,  imitative,  subservi- 
ent. 

Uncertain,  wavering,  undecided. 

Gloomy,  morose,  pessimistic, 
bitter. 

Repellent,  unsociable,  disagree- 
able. 

Snobbish,  self  -  centered,  exclu- 
sive. 

Opinionated,  dogmatic,  intol- 
erant. 


24  Principles  of  Teaching 

10.  Kind,  courteous,  tactful.  Cruel,  rude,  untactful. 

11.  Tractable,     co  -   operative.  Stubborn,  not  able  to  work  with 
teachable.  others. 

12.  Loyal,    honorable,    depend-  Disloyal,     uncertain      dependa- 
able.  bility. 

13.  Executive,  forceful,  vigorous.  Uncertain,  weak,  not  capable. 

14.  High  ideals,  worthy,  exalted.  Low  standards,  base,  contempti- 

ble. 

15.  Modest,  self-effacing.  Egotistical,  vain,  autocratic. 

16.  Courageous,  daring,  firm.  Overcautious,  weak,  vacillating. 

17.  Honest,  truthful,  frank,  sin-  Low    standards    of    honor    and 
cere.  truth. 

18.  Patient,  calm,  equable.  Irritable,  excitable,  moody. 

19.  Generous,  open-hearted,  for-  Stingy,  selfish,  resentful, 
giving. 

20.  Responsive,  congenial.  Cold,  repulsive,  uninviting. 

21.  Punctual,   on  schedule,  ca-  Tardy,  usually  behindhand,  in- 
pable.  capable. 

22.  Methodical,  consistent,  log-  Haphazard,   desultory,    inconsis- 
ical.  tent. 

23.  Altruistic,  given  to  service.  Indifferent,  not  socially  minded. 

24.  Refined,    alive    to    beauty.  Coarse,  lacking  aesthetic  quality, 
artistic. 

25.  Self-controlled,  decision.  Suggestible,  easily  led,  uncertain, 
purpose. 

26.  Good  physical  carriage,  dig-  Lack    of    poise,    ill    posture,   no 
nity.  grace. 

27.  Taste  in  attire,  cleanliness,  Careless    in    dress,    frumpy,    no 
pride.  pride. 

28.  Face  smiling,  voice  pleasant.  Somber    expression,    voice    un- 

pleasant. 

29.  Physical    endurance,    vigor,  Quickly  tired,  weak,  sluggish, 
strength. 

30.  Spiritual   rseponsiveness,  Spiritually  weak,  inconstant,  un- 
strong.  certain. 

31.  Prayer  life  warm,  satisfying.  Prayer  cold,  formal,  little  com- 

fort. 

32.  Religious    certainty,    peace.      Conflict,  strain,  uncertainty, 
quiet. 

33.  Religious      experience      ex-  Spiritual    life    static    or    losing 
panding.  force. 

34.  God  a  near,  inspiring  real-  God  dir.tant,  unreal,  hard  of  ap- 
ity.  proach. 


Personality  25 

35.  Power  to  win  others  to  re-  Influence  little  or  negative, 
ligion. 

36.  Interest  in  Bible    and    reli-  Little   concern   for    religion   and 
gion.  Bible. 

37.  Religion    makes    life    fuller  Religion  felt  as  a  limitation, 
and  richer. 

38.  Deeply  believe  great  funda-  Lacking  in  foundations  for  faith, 
mentals. 

39.  Increasing  triumph  over  sin.  Too     frequent     falling     before 

temptation. 

40.  Religious  future  hopeful.  Religious  growth  uncertain. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  IV 

1,  Think  of  the  teachers  who  stand  out  most  clearly  in  your 
memory.    Why  do  they  so  stand  out? 

2,  Name  the  qualities  that  made  the  Savior  the  Great  Teacher. 

3,  If  you  had  to  choose  between  a  fairly  capable  but  humble 
teacher,  and  a  very  capable  but  conceited  one,  which  one  would  be 
your  choice?  Why? 

4,  What  is  your  argument  against  the  idea,  "Teachers  are  born, 
not  made"? 

5,  Discuss  the  relative  significance  of  the  qualities  quoted  from 
Betts. 


Helpful  References 

O'Shea,  Every-day  Problems  in  Teaching;  Betts,  How  to  Teach 
Religion;  Brumbaugh,  The  Making  of  a  Teacher;  Palmer,  The  Ideal 
Teacher;  Slattery,  Living  Teachers;  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School 
Teachers. 


CHAPTER  V 

PERSONALITY 

Outline — Chapter  V 

The  six  major  qualities:  —  a.  Sympathy.  —  b.  Sincerity.  —  c.  Op- 
timism.—  d.  Scholarly  attitude.  —  e.  Vitality.  —  f.  Spirituahty. 

To  set  about  to  cultivate  separate  qualities  would  be 
rather  a  discouraging  undertaking.  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
many  of  the  characteristics  named  really  overlap,  while 
others  are  secondary  in  importance.  For  practical  purposes 
let  us  enlarge  upon  five  or  six  qualities  which  everyone 
will  agree  are  fundamental  to  teaching  success. 

The  class  in  Teacher  Training,  at  the  Brigham  Young 
University,  in  the  summer  of  1920,  named  these  six  as  the 
most  fundamental: 

1.  Sympathy.  4.    Scholarly  attitude. 

2.  Sincerity.  5.    Vitality. 

3.  Optimism.  6.     Spirituality. 

No  attempt  was  made  to  set  them  down  in  the  order  of 
relative  importance. 

1.     Sympathy 

This  is  a  very  broad  and  far-reaching  term.  It  rests 
upon  experience  and  imagination  and  involves  the  ability 
to  live,  at  least  temporarily,  someone  else's  life.  Sympathy 
is  fundamentally  vicarious.  Properly  to  sympathize  with 
children  a  man  must  re-live  in  memory  his  own  childhood 
or  he  must  have  the  power  of  imagination  to  see  things 
through  their  eyes.  Many  a  teacher  has  condemned  pupils 
for  doing  what  to  them  was  perfectly  normal.  We  too  fre- 
quently persist  in  viewing  a  situation  from  our  own  point 


Personality  27 

of  view  rather  than  in  going  around  to  the  other  side  to 
look  at  it  as  our  pupils  see  it.  It  is  no  easy  matter  thus 
"to  get  out  of  ourselves"  and  become  a  boy  or  girl  again, 
but  it  is  worth  the  effort. 

Along  with  this  ability  at  vicarious  living,  sympathy  in- 
volves an  interest  in  others.  Sympathy  is  a  matter  of  con- 
cern in  the  affairs  of  others.  The  rush  and  stir  of  modern 
life  fairly  seem  to  force  us  to  focus  our  attention  upon 
self,  but  if  we  would  succeed  as  teachers,  we  must  make 
ourselves  enter  into  the  lives  of  our  pupils  out  of  an  inter- 
est to  see  how  they  conduct  their  lives,  and  the  reasons  for 
such  conduct. 

Coupled  with  this  interest  in  others  and  the  imagination 
to  see  through  their  eyes,  sympathy  involves  a  desire  to 
help  them.  A  man  may  have  an  interest  in  people  born  out 
of  mere  curiosity  or  for  selfish  purposes,  but  if  he  has  sym- 
pathy for  them,  he  must  be  moved  with  a  desire  to  help 
and  to  bless  them. 

And,  finally,  sympathy  involves  the  actual  doing  of 
something  by  way  of  service.  President  Grant  liked  to  refer 
to  a  situation  wherein  a  particular  person  was  in  distress. 
Friends  of  all  sorts  came  along  expressing  regret  and  pro- 
fessing sympathy.  Finally  a  fellow  stepped  forward  and 
said,  "I  feel  to  sympathize  with  this  person  to  the  extent  of 
fifty  dollars."  "That  man,"  said  President  Grant,  "has 
sympathy  in  his  heart  as  well  as  in  his  purse." 

2.     Sincerity 

Surely  this  is  a  foundation  principle  in  teaching: 

"Thou  must  to  thyself  be  true, 

If  thou  the  truth  would  teach; 
Thy  soul  must  overflow. 

If  thou  another  soul  would  reach." 


28  Principles  of  Teaching 

A  teacher  must  really  be  converted  to  what  he  teaches 
or  there  is  a  hollowness  to  all  that  he  utters.  "Children 
and  dogs,"  it  is  said,  are  the  great  judges  of  sincerity — 
they  instinctively  know  a  friend.  No  teacher  can  continue 
to  stand  on  false  ground  before  his  pupils.  The  superin- 
tendent of  one  of  our  Sunday  Schools,  having  selected  one 
of  the  most  talented  persons  in  his  ward  to  teach  a  Second 
Intermediate  Class  was  astonished  some  months  later  to 
receive  a  request  from  the  class  for  a  change  of  teachers. 
The  class  could  assign  no  specific  reasons  for  their  objec- 
tions, except  that  they  didn't  get  anything  out  of  the  class. 
A  year  later  the  superintendent  learned  that  the  teacher 
was  living  in  violation  of  the  regulations  of  the  Church, 
on  a  particular  principle,  and  it  was  perfectly  clear  why 
his  message  didn't  ring  home. 

The  sincere  teacher  not  only  believes  what  he  teaches — 
he  consecrates  his  best  efforts  to  the  task  in  hand.  He 
urges  no  excuse  for  absence  or  lack  of  preparation — "he 
is  there."  He  lets  his  class  feel  that  for  the  time  being 
it  is  his  greatest  concern.  He  meets  with  boys  and  girls 
because  he  loves  to  and  reaches  out  to  them  with  an  en- 
thusiasm that  cannot  be  questioned. 

3.     Optimism 

is  the  sunshine  of  the  classroom.  It  is  as  natural  to  expect 
a  plant  to  develop  when  covered  with  a  blanket  as  it  is  to 
expect  a  class  to  be  full  of  activity  and  responsiveness 
under  an  influence  of  unnatural  solemnity.  Lincoln  is 
quoted  as  having  declared,  "You  can  catch  more  flies  with 
a  drop  of  honey  than  with  a  gallon  of  vinegar" — a  homely 
expression,  but  full  of  suggestion.  A  grouch  is  no  magnet. 
A  little  girl  when  questioned  why  she  liked  her  Sunday 
School  teacher  said,  "Oh,  she  always  smiles  at  me  and  says, 


Personality  29 

hello."  There  is  contagion  in  the  cheeriness  of  a  smile  that 
cannot  be  resisted.  Children  live  so  naturally  in  an  atmos- 
phere of  happiness  and  fun  that  teachers  of  religious  in- 
struction may  well  guard  against  making  their  work  too 
formally  sober.  Frequently  teachers  feel  the  seriousness 
of  their  undertaking  so  keenly  that  they  worry  or  discipline 
themselves  into  a  state  of  pedagogical  unnaturalness.  There 
is  very  great  force  behind  the  comment  of  the  student  who 
appreciated  the  teacher  who  could  be  human.  The  expe- 
rience is  told  of  a  teacher  who  continued  to  have  difficulty 
with  one  of  her  pupils.  He  so  persisted  in  violating  regu- 
lations that  he  was  kept  in  after  school  regularly,  and  yet 
after  school  hours  he  was  one  of  the  most  helpful  lads  in 
the  school;  in  fact,  he  and  the  teacher  seemed  almost 
chummy.  Struck  by  the  difference  in  his  attitude,  the 
teacher  remarked  to  him  one  afternoon,  as  he  went  about 
cleaning  the  blackboard,  "Jimmie,  I  have  just  been  won- 
dering about  you.  You're  one  of  my  best  workers  after 
school — I  can't  understand  how  you  can  be  so  different 
during  school  hours  and  after." 

"Gee,  that's  funny,"  put  in  Jimmie,  "I  was  just  thinking 
the  same  thing  about  you." 

To  be  cheerful  without  being  easy  is  a  real  art.  Liberty 
is  so  often  converted  into  license,  and  a  spirit  of  fun  so 
easily  transformed  into  mischief  and  disorder.  And  yei 
cheerfulness  is  the  great  key  to  the  human  heart. 

An  attitude  of  looking  for  the  good  in  pupils  will  lead 
to  a  response  of  friendliness  on  their  part  which  is  the 
basis  of  all  teaching. 

4.     Scholarly  Attitude 

If  a  teacher  would  cultivate  an  appetite  for  learning 
among  his  pupils  he  must  himself  hunger  for  knowledge. 


30  Principles  of  Teaching 

Most  young  people  will  "take  intellectually  if  sufficiently 
exposed."  A  scholarly  attitude  implies  first  of  all  a 
growing  mastery  of  subject  matter.  To  quote  an  eminent 
writer  on  religious  education,  "A  common  bane  of  Sunday 
school  teaching  has  been  the  haziness  of  the  teacher's  own 
ideas  concerning  the  truths  of  religion." 

Fancy  the  hostess  who  would  invite  her  guests  to  a  din- 
ner, and  upon  their  arrival  indicate  to  them  that  she  had 
made  only  vague  plans  to  receive  them.  No  special  place 
for  their  wraps,  no  entertainment  for  their  amusement,  and 
then  fancy  her  asking  them  to  sit  down  to  a  warmed-up 
conglomeration  of  left-overs. 

Of  course,  it  is  only  in  fancy  that  we  can  imagine  such  a 
service.  Yet  reports  frequently  indicate  that  there  are  class 
recitations,  intellectual  banquets,  for  which  the  prepara- 
tion has  been  about  as  meagre  as  that  indicated.  Surely 
he  who  would  feast  others  upon  His  word  should  prepare 
unceasingly.  Let  us  keep  in  mind  the  comment — "We  like 
the  fellow  who  tells  us  something  new." 

Along  with  this  mastery  of  subject  matter,  a  scholarly 
attitude  implies  both  broadmindedness  and  openminded- 
ness.  Seekers  after  truth  should  welcome  it  from  all  avail- 
able sources,  and  ought  not  to  be  handicapped  by  bias  or 
prejudice.  Tolerance  and  a  willingness  to  entertain  ques- 
tions —  a  constant  effort  to  view  a  subject  from  every 
possible  angle  —  a  poise  that  attends  self-control  even 
under  stress  of  annoyance — these  things  are  all  involved 
in  a  truly  scholarly  attack  upon  any  given  problem. 

5.       VlTALnT 

One  of  the  qualities  most  favorably  and  frequently  com- 
mented on  by  students  is  what  they  call  "pep."  A  certain 
vigor  of  attack  that  seems  to  go  directly  to  the  point  at 


Personality  31 

stake,  putting  at  rest  all  other  business  and  making  disci- 
pline unnecessary,  is  what  twentieth  century  young  people 
seem  to  like.  The  element  of  hero  worship  prompts  them 
to  demand  that  the  leader  shall  "do  things."  They  like  the 
"push"  that  takes  a  man  over  the  top,  the  drive  that  wins 
a  ball  game,  the  energy  that  stamps  the  business  man  with 
success.   Vitality  is  an  inherent  factor  in  leadership. 

6.     Spirituality 

The  crowning  glory  of  the  successful  religious  teacher  is 
that  spiritual  glow  which  links  up  heaven  and  earth. 

"And  the  Spirit  shall  be  given  unto  you  by  the  power  of  faith, 
and  if  ye  receive  not  the  Spirit,  ye  shall  not  teach."  (Doc.  &  Gov., 
Sec.  42:14.) 

This  divine  injunction  is  given  us  because  we  have 
undertaken  to  teach  His  Gospel.  We  would  lead  others  to 
Him.  And  this  is  possible  only  as  we  lead  by  the  light  of 
His  Holy  Spirit.  Above  our  knowledge  of  facts  and  our 
understanding  of  child  nature  must  be  placed  our  com- 
munion with  that  Spirit  which  touches  the  hearts  of  men. 

If  a  teacher  would  prepare  a  young  man  for  a  place  in 
a  modern  business  house  he  must  teach  him  the  ways  of 
business, — buying,  selling,  collecting,  managing,  etc., — 
matters  of  fact,  governed  by  the  laws  of  barter  and  trade. 
If  that  same  teacher  would  teach  the  same  young  man  the 
way  of  eternal  life,  he  must  substitute  for  the  laws  of  man 
the  word  of  the  Lord,  and  for  the  spirit  of  exchange,  the 
Spirit  of  Heaven.  A  pupil  can  be  prepared  for  the  king- 
dom of  God  only  as  he  is  led  to  respond  to  and  appreciate 
His  Spirit,  and  to  do  His  will.  While  it  is  true  that  the 
best  way  to  prepare  for  heaven  is  to  live  the  best  possible 
life  here  on  earth,  yet  we  need  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  to 
interpret  what  constitutes  that  best  possible  life. 


32  Principles  of  Teaching 

There  is  power  in  the  intellect  of  man;  there  is  glory  in 
that  power  when  it  is  heightened  by  the  Spirit  of  the 
Almighty. 

Questions   and   Suggestions — Chapter  V 

1.  What  is  sympathy? 

2.  Why  is  it  so  essential  in  teaching? 

3.  Why  is  sincerity  a  foundation  principle  in  all  teaching? 

4.  Discuss  the  obligation  on  the  part  of  the  teacher  to  leave  his 
troubles  outside  the  classroom. 

5.  Discuss  the  statement — "Cheerfulness  is  spiritual  sunshine." 

6.  Illustrate  the  value  of  cheerfulness. 

7.  What  is  the  significance  of  the  term,  scholarly  attitude? 
S.  Just  what  constitutes  vitality? 

9.  Show  how  it  is  essential  to  teaching. 

10.     Why   name  spirituality  as  the  crowning  characteristic  of  tli.- 
good  teacher? 

Helpful  References 
Those  listed  in  Chapter  IV. 


CHAPTER  VT 

ATTAINMENT 

Outline — Chapter  VI 

The  possibility  of  growth  in  teaching. — How  to  develop  spiritual- 
ity: a.  By  cultivating  the  spirit  of  prayer;  b.  By  leading  a  clean 
life;  c.  By  obeying  the  principles  of  the  Gospel;  d.  By  performing 
one's  duty  in  the  Church;  e.  By  reading  and  pondering  the  word 
of  the  Lord. — How  to  develop  other  qualities:  a.  By  taking  a  per- 
sonal inventory;  b.  By  coming  in  contact  with  the  best  in  life  through 
reading  and  companionship;  c.  By  forming  the  habit  of  systematic 
study;  d.  By  assuming  responsibility. 

While  we  may  agree  as  to  what  constitutes  the  desirable 
characteristics  in  teachers  it  is  far  easier  to  name  them 
than  to  attain  them.  We  have  already  pointed  out  that 
teaching  is  a  complex  art  proficiency  in  which  is  the  result 
of  a  long,  painstaking  process.  But  success  in  teaching  as 
in  all  other  pursuits  is  possible  of  achievement.  We  have 
heard  so  frequently  that  teachers  must  be  born,  not  made, 
that  many  prospective  teachers,  feeling  that  they  have 
been  denied  this  pedagogical  birthright,  give  up  in  despair. 
Of  course,  it  is  naturally  easy  for  some  individuals  to  teach 
— they  do  seem  born  possessed  of  a  teaching  personality, 
but  they  are  not  given  a  monopoly  on  the  profession. 

The  Lord  has  too  many  children  to  be  taught  to  leave 
their  instruction  to  a  few  favored  ones.  The  qualities  listed 
in  chapter  five  may  be  developed,  in  varying  degrees,  of 
course,  by  any  normal  person  anxious  to  serve  his  fellows. 
The  "will  to  do"  is  the  great  key  to  success. 

To  him  who  would  develop  spiritually,  these  five  sug- 
gestions may  be  helpful: 

First,  cultivate  the  spirit  of  prayer.  The  president  of 
one  of  our  stakes  made  the  remark  once  that  he  believed 
only  a  few  of  the  men  and  women  of  his  stake  really  pray. 
"They  go  through  the  form,  all  right,"  he  said;  "they  re- 


34  Principles  of  Teaching 

peal  the  words — but  they  do  not  enter  into  the  spirit  of 
the  prayer.  If  the  Lord  doesn't  draw  nearer  to  them  than 
they  do  to  Him  I  doubt  that  their  prayers  are  really  of 
very  great  force." 

The  ability  to  pray  is  the  great  test  of  a  spiritual  life. 
"The  faith  to  pray"  is  a  gift  to  be  cultivated  through  de- 
voted practice.  The  teacher  who  would  have  his  pupils 
draw  nearer  to  him  must  himself  draw  near  to  the  Lord. 
The  promise,  "Ask,  and  ye  shall  receive,  seek,  and  ye  shall 
find,"  was  given  only  to  those  who  ask  in  faith.  This  con- 
stant prayer  of  faith,  then  is  the  first  great  guarantee  of 
the  Spirit. 

The  second  is  a  clean  life.  Just  as  it  is  impossible  for 
water  to  make  its  way  through  a  dirty,  clogged  pipe,  so 
it  is  for  the  Spirit  to  flow  through  a  channel  of  unrighteous 
desires.  A  visitor  was  interested  a  short  time  ago  in 
Canada  in  attempting  to  get  a  drink  out  of  a  pipe  that  had 
been  installed  to  carry  water  from  a  spring  in  the  side  of 
a  mountain  to  a  pool  at  the  side  of  the  road.  Due  to  neg- 
lect, moss  and  filth  had  been  allowed  to  collect  about  the 
bottom  of  the  pipe,  until  it  was  nearly  choked  up.  Getting 
a  drink  was  out  of  the  question.  And  yet  there  was  plenty 
of  water  in  the  spring  above — just  as  fine  water  as  had  ever 
flowed  from  that  source.  It  was  simply  denied  passage 
down  to  those  who  would  drink.  And  so  with  the  Spirit. 
The  Lord  is  still  able  to  bless  —  all  too  frequently,  we  so 
live  that  "the  passage  is  clogged."  The  Word  of  Wisdom 
is  not  only  a  guarantee  of  health  —  it  is  the  key  to  com- 
munication with  the  Spirit.  And  what  is  true  of  the  body 
applies  with  even  greater  force  to  cleanliness  of  mind.  The 
teacher  might  well  adopt  this  prayer: 

"Create  in  me  a  clean  heart,  O  God,  and  renew  a  right  spirit 

within  me." 


Attainment  35 

The  third  great  guarantee  of  the  Spirit  is  an  unswerving 
obedience  to  all  principles  of  the  Gospel.  To  teach  belief 
a  man  must  believe.  Firmly  grounded  in  all  the  cardinal 
principles  the  teacher  may  well  inspire  a  spirit  of  the  Gos- 
pel, but  not  otherwise.  Doubt  and  uncertainty  will  keep 
the  teacher  from  the  position  of  counsel  and  leadership. 

The  fourth  assurance  in  the  matter  of  developing  spirit- 
uality is  the  consistent  performance  of  one's  religious  obli- 
gations. The  complaint  is  often  made  that  teachers  in  a 
particular  organization  will  meet  their  classes  regularly, 
but  that  done  they  seem  to  consider  their  religious  duties 
discharged.  Teaching  does  not  excuse  a  person  from  at- 
tending the  other  services  required  of  Latter-day  Saints. 
He  is  asked  to  attend  Sacrament  meetings.  Priesthood  meet- 
ings, Union  meetings,  special  preparation  meetings — they 
are  all  essential  to  the  full  development  of  the  Spirit  of 
the  Gospel,  which  is  the  spirit  of  teaching.  The  teacher 
may  rightly  expect  to  be  sustained  only  as  he  sustains  those 
who  preside  over  him. 

"For  with  what  judgment  ye  judge,  ye  shall  be  judged:  and  with 
what  measure  ye  mete,  it  shall  be  measured  to  you  again."  (Matt. 
7:2.) 

And  finally,  if  we  would  enjoy  the  spirit  of  our  work 
we  must  familiarize  ourselves  with  the  Word  of  the  Lord. 
To  read  it  is  to  associate  in  thought  with  Him.  His  Spirit 
pervades  all  that  He  has  said,  whether  in  ancient  or  modern 
times.  One  of  our  apostles  frequently  remarked  that  if  he 
would  feel  fully  in  touch  with  the  spirit  of  his  calling  he 
must  read  regularly  from  the  Doctrine  &  Covenants.  "That 
book  keeps  me  attuned  as  no  other  book  can."  It  is  not 
given  to  us  to  associate  here  with  the  Master,  but  through 
His  recorded  words  we  can  live  over  all  that  He  once  lived. 
Thereby  we  not  only  come  really  to  know  what  He  would 


36  Principles  of  Teaching 

have  us  do,  we  partake  of  a  spirit  that  surpasses  under- 
standing. 

"Search  the  scriptures,  for  in  them  ye  think  ye  liave  eternal  Ufe." 

As  for  attainment  in  other  matters  involved  in  the  teach- 
ing process,  the  teachers  who  attended  the  course  at  the 
Brigham  Young  University  were  agreed  that  regular  prac- 
tice in  the  following  processes  will  insure  marked  growth 
and  development: 

1.  The  taking  of  a  personal  inventory  at  regular  inter- 
vals. "Am  I  the  kind  of  teacher  I  should  like  to  go  to?" 
starts  an  investigation  full  of  suggestiveness.  The  qualities 
listed  in  chapter  four  constitute  a  reference  chart  for 
analysis.  A  teacher  can  become  his  own  best  critic  if  he 
sets  up  the  proper  ideals  by  way  of  a  standard.  A  teacher 
in  one  of  our  Church  schools  in  Idaho  carried  out  an  inter- 
esting investigation  during  the  year  1919-1920.  Anxious 
that  he  should  not  monopolize  the  time  in  his  recitations, 
he  asked  one  of  his  students  to  tabulate  the  time  of  the 
class  period  as  follows: 


Number  of  questions  asked  by  teacher. 
Number  of  questions  asked  by  pupils. 
Amoimt  of  time  consumed  by  teacher. 
Amount  of  time  consumed  by  pupils. 


He  was  astonished  to  discover  that  of  the  forty-five  min- 
utes given  to  recitation  he  was  regularly  using  an  average 
of  thirty-two  mintues.  Similar  investigations  can  be  car- 
ried on  by  any  interested  teacher. 

2.  Contact  with  the  best  in  life.  It  is  a  fundamental  law 
in  life  that  life  is  an  adaptation  to  environment.  The  writer 
has  been  interested  in  observing  the  force  of  this  law  as  it 
affects  animal  life.  Lizards  in  Emery  county  are  slate-gray 
in  color  that  they  may  be  less  conspicuous  on     a  back- 


Attainment  37 

ground  of  clay  and  gray  sandstone;  the  same  animals  in 
St.  George  take  on  a  reddish  color — an  adaptation  to  their 
environment  of  red  sandstone. 

Nor  is  the  operation  of  this  law  merely  a  physical  proc- 
ess. On  a  trip  into  Canada  recently  the  writer  traveled  some 
distance  with  a  group  of  bankers  in  attendance  at  a  conven- 
tion at  Great  Falls.  On  his  way  home  he  took  a  train  on 
which  there  was  a  troupe  of  vaudeville  players.  The  con- 
trast was  too  marked  to  escape  notice.  One  group  had  re- 
sponded to  an  environment  of  sober  business  negotiations 
— the  other  to  the  gayety  of  the  footlights.  And  so  the 
teacher  who  would  grow  must  put  himself  into  an  environ- 
ment that  makes  the  kind  of  growth  he  desires  natural — 
inevitable.  Through  good  books  he  can  associate  with  the 
choice  spirits  of  all  ages.  No  one  denies  his  acquaintance- 
ship. Great  men  have  given  their  best  thoughts  to  many 
of  the  problems  that  confront  us.  We  can  capitalize  on 
their  wisdom  by  reading  their  books.  We  re-enforce  our- 
selves with  their  strength. 

Magazines,  too,  are  full  of  stimulation.  They  constitute 
a  kind  of  intellectual  clearing  house  for  the  best  thought 
of  the  world  today.  Business  houses  value  them  so  highly 
in  promoting  the  advancement  of  their  employees  that  they 
subscribe  reguarly.  One  manager  remarked:  "No  one 
factor  makes  for  greater  growth  among  my  men  than  read- 
ing the  achievements  of  others — leaders  in  their  lines — 
through  the  magazines."  There  is  scarcely  a  phase  of  life 
which  is  not  being  fully  written  about  in  the  current  issues 
of  the  leading  magazines. 

Then,  too,  contact  with  men  and  women  of  achievement 
is  a  remarkable  stimulus  to  growth. 

There  are  leaders  in  every  community — men  and  women 
rich  in  experience — who  will  gladly  discuss  the  vital  issues 


38  Principles  of  Teaching 

of  life  with  those  who  approach  them.  There  still  remain, 
too,  pioneers  with  their  wonderful  stories  of  sacrifice  and 
devotion.  To  the  teacher  who  will  take  the  pains  there  is 
an  untold  wealth  of  material  in  the  lives  of  the  men  and 
women  about  him. 

3.  Regular  habits  of  systematic  study.  Thorough  inten- 
sive effort  finds  its  best  reward  in  the  intellectual  growth 
that  it  insures.  In  these  days  of  the  hurry  of  business  and 
the  whirl  of  commercialized  amusements  there  is  little  time 
left  for  study  except  for  him  who  makes  himself  subscribe 
to  a  system  of  work.  Thirty  minutes  of  concentrated  effort 
a  day  works  wonders  in  the  matter  of  growth.  President 
Grant  was  a  splendid  evidence  of  the  force  of  persistent 
effort  in  his  writing,  his  business  success,  and  his  rise  to 
the  leadership  of  half  a  million  Latter-day  Saints. 

4.  Assuming  the  obligations  of  responsibility.  In  every 
organization  there  are  constant  calls  upon  teachers  to  per- 
form laborious  tasks.  It  is  so  natural  to  seek  to  avoid  them 
— so  easy  to  leave  them  for  somebody  else — that  we  have 
to  cultivate  vigorously  a  habit  of  accepting  the  obligations 
that  present  themselves.  The  difficulties  of  responsibility 
are  often  burdensome,  but  they  are  an  essential  guarantee 
of  achievement.  "Welcome  the  task  that  makes  you  go 
beyond  your  ordinary  self,  if  you  would  grow!" 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  VI 

1.  Discuss  our  obligation  to  grow. 

2.  Point  out  the  difference  between  praying  and  merely  saying 
prayers. 

3.  Discuss  the  various  means  which  guarantee  spiritual  growth. 

4.  Comment  on  the  thought  that  a  personal  inventory  is  as  es- 
sential to  teaching  as  it  is  to  financial  success. 


Attainment  39 

5.  What  is  your  daily  scheme  for  systematic  study? 

6.  What  plan  do  you  follow  in  an  attempt  to  know  the  scrip- 
tures? 

7.  Why  is  it  so  important  that  we  assume  the   responsibilities 
placed  upon  us? 

Helpful  References 

Those  listed  in  Chapter  IV. 


CHAPTER  VII 

NATIVE  TENDENCIES 

Outline — Chapter  VII 

Importance  of  Child  Study  to  teachers. — Teaching  both  a  social 
and  an  individual  process. — A  Child's  charactertistics — his  birthright. 
— ^What  the  nervous  system  is. — Types  of  original  responses. — The 
significance  of  instinctive  action. — Colvin's  list  of  native  tendencies. 
— Sisson's  list. — A  knowledge  of  native  tendencies  essential  to  proper 
control  of  human  behavior. 

We  have  now  discussed  the  significance  and  meaning  of 
teaching,  together  with  the  consideration  of  the  character- 
istics that  constitute  the  personal  equation  of  the  teacher. 
It  is  now  pertinent  that  we  give  some  attention  to  the  nature 
of  the  child  to  be  taught,  that  we  may  the  more  intelligently 
discuss  methods  of  teaching,  or  how  teacher  and  pupil  get 
together  in  an  exchange  of  knowledge. 

Teaching  is  a  unique  process.  It  is  both  social  and  indi- 
vidual. The  teacher  meets  a  class — a  collection  of  pupils 
in  a  social  unit.  In  one  way  he  is  concerned  with  them  gen- 
erally— he  directs  group  action.  But  in  addition  to  this 
social  aspect,  the  problem  involves  his  giving  attention  to 
each  individual  in  the  group.  He  may  put  a  general  ques- 
tion, but  he  gets  an  individual  reply.  In  short,  he  must 
be  aware  of  the  fact  that  his  pupils,  for  purposes  of  recita- 
tion, are  all  alike;  and  at  the  same  time  he  must  appreciate 
the  fact  that  they  are  peculiarly  different.  In  a  later  chapter 
we  shall  consider  these  differences;  let  us  here  consider  the 
points  of  similarity. 

The  fact  that  a  boy  is  a  boy  makes  him  heir  to  all  of 
the  characteristics  that  man  has  developed.  These  charac- 
teristics are  his  birthright.  He  responds  in  a  particular  way 
to  stimuli  because  the  race  before  him  has  so  responded. 


Native  Tendencies  41 

There  is  no  need  here  of  entering  into  a  discussion  as  to 
how  great  a  controlling  factor  heredity  may  be  in  a  man's 
life,  or  how  potent  environment  may  be  in  modifying  that 
life — we  are  concerned  rather  with  the  result — that  man  is 
as  he  is.  It  is  essential  that  we  know  his  characteristics, 
particularly  as  they  manifest  themselves  in  youth,  so  that 
we  may  know  what  to  expect  in  his  conduct  and  so  that 
we  may  proceed  to  modify  and  control  that  conduct.  Just 
as  the  first  task  of  the  physician  is  to  diagnose  his  case — 
to  get  at  the  cause  of  the  difficulty  before  he  proceeds  to 
suggest  a  remedy — so  the  first  consideration  of  the  teacher 
is  a  query,  "Whom  do  I  teach?" 

Man  may  normally  be  expected  to  respond  in  a  particular 
way  to  a  particular  stimulus  because  men  throughout  the 
history  of  the  race  have  so  responded.  Certain  connections 
have  been  established  in  his  nervous  system  and  he  acts 
accordingly — he  does  what  he  does  because  he  is  man. 
We  cannot  here  go  into  a  detailed  discussion  of  the  physi- 
ological processes  involved  in  thinking  and  other  forms  of 
behavior,  but  perhaps  we  may  well  set  down  a  statement 
or  two  relative  to  man's  tendencies  to  act,  and  their  ex- 
planations : 

"The  nervous  system  is  composed  of  neurones  of  three  types: 
Those  that  receive,  the  afferent;  those  that  effect  action,  the  efferent; 
and  those  that  connect,  the  associative.  The  meeting  places  of  these 
neurones  are  the  synapses.  All  nuerones  have  the  three  character- 
istics of  sensitivity,  conductivity,  and  modifiability.  In  order  for  con- 
duct or  feeling  or  intellect  to  be  present,  at  least  two  nuerones  must 
be  active,  and  in  all  but  a  few  of  the  human  activities  many  more 
are  involved.  The  possibility  of  conduct  or  intelligence  depends  upon 
the  connections  at  the  synapses, — upon  the  possibility  of  the  current 
affecting  neurones  in  a  certain  definite  way.  The  possession  of  an 
'original  nature,'  then,  means  the  possession,  as  a  matter  of  inherit- 
ance, of  certain  connections  between  neurones,  the  possession  of 
certain  synapses  which  are  in  functional  contact  and  across  whidi 
a  current  may  pass  merely  as  a  matter  of  structure.  Just  why  cer- 
tain synapses  should  be  thus  connected  is  the  whole  question  of 
heredity.    Two  factors  seem   to  affect  the   functional  contact  of  a 


42  Principles  of  Teaching 


synapses, — first,  proximity  of  the  neurone  ends,  and  second,  some  sort 
of  permeability  which  makes  a  current  travel  on  one  rather  than 
another  of  two  neurones  equally  near  together  in  space.  This  prox- 
imity and  permeability  are  both  provided  for  by  the  structure  and 
constitution  of  the  nervous  system.  It  should  be  noted  that  the 
connection  of  neurones  is  not  a  one-to-one  affair,  but  the  multiplicity 
of  fibrils  provided  by  original  nature  makes  it  possible  for  one  affer- 
ent to  discharge  into  many  neurones,  and  for  one  efferent  neurone 
to  receive  the  current  from  many  neurones.  Thus  the  individual  when 
bom  is  equipped  with  potentialities  of  character,  intellect  and  con- 
duct, because  of  the  pre-formed  connections  or  tendencies  to  con- 
nections present  in  his  ner\^ous  system. 

"Types  of  Original  Responses. — These  unlearned  tendencies  which 
make  up  the  original  nature  of  the  human  race  are  usually  classified 
into  automatic  or  physiological  actions,  reflexes,  instincts,  and  capaci- 
ties. Automatic  actions  are  such  as  those  controlling  the  heart-beats, 
digestive  and  intestinal  movements;  the  contraction  of  the  pupil 
of  the  eye  from  light,  sneezing,  swallowing,  etc.,  are  reflexes;  imi- 
tation, fighting,  and  fear,  are  instincts,  which  capacities  refer  to  those 
more  subtle  traits  by  means  of  which  an  individual  becomes  a  good 
linguist,  or  is  tactful,  or  gains  skill  in  handling  tools.  However, 
there  is  no  sharp  line  of  division  between  these  various  unlearned 
tendencies;  what  one  psychologist  calls  a  reflex  or  a  series  of  re- 
flexes, another  will  call  an  instinct.  It  seems  better  to  consider  them 
as  of  the  same  general  character  but  differing  from  each  other  in 
simplicity,  definiteness,  uniformity  of  response,  variableness  among 
individuals,  and  modifiability.  They  range  from  movements  such  as 
the  action  of  the  blood  vessels  to  those  concerned  in  hunting  and 
collecting;  from  the  simple,  definite,  uniform  knee-jerk,  which  is 
very  similar  in  all  people  and  open  to  very  little  modification,  to 
the  capacity  for  scholarship,  which  is  extremely  complex,  vague  as 
to  definition,  variable  both  as  to  manifestation  in  one  individual  and 
amounts  amongst  people  in  general,  and  is  open  to  almost  endless 
modification.  This  fund  of  unlearned  tendencies  is  the  capital  with 
which  each  child  starts,  the  capital  which  makes  education  and  prog- 
ress possible,  as  well  as  the  capital  which  limits  the  extent  to  which 
progress  and  development  in  any  line  may  proceed."  The  Psychology 
of  Childhood,  pp.  21,  22,  23. 

Weigle,  in  his  Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teachers,  begins 
his  second  chapter  in  a  rather  unique  and  helpful  manner 
relative  to  this  same  question: 

"The  little  human  animal,  like  every  other,  is  born  going.  He  is 
already  wound  up.  His  lungs  expand  and  contract;  his  heart  is 
pumping  away;  his  stomach  is  ready  to  handle  food.  These  organic, 
vital  acitivities  he  does  not  initiate.  They  begin  themselves.  The 
organism  possesses  them  by  nature.  They  are  the  very  conditions 
of  life. 


Native  TENDENcms  43 

"There  are  many  other  activities,  not  so  obviously  vital  as  these, 
for  which  nature  vi^inds  him  up  quite  as  thoroughly — yes,  and  sets 
him  to  go  off  at  the  proper  time  for  each.  He  will  suck  when 
brought  to  the  breast  as  unfailingly  as  his  lungs  will  begin  to  work 
upon  contact  with  the  air.  He  will  cry  from  hunger  or  discomfort, 
clasp  anything  that  touches  his  fingers  or  toes,  carry  to  his  mouth 
whatever  he  can  grasp,  in  time  smile  when  smiled  at,  later  grow 
afraid  when  left  alone  or  in  the  dark,  manifest  anger  and  affection, 
walk,  run,  play,  question,  imitate,  collect  things,  pull  things  apart, 
put  them  together  again,  take  pleasure  in  being  with  friends,  act 
shy  before  strangers,  find  a  chum,  belong  to  a  'gang'  or  'bunch,' 
quarrel,  fight,  become  reconciled,  and  some  day  fall  in  love  with 
one  of  the  opposite  sex.  These,  and  many  more,  are  just  his  nat- 
ural human  ways.  He  does  not  of  purpose  initiate  them  any  more 
than  he  initiates  breathing  or  heart-beat.  He  does  these  things  be- 
cause he  is  so  born  and  built.   They  are  his  instincts." 

As  Norsworthy  and  Whitley  point  out,  we  are  not  espe- 
cially concerned  with  the  boundary  lines  between  auto- 
matic actions,  reflexes,  and  instincts — we  are  rather  con- 
cerned with  the  fact  that  human  beings  possess  native 
tendencies  to  act  in  particular  ways.  Some  psychologists 
stress  them  as  instincts;  others  as  capacities,  but  they  have 
all  pretty  generally  agreed  that  under  certain  stimuli  there 
are  natural  tendencies  to  react. 

These  tendencies  begin  to  manifest  themselves  at  birth — 
they  are  all  potentialities  with  the  birth  of  the  child — and 
continue  to  develop  in  turn,  certain  ones  being  more  pro- 
nounced in  the  various  stages  of  the  child's  life.  Colvin 
in  his  The  Learning  Process,  runs  through  the  complete 
list  of  possibilities.  According  to  him  man,  in  a  lifetime, 
is  characterized  by  the  following  tendencies:  Fear,  anger, 
sympathy,  affection,  play,  imitation,  curiosity,  acquisitive- 
ness, constructiveness,  self-assertion  (leadership),  self- 
abasement,  rivalry,  envy,  jealousy,  pugnacity,  clannishness, 
the  hunting  and  predatory  instincts,  the  migratory  instinct, 
love  of  adventure  and  the  unknown,  superstition,  the  sex 
instincts,  which  express  themselves  in  sex-love,  vanity,  co- 
quetry, modesty;  and,  closely  allied  with  these,  the  love  of 


44  Principles  of  Teaching 

nature  and  of  solitude,  and  the  aesthetic,  the  religious,  and 
the  moral  emotions. 

Sisson,  in  a  little  book  that  every  teacher  ought  to  know, 
The  Essentials  of  Character,  emphasizes  the  importance  for 
teaching  of  ten  tendencies:  bodily  activity,  sense-hunger 
and  curiosity,  suggestibility,  tastes  and  aesthetic  apprecia- 
tion, self-assertion,  love,  joy,  fear,  the  grov^ing-up  impulse, 
the  love  of  approbation. 

As  already  indicated,  the  teacher  should  give  attention 
to  these  tendencies  that  he  may  the  better  know  how  to 
proceed.  If  he  knows  that  the  one  great  outstanding  im- 
pulse of  a  boy  of  seven  is  to  do  something,  he  perhaps  will 
be  less  likely  to  plan  an  hour's  recitation  on  the  theory 
that  for  that  hour  the  boy  is  to  do  nothing.  If  he  knows 
that  one  of  the  greatest  tendencies  of  boys  from  ten  to 
fourteen  is  to  organize  "gangs"  for  social  and  "political" 
purposes,  he  will  very  likely  capitalize  on  this  idea  in 
building  up  a  good  strong  class  spirit. 

Knowing  that  children  naturally  respond  to  certain 
stimuli  in  very  definite  ways,  the  teacher  can  better  set 
about  to  furnish  the  right  stimuli — he  can  be  in  a  better 
position  to  direct  and  control  behavior. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  VII 

1.  What  significance  attaches  to  the  statement,  "Children  are 
born  'going' "? 

2.  Why  is  it  of  vital  importance  that  teachers  give  attention  to 
the  native  tendencies  in  children? 

3.  What  constitutes  instinctive  action?    Illustrate. 

4.  Name  the  instincts  that  are  essentially  individualistic.  Those 
that  are  essentially  social. 

5.  What  native  tendencies  are  of  most  concern  to  teachers? 


Native  Tendencies  45 


6.  Discuss  the  relative  significance  of  heredity,  environment,  and 
training  in  the  development  of  children. 

7.  To  what  extent  is  a  child  limited  in  its  development  by  its 
nervous  system? 

Helpful  References 

Norswortliy  and  Whitley,  The  Psychology  of  Childhood;  Weigle, 
Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teachers;  Colvin,  The  Learning  Process,; 
Sisson,  The  Essentials  of  Character;  Stiles,  The  Nervous  System  and 
its  Conservation;  Thorndike,  Principles  of  Teaching;  Harrison,  A 
Study  of  Child  Nature:  Kirkpatrick,  Fundamentals  of  Child  Study. 


CHAPTER  VITT 


"WHAT  TO  DO  WITfi  NATIVE  TENDENCIES" 

OuTriNE — Chapter  VIII 

Characteristic  tendencies  of  the  various  stages  of  child  Hfe. — The 
teacher's  attitude  toward  them. — Follow  the  grain. 

Four  methods  of  procedure:  1.  The  method  of  disuse;  2.  The 
method  of  rewards  and  punishment:  3.  The  method  of  substitution; 
4.  The  method  of  stimulation  and  sublimation. 

Having  listed  the  native  tendencies  generally,  v^^e  might 
well  nov^  consider  them  as  they  manifest  themselves  at  the 
various  stages  of  an  individual's  development.  As  already 
indicated,  they  constitute  his  birthright  as  a  human  being, 
though  most  of  them  are  present  in  the  early  years  of  his 
life  only  in  potentiality.  Psychologists  of  recent  years  have 
made  extensive  observations  as  to  what  instincts  are  most 
prominent  at  given  periods.  Teachers  are  referred  particu- 
larly to  the  volumes  of  Kirkpatrick,  Harrison,  and  Nors- 
worthy  and  Whitley.  In  this  latter  book,  pages  286,  287, 
and  298-302,  will  be  found  an  interesting  tabluation  of 
characteristics  at  the  age  of  five  and  at  eleven.  For  the 
years  of  adolescence  Professor  Beeley,  in  his  course  at  the 
Brigham  Young  Summer  School,  in  the  Psychology  of 
Adolescence,  worked  out  very  fully  the  characteristics 
unique  in  this  period,  though  many  of  them,  of  course,  are 
present  at  other  stages: 

Characteristics  Unique  in  the  Adolescent  Period 

1.  Maturing    of    the    sex    in-  5.     Change  in  physical  propor- 
stincts.  tions;  features  take  on  defi- 

2.  Rapid  limb  growth.  nite  characteristics. 

3.  Over-awkwardness.  6.     Brain  structure  has  matured. 

4.  Visceral  organs  develop  rap-  7.     Self-awareness. 

idly     (heart,     liver,     lungs,         8.     Personal    pride    and    desire 
genital  organs.)  for  social  approval. 


What  to  Do  With  Native  Tendencies  47 


9.     Egotism.  IS.  Period     of     "palling"     and 

10.  U  n  s  t  a  b  1  e,  "hair-trigger,"  mating;  clique   and  "gang" 
conflicting  emotions.  ,^  spirit. 

11.  Altruism,  sincere  interesM-,,  l^-  Posmveness.  -  aff.rmat.on, 
the  well-being  of  others.  ^0.  Inordinate  desire  for  exces- 

12.  Religious  and  moral  awak-  sjyg  amusement. 

^rnT^E-  21.  Evidence   of   hereditary  in- 

13.  New  attitude.  fluences. 

14.  Aesthetic  awakening.  22.  j^Hero^wo  r  s  h  i  p,  "  castle 

15.  Puzzle  to  everybody.  23.  "Wanderlust." 

16.  Desire  to  abandon  conven-  24.  Hyper-suggestibility, 
tionalities,  struggle  for  self-  25.'  Ideals;  ambitions, 
assertion.  27.  Yearning  for  adult  responsi- 

17.  Career  motive.  bility. 

Having  listed  these  tendencies  we  still  face  the  question, 
"What  shall  we  do  with  them?  What  is  their  significance 
in  teaching?" 

It  is  perfectly  clear,  in  the  first  place,  that  we  ought  not 
to  ignore  them.  None  of  them  is  wholly  useless,  and  few 
of  them  can  safely  be  devoloped  just  as  they  first  manifest 
themselves.  They  call  for  training  and  direction. 

"Some  instincts  are  to  be  cherished  almost  as  they  are;  some 
rooted  out  by  withholding  stimuli,  or  by  making  their  exercise  result 
in  pain  or  discomfort,  or  by  substituting  desirable  habits  in  their 
place;  most  of  the  instincts  should  be  modified  and  redirected." — 
(Thorndike.) 

Our  concern  as  teachers  ought  to  be  that  in  our  work 
with  boys  and  girls,  men  and  women,  we  are  aware  of  these 
natural  tendencies  that  we  may  work  with  them  rather 
than  contrary  to  them — that  we  may  "follow  the  grain" 
of  human  nature. 

Since  these  tendencies  are  the  result  of  responses  to 
stimuli  they  may  be  modified  by  attention  either  to  the 
stimuli  or  to  the  reaction  that  attends  the  stimulation. 
Four  methods  call  for  our  consideration: 


48  Principles  of  Teaching 

1.  The  method  of  disuse. 

2.  The  method  of  rewards  and  punishments. 

3.  The  method  of  substitution. 

4.  The  method  of  stimulation  and  subHmation. 

No  one  of  these  methods  can  be  said  always  to  be  best. 
The  nature  of  the  person  in  question,  his  previous  experi- 
ence and  training,  together  with  the  circumstances  attend- 
ing a  given  situation,  all  are  factors  which  determine  how 
we  should  proceed.  The  vital  point  is,  that  both  as  par- 
ents and  teachers  we  should  guard  against  falling  into  the 
rut  of  applying  the  same  treatment  to  all  cases  regardless 
of  their  nature. 

1.     The  Method  of  Disuse 

This  method  is  largely  negative.  It  aims  to  safeguard 
an  individual  against  ills  by  withholding  stimuli.  The 
mother  aims  to  keep  scissors  out  of  reach  and  sight  of  the 
baby  that  it  may  not  be  lured  into  danger.  Some  parents, 
upon  discerning  that  the  pugnacious  instinct  is  manifesting 
itself  vigorously  in  their  boy,  isolate  him  from  other  boys 
— keep  him  by  himself  through  a  period  of  a  year  or  more 
that  the  tendency  may  not  be  accentuated.  Other  parents, 
observing  their  daughter's  inclination  to  be  frivolous,  or 
seeing  the  instinct  of  sex  begin  to  manifest  itself  in  her 
interest  in  young  men,  send  her  away  to  a  girl's  school — 
a  sort  of  intellectual  nunnery. 

Frequently  teachers  follow  this  method  in  the  conduct 
of  their  classes.  The  tendency  to  self-assertion  and  verbal 
combat,  natural  to  youth,  is  smothered  by  an  unwilling- 
ness on  the  part  of  the  teacher  to  indulge  questions  and 
debate  or  by  a  marked  inclination  to  do  all  the  talking. 

It  is  clear  that  this  method  of  disuse  has  its  place  in  the 
training  of  children,  though  grave  dangers  attend  its  too 
frequent   indulgence.   Children   and   others    of   immature 


What  to  Do  With  Native  Tendencies  49 

judgment  need  the  protection  of  withheld  stimuli.  But 
clearly  this  is  not  a  method  to  be  recommended  for  gen- 
eral application.  The  boy  who  is  never  allowed  to  quarrel 
or  fight  may  very  possibly  grow  up  to  be  a  man  afraid  to 
meet  the  battles  of  life;  the  girl,  if  her  natural  emotions 
are  checked,  may  lose  those  very  qualities  that  make  for 
the  highest  type  of  womanhood  and  motherhood.  Fortu- 
nately, in  these  days,  it  is  pretty  nearly  impossible  to  bring 
boys  and  girls  up  in  "glass  houses."  Doubly  fortunate,  for 
they  are  made  happy  in  their  bringing  up  and  are  fitted 
for  a  world  not  particularly  devoted  to  the  fondling  of 
humankind. 

2.     The  Method  of  Rewards  and  Punishments 

This  method  is  clearly  illustrated  in  the  training  of 
"trick"  animals.  These  creatures  through  innumerable 
repetitions  are  made  to  do  phenomenal  "stunts."  In  the 
training  for  every  successful  "try"  they  are  rewarded  with 
a  cube  of  sugar,  a  piece  of  candy,  or  some  other  pleasure- 
producing  article;  for  every  miss  they  are  punished — made 
to  suffer  pain  or  discomfort.  This  same  sort  of  procedure 
carries  over  into  human  affairs.  Witness  the  hickory  stick 
and  the  ruler,  or  count  the  nickels  and  caresses.  Ridicule 
before  the  class,  and  praise  for  commendable  behavior  or 
performance,  are  typical  of  this  same  method.  If  it  is 
followed,  and  it  clearly  has  a  place  in  the  training  of  chil- 
dren, care  should  be  exercised  to  see  that  in  the  child's 
mind  in  any  case  there  is  clear  connection  between  what 
he  has  done  and  the  treatment  that  he  receives.  With  some 
parents  it  fairly  seems  as  if  their  one  remedy  for  all  of- 
fences is  a  tingling  in  the  epidermis — it  is  equally  clear 
that  with  some  teachers  their  one  weapon  is  sarcasm.  All 
too  frequently  these  measures  grow  out  of  unsettled  nerves 


50  Principles  of  Teaching 

or  stirred  up  passions,  on  the  part  of  the  parent  or  teacher, 
and  have  really  but  little  connection — remote  at  best— 
with  the  offense  in  question.  There  may  be  an  abuse  in 
the  matter  of  rewards,  too,  of  course,  but  as  a  rule  few 
classes  suffer  from  too  much  appreciation.  The  real  art 
of  discipline  lies  in  making  the  reward  or  the  punishment 
naturally  grow  out  of  the  conduct  indulged  in. 

3.     The  Method  of  Substitution 

Because  of  the  fact  that  some  stimuli  inevitably  lead  to 
discomfort  and  disaster — that  some  conduct  is  bad — there 
is  need  of  a  method  of  substitution.  The  child's  mind  needs 
to  be  led  from  the  contemplation  of  an  undesirable  course 
of  action  to  something  quite  different.  Frequently  a  child 
cannot  be  satisfied  with  a  mere  denial,  and  circumstances 
may  not  be  favorable  to  punishment — yet  the  correction 
must  be  made.  Substitution  is  the  avenue  of  escape.  A 
striking  illustration  in  point  occurred  recently  in  a  cafe  in 
Montana.  A  trio  of  foreigners,  father,  mother,  and  two- 
year-old  son,  came  in  and  sat  down  at  one  of  the  tables. 
Soon  after  the  parents  began  to  eat,  the  child  caught  sight 
of  a  little  silver  pitcher  for  which  he  began  to  beg.  Whin- 
ing and  crying,  mixed  in  with  the  begging,  created  a  good 
bit  of  disturbance.  The  only  attempted  solution  on  the 
part  of  the  parents  was  a  series  of:  "Don't  do  that!"  "No! 
no!"  "Keep  quiet,  Marti!"  a  continued  focusing  of  the 
child's  attention  on  what  he  ought  not  to  do,  and  an  added 
note  to  the  disturbance.  Then  an  American  across  the 
aisle  having  surveyed  the  situation  took  out  of  his  pocket  a 
folder  full  of  brightly  colored  views.  The  charm  worked 
beautifully — the  meal  went  on  free  from  disturbance — 
and  the  child  was  happy. 


What  to  Do  With  Native  Tendencies  51 

This  method  involves  a  good  bit  of  resourcefulness,  call- 
ing at  times  for  what  seems  an  impossible  amount  of  in- 
genuity. As  someone  has  said,  "It  is  beating  the  other 
fellow  to  it."  It  merits  the  consideration  of  those  who 
have  to  handle  boys  and  girls  who  are  regularly  up  to 
"stunts." 

4.    The  Method  of  Stimulation  and  Sublimation 

This  method  is  rather  closely  akin  to  that  of  substitution, 
with  the  exception  that  it  capitalizes  on  tendencies  already 
in  operation  and  raises  them  to  a  higher  level.  Stimula- 
tion, of  course,  merely  means  the  bringing  of  children  into 
contact  with  desirable  stimuli  on  every  possible  occasion; 
in  fact,  it  involves  the  making  of  favorable  occasions. 

Sublimation  involves  building  upon  native  tendencies  to 
an  elevated  realization.  Educationally  this  method  is  most 
full  of  promise.  It  is  seen  in  kindergarten  methods  when 
a  child  is  led  from  mere  meaningless  playing  with  toys  to 
constructive  manipulation  of  blocks,  tools,  etc.  It  is  seen 
admirably  in  football  where  the  pugnacious  tendency  ol 
boys  is  capitalized  on  to  build  manliness  in  struggle  and 
to  develop  a  spirit  of  fair  play.  It  is  seen  in  the  fostering 
of  a  girl's  fondness  for  dolls,  so  that  it  may  crystallize  into 
the  devotion  of  motherhood.  It  is  seen  when  a  boys'  man 
leads  a  "gang"  of  boys  into  an  association  for  social  better- 
ment. It  is  seen  when  a  teacher  works  upon  the  instinct 
to  collect  and  hoard,  elevating  it  into  a  desire  for  the  acqui- 
sition of  knowledge  and  the  finer  things  of  life. 

Whatever  our  method,  let  us  give  due  consideration  to 
the  natural  inclinations  and  aptitudes  oF  boys  and  girls — 
let  us  help  them  to  achieve  fully  their  own  potentialities 


52  Principles  of  Teaching 


Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  VIII 

1.  Point  out  the  essential  differences  between  boys  and  girls  at 
the  age  of  six  and  seven  and  those  of  sixteen  and  seventeen. 

2.  Discuss  the  significance  of  the  following  phrase:    "The  grain 
in  human  nature." 

3.  How   can  the  hunting   instinct  be    appealed   to   in  religious 
stimulation? 

4.  Of   what    significance    is    the    "gang    spirit"    to    teachers    ol 
adolescents? 

5.  How  can  rivalry  be  made  an  asset  in  teaching? 

6.  How  can  the  fighting  instinct  in  children  best  be  directed? 

7.  Why  is  biography  so  valuable  in  material  for  teaching? 

8.  Why  is  it  so  essential  that  we  put  responsibility  upon  boys 
and  girls?   How  should  this  fact  affect  teaching? 

9.  What  are  the  dangers  that  attend  an  attempt  to  keep  children 
(]uiet  for  any  length  of  time? 

Helpful  References 
Those  listed  in  Chapter  VII. 


CHAPTER  IX 

INDIVIDUAL  DIFFERENCES 

Outline — Chapter  DC 

Fundamental  significance  of  individual  differences. — Typical  illus- 
tration.— The  truth  illustrated  physically;  in  range  of  voice,  in  speed, 
in  mental  capabilities. — The  same  truth  applied  spiritually. — Some 
cases  in  point. 

Everybody  is  like  everybody  else  in  this — that  everybod) 
is  different  from  everybody  else.  Having  discussed  how 
all  men  enjoy  a  common  heritage  by  vi^ay  of  native  endow- 
ments, let  us  now  turn  to  a  consideration  of  how  men  differ. 

Two  of  the  terms  most  frequently  met  in  recent  educa- 
tional publications  are  statistical  methods  and  individual 
differences.  There  is  nothing  particularly  new  in  this  latter 
term — it  merely  represents  a  new  emphasis  being  given  to 
the  old  idea  that  no  two  of  us  are  alike.  Every  parent  is 
aware  of  the  very  marked  differences  in  his  children.  Even 
twins  differ  in  disposition  and  mental  capabilities.  In  fact, 
one  of  the  difficulties  that  attaches  to  parenthood  is  just 
this  problem  of  making  provision  in  one  household  for 
such  various  personalities. 

A  member  of  the  stake  presidency  in  one  of  the  stakes 
in  southern  Utah,  in  discussing  this  matter  a  short  time  ago, 
remarked  that  in  his  family  of  four  boys  one  very  defi- 
nitely had  decided  to  become  a  farmer  and  was  already 
busy  at  getting  acquainted  with  the  details  of  the  work; 
a  second  boy  was  devoted  to  music  and  voiced  a  very  vig- 
orous protest  against  farming;  the  third  son  was  so  bash- 
ful and  reticent  that  he  hadn't  given  expression  to  any  no- 
tion of  preference;  the  fourth,  a  happy-go-lucky  sort  of 
chap,  free  and  noisy  in  his  cutting  up  about  the  place. 


54  Principles  of  Teaching 

wasn't  worying  about  what  he  was  to  do  in  life — he  just 
didn't  want  anything  to  do  with  strenuous  effort. 

"How  can  I  drive  a  four-horse  team  such  as  that?"  was 
the  interesting  query  of  this  father. 

Practically  every  family  presents  this  variety  of  attitude 
and  practically  every  parent  is  trying  to  work  out  a  solu- 
tion to  the  problem,  so  there  is  nothing  startling  about  the 
term  individual  differences.  Educators  have  just  given  the 
matter  more  careful  and  scholarly  attention  of  recent  years. 

If  the  matter  of  differences  in  children  constitutes  a  prob- 
lem of  concern  in  a  family  of  from  two  to  ten  children, 
how  much  greater  must  that  problem  be  in  a  class  from 
thirty  to  fifty  with  approximately  as  many  families  repre- 
sented. The  problem  has  led  to  some  very  interesting  in- 
vestigations— investigations  so  simple  that  they  can  be  car- 
ried on  by  anyone  interested.  For  instance,  if  we  could  line 
up  all  the  men  in  Salt  Lake  City  according  to  size  we  should 
find  at  one  end  of  the  line  a  few  exceptionally  tall  men, 
likely  from  six  feet  to  six  feet  six  inches  in  height.  At  the 
other  end  of  the  line  would  be  a  few  exceptionally  small 
men — undersized  men  from  three  feet  eight  or  ten  inches 
to  four  feet  six  inches.  In  between  these  two  types  would 
come  in  graduated  order  all  sorts  of  men  with  a  decidedly 
large  number  standing  about  five  feet  six  or  eight  inches. 
This  latter  height  we  call  the  average. 

Practically  we  see  the  significance  of  these  differences. 
No  manufacturer  thinks  of  making  one  size  of  overall  in 
the  hope  that  it  will  fit  each  of  these  men.  He  adapts  his 
garment  to  their  size,  and  he  knows  approximately  how 
many  of  each  size  will  be  called  for  in  the  course  of  ordi- 
nary business. 

If  these  same  men  could  be  taken  one  by  one  into  a  music 
studio  and  have  their  voices  tested  for  range,  the  same 


Individual  Differences  55 

interesting  variations  would  be  found.  There  would  be  a 
few  very  high  tenors,  a  few  exceptionally  low  bassos,  and 
a  crowd  with  medium  range  with  fillers- in  all  along  the  line. 

If  we  were  interested  in  carrying  the  experiment  still  fur- 
ther we  might  apply  the  speed  test.  In  a  100-yard  dash  a 
few  men  would  be  found  to  be  particularly  fast,  a  few  others 
would  trail  away  behind  at  a  snail's  pace,  while  the  big 
crowd  of  men  would  make  the  distance  in  "average  time," 

Of  course,  it  would  be  foolish  to  attempt  to  make  tenors 
of  all  these  men — equally  foolish  to  try  to  make  speeders 
of  them  all.  In  these  practical  matters  we  appreciate  the 
wisdom  of  letting  each  man  fit  into  that  niche  for  which 
he  is  qualified. 

Nor  are  these  differences  confined  to  the  field  of  physical 
characteristics  and  achievements.  Tests  by  the  hundred 
have  demonstrated  beyond  all  question  that  they  hold 
equally  well  of  mental  capabilities.  In  the  past  children 
have  gone  to  school  at  the  age  of  six.  They  have  remained 
there  because  they  were  six.  At  seven  they  were  in  grade 
two,  and  so  on  up  through  the  grades  of  our  public  schools. 
Tests  and  measurements  now,  however,  are  showing  that 
such  a  procedure  works  both  a  hardship  and  an  injustice 
on  the  pupils.  Some  boys  at  six  are  found  as  capable  of 
doing  work  in  grade  two  as  other  boys  at  eight.  Some  boys 
and  girls  at  six  are  found  wholly  incapable  of  doing  what 
is  required  in  grade  one.  One  of  the  most  promising  pros- 
pects ahead  educationally  is  that  we  shall  be  able  to  find 
out  just  the  capacity  of  a  child  regardless  of  his  age,  and 
fit  him  into  what  he  can  do  well,  making  provisions  for 
his  passing  on  as  he  shows  capability  for  higher  work.  Not 
only  has  this  matter  of  individual  differences  been  found 
to  apply  generally  in  the  various  grades  of  our  schools — 


56  Principles  of  Teaching 

it  has  been  found  to  have  significant  bearing  upon  achieve- 
ments in  particular  subjects.  For  all  too  long  a  time  we 
have  held  a  boy  in  grade  four  until  he  mastered  what  we 
have  called  his  grade  four  arithmetic,  spelling,  geography, 
grammar,  history,  etc.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  many  a  boy 
who  is  a  fourth-grader  in  grammar  may  be  only  a  second- 
grader  in  arithmetic — a  girl,  for  whom  fourth  grade  arith- 
metic is  an  impossibility,  because  of  her  special  liking  for 
reading,  may  be  seventh  grade  in  her  capacity  in  that  sub- 
ject. In  the  specific  subjects,  individual  differences  have 
been  found  to  be  most  marked.  Surely  it  is  unfair  to  ask 
a  boy  "born  short"  in  history  to  keep  up  to  the  pace  of  a 
comrade  "born  long"  in  that  subject;  so,  too,  it  is  unfair 
to  ask  a  girl  "born  long"  in  geography  to  hold  back  to  the 
pace  of  one  "born  short"  in  that  subject.  The  results  of 
these  observations  are  leading  to  developments  that  are  full 
of  promise  for  the  educational  interests  of  the  future. 

In  order  that  we  may  more  fully  appreciate  the  reality 
of  these  observations  let  us  set  down  the  concrete  results 
of  a  few  experiments. 

The  first  three  tests  are  quoted  from  Thorndike: 
In  a  test  in  addition,  all  pupils  being  allowed  the  same 
time, 

1  pupil    did    3  examples  correctly 

2  pupils  did    4  examples  correctly 

1  pupil    did    5  examples  correctly 

5  pupils  did     6  examples  correctly 

2  pupils  did    7  examples  correctly 

4  pupils  did    8  examples  correctly 

6  pupils  did    9  examples  correctly 
14  pupils  did  10  examples  correctly 

8  pupils  did  11  examples  correctly 

7  pupils  did  12  examples  correctly 

8  pupils  did  13  examples  correctly 

5  pupils  did  14  examples  correctly 

5  pupils  did  15  examples  correctly 

6  pupils  did  16  examples  correctly 


Individual  Differences 


57 


1  pupil    did  17  examples  correctly 

5  pupils  did  18  examples  correctly 

1  pupil    did  19  examples  correctly 

2  pupils  did  20  examples  correctly 

The  rapidity  of  movement  of  ten-year-old  girls,  as  meas- 
ured by  the  number  of  crosses  made  in  a  fixed  time: 


6  or    7  by 1  girl 

8  or    9  by 0  girl 

10  or  11  by 4  girls 

12  or  13  by 3  girls 

14  or  15  by 21  girls 

16  or  17  by 29  girls 

18  or  19  by 33  girls 

20  or  21  by 13  girls 

22  or  23  by 15  girls 


24  or  25  by 11  girls 

26  or  27  by 5  girls 

28  or  29  by 2  girls 

30  or  31  by 5  girls 

32  or  33  by 3  girls 

34  or  35  by 5  girls 

36  or  37  by 0  girl 

38  or  49  by 4  girls 

40  or  41  by 1  girl 


Two  papers,  A  and  B,  written  by  members  of  the  same 
grade  and  class  in  a  test  in  spelling: 


A. 

B. 

greatful 

gratful 

elegant 

eleagent 

present 

present 

patience 

paisionce 

succeed 

suckseed 

severe 

survere 

accident 

axadent 

sometimes 

sometimes 

sensible 

sensible 

business 

biusness 

answer 

anser 

sweeping 

sweping 

properly 

prooling 

improvement 

improvment 

fatiguing 

fegting 

anxious 

anxchus 

appreciate 

apresheating 

assure 

ashure 

imagine 

amagen 

praise 

prasy 

In  a  test  in  spelling  wherein  fifty  common  words  were 
dictated  to  a  class  of  twenty- eight  pupils,  the  following 
results  were  obtained: 


58  Principles  of  Teaching 

2  spelled  correctly  all  50 

3  spelled  correctly  between  45  and  48 

5  spelled  correctly  between  40  and  45 
11  spelled  correctly  between  30  and  40 

6  spelled  correctly  between  20  and  30 
1  spelled  correctly  between  15  and  20 

And  now  the  question — what  has  all  this  to  do  with  the 
teaching  of  religion?  Just  this:  the  differences  among 
men  as  found  in  fields  already  referred  to,  are  found  also 
in  matters  of  religion.  For  one  man  it  is  easy  to  believe 
in  visions  and  all  other  heavenly  manifestations;  for  an- 
other it  is  next  to  impossible.  To  one  man  the  resurrec- 
tion is  the  one  great  reality;  to  another  it  is  merely  a  matter 
of  conjecture.  One  man  feels  certain  that  his  prayers  are 
heard  and  answered;  another  feels  equally  certain  that  they 
cannot  be.  One  man  is  emotionally  spiritual;  another  is 
coldly  hard-headed  and  matter-of-fact.  The  point  is  not 
a  question  which  man  is  right — it  is  rather  that  we  ought 
not  to  attempt  to  reach  each  man  in  exactly  the  same  way, 
nor  should  we  expect  each  one  to  measure  up  to  the  stand- 
ards of  the  others. 

An  interesting  illustration  of  this  difference  in  religious 
attitude  was  shown  recently  in  connection  with  the  funeral 
of  a  promising  young  man  who  had  been  taken  in  death 
just  as  he  had  fairly  launched  upon  his  life's  work.  In  a 
discussion  that  followed  the  service,  one  good  brother  found 
consolation  in  the  thought  that  the  Lord  needed  just  such 
a  young  man  to  help  carry  on  a  more  important  work 
among  the  spirits  already  called  home.  His  companion  in 
the  discussion  found  an  explanation  to  his  satisfaction  in 
the  thought  that  it  was  providential  that  the  young  man 
could  be  taken  when  he  was,  that  he  thereby  might  be 
spared  the  probable  catastrophies  that  might  have  visited 
him  had  he  lived.  Each  man  found  complete  solace  in  his 


Individual  Differences  59 

own  philosophy,  though  neither  could  accept  the  reasoning 
of  the  other. 

An  interesting  case  of  difference  of  view  came  to  the 
attention  of  the  teacher- training  class  at  Provo  when  some- 
one asked  how  the  lesson  on  Jonah  could  be  presented  so 
that  it  would  appeal  to  adolescent  boys  and  girls.  The 
query  was  joined  in  by  several  others  for  whom  Jonah  had 
been  a  stumbling  block,  when  Brother  Sainsbury,  of  Vernal, 
startled  the  class  by  saying  Jonah  was  his  favorite  story. 
"I  would  rather  teach  that  story  than  any  other  one  in  the 
Bible,"  he  declared,  and  illustrated  his  method  so  clearly 
that  the  account  of  Jonah  took  on  an  entirely  new  aspect. 

Many  men  and  women  in  the  world  are  shocked  at  the 
thought  that  God  is  a  personality.  To  them  the  idea  that 
God  is  simply  a  "man  made  perfect,"  a  being  similar  to  us, 
but  exalted  to  deity,  is  akin  to  blasphemy.  And  then  to 
add  the  idea  of  a  heavenly  mother  is  beyond  comprehen- 
sion. To  Latter-day  Saints,  on  the  other  hand,  these 
thoughts  are  the  very  glory  of  God.  To  them  a  man  made 
perfect  is  the  noblest  conception  possible.  It  makes  of  Him 
a  reality.  And  the  thought  of  Mother — Heaven  without  a 
Mother  would  be  like  home  without  one. 

And  so  with  all  the  principles  and  conceptions  of  re- 
ligion, men's  reactions  to  them  are  as  varied  as  they  are 
to  all  the  other  facts  of  life.  Everywhere  the  opinions,  the 
capacities,  the  attainments  of  men  vary.  The  law  of  indi- 
vidual differences  is  one  of  the  most  universal  in  our  ex- 
perience. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  IX 

1.  Just  what  is  the  meaning  of  the  term  Individual  Differences? 

2.  Illustrate  such  differences  in  families  with  which  you  are 
familiar. 

3.  Apply  the  test  to  your  ward  choir. 


60  Principles  of  Teaching 


4.  Name  and  characterize  twenty  men  whom  you  know.  How 
do  they  differ? 

5.  Have  a  report  brought  in  from  your  public  school  on  the  re- 
sults of  given  tests  in  arithmetic,  spelling,  etc. 

6.  Have  the  members  of  your  class  write  their  opinions  relative 
to  some  point  of  doctrine  concerning  which  there  may  be  some  un- 
certainty? 

7.  Observe  the  attitude  and  response  of  each  of  the  members  of 
a  typical  Sunday  School,  Kindergarten,  of  an  advanced  M.  I.  A.  class. 

8.  Illustrate  individual  differences  as  expressed  in  the  religious 
attitudes  of  men  you  know. 

9.  To  what  extent  are  boys  different  from  girls  in  mental  capa- 
bility and  attitude? 

Helpful  References 
Those  listed  in  Chapter  VII. 


CHAPTER  X 

INDIVIDUAL  DIFFERENCES  AND  TEACHING 

Outline — Chapter  X 

The  causes  of  individual  differences, — Norsworthy  and  Whitley 
on  the  significance  of  parentage. — The  teacher's  obligation  to  know 
parents. — The  influence  of  sex. — Environment  as  a  factor. — Thorndike 
quoted. — B.  H.  Jacobsen  on  individual  differences. 

So  far  we  simply  have  made  the  point  that  individuals 
differ.  We  are  concerned  in  this  chapter  in  knowing  how 
these  differences  affect  the  teaching  process.  Fully  to  appre- 
ciate their  significance  we  must  know  not  only  that  they  ex- 
ist, and  the  degree  of  their  variation,  but  also  the  forces  that 
produce  them.  On  the  side  of  heredity,  race,  family,  and 
sex,  are  the  great  modifying  factors.  Practically,  of  course, 
we  are  concerned  very  little  as  Church  teachers  with  prob- 
lems of  race.  We  are  all  so  nearly  one  in  that  regard  that 
a  discussion  of  racial  differences  would  contribute  but  little 
to  the  solution  of  our  teaching  problem. 

The  matter  of  family  heritage  is  a  problem  of  very  much 
more  immediate  concern.  Someone  has  happily  said: 
"Really  to  know  a  boy  one  must  know  fully  his  father  and 
his  mother."  "Yes,"  says  a  commentator,  "and  he  ought 
to  know  a  deal  about  the  grandfather  and  grandmother." 
The  significance  of  parentage  is  made  to  stand  out  with 
clearness  in  the  following  paragraph  from  Norsworthy  and 
Whitley,  The  Psychology  of  Childhood: 

"Just  as  good  eyesight  and  longevity  are  family  characteristics, 
so  also  color  blindness,  left-handedness,  some  slight  peculiarity  of 
structure  such  as  an  extra  finger  or  toe,  or  the  Hapsburg  lip,  sense 
defects  such  as  deafness  or  blindness,  tendencies  to  certain  diseases, 
especially  those  of  the  nervous  system,  —  all  these  run  in  families. 
Certain  mental  traits  likewise  are  obviously  handed  down  from  parents 
to  child,  such  as  strong  will,  memory  for  faces,  musical  imagination, 
abilities  in  mathematics  or  the  languages,  artistic  talent.    In  these 


62  Principles  of  Teaching 

ways  and  many  others  children  resemble  their  parents.  The  same 
general  law  holds  of  likes  and  dislikes,  of  temperamental  qualities 
such  as  quick  temper,  vivacity,  lovableness,  moodiness.  In  all  traits, 
characteristics,  features,  powers  both  physical  and  mental  and  to 
some  extent  moral  also,  children's  original  nature,  their  stock  in  trade, 
is  determined  by  their  immediate  ancestry.  'We  inherit  our  parents' 
tempers,  our  parents'  conscientiousness,  shyness  and  ability,  as  we 
inherit  their  stature,  forearm  and  span,'  says  Pearson." 

The  teacher  who  would  really  appreciate  the  feelings 
and  responses  of  a  boy  in  his  class  must  be  aware,  there- 
fore, that  the  boy  is  not  merely  one  of  a  dozen  type  indi- 
viduals— he  is  a  product  of  a  particular  parentage,  acting 
as  he  does  largely  because  "he  was  born  that  way." 

We  shall  point  out  in  connection  with  environmental  in- 
fluences the  importance  of  a  teacher's  knowing  the  home 
condition  of  his  pupils;  but  it  is  important  here,  in  pass- 
ing, to  emphasize  the  point  that  even  though  a  child  were 
never  to  live  with  its  parents  it  could  be  understood  by 
the  teacher  acquainted  with  the  peculiar  traits  of  those  par- 
ents. "Born  with  a  bent"  is  a  proverb  of  such  force  that 
it  cannot  be  ignored.  To  know  the  parental  heritage  of  a 
boy  is  to  anticipate  his  reaction  to  stimuli — is  to  know 
what  approach  to  make  to  win  him. 

Because  of  the  fact  that  in  many  of  our  organizations  we 
are  concerned  with  the  problem  of  teaching  boys  and  girls 
together,  the  question  of  the  influence  of  sex  is  one  which 
we  must  face.  There  are  those  who  hold  that  boys  and 
girls  are  so  fundamentally  different  by  nature  that  they 
ought  not  to  be  taught  coeducationally.  Others  maintain 
that  they  are  essentially  alike  in  feeling  and  intellectuality, 
and  that  because  of  the  fact  that  eventually  they  are  to  be 
mated  in  the  great  partnership  of  life  they  should  be 
held  together  as  much  as  possible  during  the  younger  years 
of  their  lives.  Most  authorities  are  agreed  that  boys  and 
girls  differ  not  so  much  because  they   are  possessed  of 


Individual  Differences  and  Teaching  63 

difTerent  native  tendencies,  but  because  they  live  differently 
— they  follow  different  lines  of  activity,  and  therefore  de- 
velop different  interests.  To  quote  again  from  Norsworthy 
and  Whitley: 

"That  men  and  women  are  different,  that  their  natures  are  not 
the  same,  has  long  been  an  accepted  fact.  Out  of  this  fact  of  differ- 
ence have  grown  many  hot  discussions  as  to  the  superiority  of  one 
or  the  other  nature  as  a  whole.  The  present  point  of  view  of  scien- 
tists seems  well  expressed  by  Ellis  when  he  says,  'We  may  regard  all 
such  discussions  as  absolutely  futile  and  foolish.  If  it  is  a  question 
of  determining  the  existence  and  significance  of  some  particular  phys- 
ical sexual  difference,  a  conclusion  may  not  be  impossible.  To  make 
any  broad  statement  of  the  phenomena  is  to  recognize  that  no  general 
conclusion  is  possible.  Now  and  again  we  come  across  facts  which 
group  themselves  with  a  cerain  uniformity,  but  as  we  continue,  we 
find  other  equally  important  facts  which  group  themselves  with  equal 
uniformity  in  another  sense.  The  result  produces  compensation.' 
The  question  of  interest  then  is,  what  in  nature  is  peculiar  to  the 
male  sex  and  what  to  the  female?  What  traits  will  be  true  of  a  boy, 
merely  because  he  is  a  boy,  and  vice  versa?  This  has  been  an 
extremely  difficult  question  to  answer,  because  of  the  difficulty  en- 
countered in  trying  to  eliminate  the  influence  of  environment  and 
training.  Boys  are  what  they  are  because  of  their  original  nature 
plus  their  surroundings.  Some  would  claim  that  if  we  could  give  boys 
and  girls  the  same  surroundings,  the  same  social  requirements,  the 
same  treatment  from  babyhood,  there  would  be  no  difference  in  the 
resulting  natures.  Training  undoubtedly  accentuates  inborn  sex  dif- 
ferences, and  it  is  true  that  a  reversal  of  training  does  lessen  this 
difference;  however,  the  weight  of  opinion  at  present  is  that  differ- 
ences in  intellect  and  character  do  exist  because  of  differences 
of  sex,  but  that  these  have  been  unduly  magnified.  H,  B. 
Thompson,  in  her  investigation  entitled  The  Mental  Traits  of  Sex, 
finds  that  'Motor  ability  in  most  of  its  forms  is  better  developed  in 
men  than  in  women.  In  strength,  rapidity  of  movement,  and  rate 
of  fatigue,  they  have  a  very  decided  advantage,  and  in  precision  of 
movement  a  slight  advantage.  .  .  .  The  thresholds  are  on  the  whole 
lower  in  women,  discriminative  sensibility  is  on  the  whole  better 
in  men.  ...  All  these  differences,  however,  are  slight.  As  for  the 
intellectual  faculties,  women  are  decidedly  superior  to  men  in  memory, 
and  possibly  more  rapid  in  associative  thinking.  Men  are  probably 
superior  in  ingenuity.  .  .  .  The  data  on  the  life  of  feeling  indicate 
that  their  is  little,  if  any,  sexual  difference  in  the  degree  of  domina- 
tion by  emotion,  and  that  social  consciousness  is  more  prominent  in 
men,  and  religious  consciousness  in  women.' 

"Pearson,  in  his  measurement  of  traits,  not  by  objective  tests  but 
by  opinions  of  people  who  know  the  individual,  finds  that  boys  are 
more  athletic,  noisy,  self-assertive,  self-conscious;  less  popular,  duller 


64  Principles  of  Teaching 

in  conscience,  quicker-tempered,  less  sullen,  a  little  duller  intel- 
lectually and  less  efficient  in  penmanship.  Heymans  and  Wiersma, 
following  the  same  general  method  as  Pearson,  state  as  their  general 
conclusions  that  the  female  is  more  active,  more  emotional,  and  more 
unselfish  than  the  male.  'They  consider  women  to  be  more  impulsive, 
less  efficient  intellectually,  and  more  fickle  than  men  as  a  result  of 
the  first  two  differences  mentioned  above;  to  be  gifted  in  music, 
acting,  conversation  and  the  invention  of  stories,  as  a  result  in  part 
of  the  second  difference;  and  to  think  well  of  people  and  to  be  easily 
reconciled  to  them  as  a  result  of  the  third.'  Thorndike  finds  the 
chief  differences  to  be  that  the  female  varies  less  from  the  average 
standard,  is  more  observant  of  small  visual  details,  less  often  color- 
blind, less  interested  in  things  and  their  mechanisms,  more  interested 
in  people  and  their  feelings,  less  given  to  pursuing,  capturing  and 
maltreating  living  things,  and  more  given  to  nursing,  comforting  and 
relieving  them  than  is  the  male.  H.  Ellis  considers  the  chief  differ- 
ences to  be  the  less  tendency  to  variability,  the  greater  affectability, 
and  the  greater  primitiveness  of  the  female  mind,  and  the  less  ability 
shown  by  women  in  dealing  with  the  more  remote  and  abstract  inter- 
ests in  life.  All  the  authors  emphasize  the  smallness  of  the  differ- 
ences; and  after  all  the  striking  thing  is  not  the  differences  between 
the  sexes,  but  the  great  difference  within  the  same  sex  in  respect  to 
every  mental  trait  tested.  The  difference  of  man  from  man,  and  woman 
from  woman,  in  any  trait  is  almost  as  great  as  the  differences  be- 
tween the  sexes  in  that  trait.  Sex  can  be  the  cause,  then,  of  only  a 
fraction  of  the  difference  between  the  original  nature  of  individuals." 

It  is  reasonably  certain,  then,  that  a  teacher  may  safely 
appeal  to  both  boys  and  girls  on  the  ground  of  the  funda- 
mental instincts,  feeling  confident  that  common  stimuli  will 
produce  largely  the  same  results. 

Important  as  it  is  that  we  know  what  our  pupils  are  from 
their  parentage,  it  is  even  more  important  in  the  matter  of 
religious  instruction  that  we  shall  appreciate  the  force  of 
the  varieties  of  environment  that  have  been  operative. 
Though  boys  and  girls  may  be  essentially  alike  at  the  out- 
set of  their  lives  they  may  be  thrown  into  such  associations 
as  to  make  their  ideals  and  conduct  entirely  different. 
Fancy  the  contrast  between  the  case  of  a  girl  brought  up 
for  fifteen  years  in  a  household  of  refinement  and  in  a  com- 
panionship of  gentility,  and  the  case  of  a  boy  who  during 
the  same  years  has  been  the  pal  of  bullies  on  street  corners. 


Individual  Differences  and  Teaching  65 

Surely  stimuli  that  are  to  promote  proper  reaction  in  these 
two  cases  will  have  to  be  suited  to  the  person  in  question. 

Then,  too,  the  teacher  must  realize  that  one  child  may 
come  from  a  home  of  faith,  confidence,  and  contentment; 
whereas,  another  may  come  from  a  home  of  agitation,  doubt, 
and  suspicion.  One  may  have  been  taught  to  pray — an- 
other may  have  been  led  to  disbelieve.  One  may  have  been 
stimulated  to  read  over  sacred  books — another  may  have 
been  left  to  peruse  cheap,  sensational  detective  stories.  To 
succeed  in  reaching  the  hearts  of  a  group  of  such  boys  and 
girls,  a  teacher  surely  ought  to  be  aware  of  individual 
differences  and  ought  to  be  fortified  with  a  wealth  of  ma- 
terial so  that  the  appeal  may  be  as  varied  as  possible.  To 
quote  from  Thomdike's  Principles  of  Education: 

"A  teacher  has  to  choose  what  is  for  the  greatest  good  of  the 
greatest  number.  He  cannot  expect  to  drive  forty  children  abreast 
along  the  highroad  of  education."  "Yet  the  differences  in  children 
should  not  blind  us  to  their  likenesses."  "We  need  general  prin- 
ciples and  their  sagacious  application  to  individual  problems." 

"The  worst  error  of  teachers  with  respect  to  individual  differences 
is  to  neglect  them,  to  form  one  set  of  fixed  habits  for  dealing  with 
all  children,  to  teach  'the  child  instead  of  countless  different  hving 
individuals.'  To  realize  the  varieties  of  human  nature,  the  nature 
and  amount  of  mental  differences,  is  to  be  protected  against  many 
fallacies  of  teaching." 

Our  treatment  of  individual  differences  was  well  summed 
up  in  the  following  paper  by  B.  H.  Jacobsen,  a  member  of 
the  B.  Y.  U.  Teacher-Training  class: 

The  Significance  of  Individual  Differences  in  Teaching 

"Individual  instruction  in  our  religious  organizations  as  in  the 
public  schools  is  under  present  condition  impracticable.  We  are 
compelled  to  teach  in  groups  or  classes  of  somewhat  varying  size. 
Consequently,  it  is  of  prime  importance  for  the  teacher,  in  trying 
to  apply  that  fundamental  principle  of  pedagogy — an  understanding 
of  the  being  to  be  taught — to  know  first  what  characteristics  and 
tendencies,  whether  native  or  acquired,  are  known  to  a  large  ma- 
jority of  the  children  in  the  class.    Leaving  out  of  consideration  the 


66  Principles  of  Teaching 


possible  presence  of  subnormal  children,  the  language  used  must  be 
clear  and  simple  enough  to  be  comprehended  by  all;  the  great  ma- 
jority of  the  questions  must  be  intended  for  all  to  find  answers  to; 
the  stories,  illustrations,  incidents,  pictures,  and  various  devices 
employed  must  be  reasonably  within  the  range  of  experience  and 
comprehension  of  all  members. 

"At  the  same  time,  it  is  important  to  recognize  the  fact  that,  after 
all,  the  class  as  a  whole  does  not  in  any  very  fundamental,  peda- 
gogical sense  constitute  the  objective  unit  of  instruction.  Though  it 
seems  natural  for  most  teachers  to  look  upon  the  class  as  a  more 
or  less  uniform  mass,  and  the  exigencies  of  the  situation  make  this 
to  some  extent  unavoidable,  still  the  individual  child  remains  always 
the  real  unit,  and  furthermore  the  units  are  all  different — in  appear- 
ance, training  and  temperament. 

"In  general  the  methods  and  material  will  be  uniform  for  all,  but 
there  will  still  be  abundant  opportunity  for  exercising  little  indi- 
vidual touches  and  tricks  in  relation  to  individual  pupils,  especially 
those  who  vary  somewhat  widely  from  the  average.  Even  such  a 
superficial  matter  as  size,  especially  superior  size,  might  profitably 
receive  a  little  special  consideration  by  the  teacher  and  thus  at  times 
save  some  pupil  a  little  physical  embarrassment.  The  boy  unusually 
active  might  be  given  some  physical  task  to  perform,  even  if  it  has 
to  be  provided  for  the  occasion,  though  it  must  not  be  too  artifi- 
cially created,  as  this  is  sure  of  detection. 

"Questions  requiring  more  than  ordinary  mental  ability  to  answer 
may  be  directed  to  those  of  superior  alertness  and  intelligence,  who 
may  also  be  given  more  difficult  subjects  to  look  up  for  presenta- 
tion to  the  class.  Special  interests  in  animals,  flowers,  books,  aero- 
planes, industries,  vocations,  should  be  discovered  and  utilized  by 
the  watchful  teacher.  Even  though  the  connection  may  be  a  little 
remote,  any  contribution  of  real  interest  and  value  is  legitimate  in 
order  to  relieve  the  monotony  of  a  dull  class. 

"Pupils  differ  very  widely  in  temperament  and  disposition  as  well 
as  in  capacity.  The  timid  boy  or  girl  should  be  given  special  en- 
couragement and  commendation,  while  the  over-bold  will  take  no 
injury  from  a  mild  "squelch"  occasionally.  The  child  of  gloomy 
disposition  should  if  anything  have  more  smiles  and  sunny  words 
sent  his  way  than  the  cheeful  one,  who  is  in  no  danger  of  losing 
his  share.  The  talkative  child  will  need  cautioning  and  careful  di- 
recting, while  the  one  who  seldom  speaks  needs  the  frequent  stim- 
ulus of  a  kind  and  encouraging  look  or  word.  The  child  who  is 
naturally  doc'le  and  obedient  will  develop  smoothly  and  without  great 
need  of  special  attention  and  direction,  while  the  stubborn,  the  re- 
bellious, the  untractable  child,  the  cause  of  continual  worry  and 
solicitude,  is  the  one  on  whom  special  thought  must  be  bestowed; 
for  his  soul  is  no  less  precious  in  the  sight  of  God,  and  the  wise 
teacher  may  be  the  means  of  making  him  a  useful  citizen,  as  well 
as  directing  him  in  the  way  of  working  out  his  eternal  salvation." 


Individual  Differences  and  Teaching  67 


Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  X 

1.  Discuss  the  relative  significance  of  race,  sex,  family,  and  en- 
vironment as  factors  producing  individual  differences. 

2.  Why  is  it  essential  that  teachers  know  the  parents  of  pupils? 

3.  What  are  the  advantages  of  having  boys  and  girls  together  in 
class?   What  are  the  arguments  for  separating  them? 

4.  How  can  a   teacher  be  governed  by  the   force   of  individual 
differences  when  he  has  to  teach  a  group  of  forty  pupils? 

5.  Discuss  the  statement  that  teaching  is  both  a  social   and  an 
individual  process. 

6.  Choose  a  subject  of  general  interest  and  illustrate  how  it  might 
be  presented  to  satisfy  different  types  of  pupils. 

Helpful  References 
Those  listed  in  Chapter  VII. 


CHAPTER  XI 


ATTENTION 


Outline — Chapter  XI 


Attention  the  mother  of  learning. — Gregory  quoted. — The  fact  of 
attention  in  the  Army. — What  attention  is. — Illustrations. — ^Attention 
and  interest. — The  three  types  of  attention:  Involuntary,  nonvolun- 
tary, voluntary. — Hovi  to  secure  attention. — Interest  the  great  key  to 
attention. 

In  that  stimulating  little  book,  The  Seven  Laws  of  Teach- 
ing, by  Gregory,  et  al,  the  second  law  is  stated  in  these 
words: 

"A  learner  is  one  who  attends  with  interest  to  the  lesson." 
Expressed  as  a  rule  of  teaching,  the  law  is  made  to  read: 

"Gain  and  keep  the  attention  and  interest  of  the  pupils 
upon  the  lesson.  Do  not  try  to  teach  without  attention." 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  impossible  to  teach  without 
attention.  A  person  may  hold  class — go  through  the  for- 
mality of  a  class  exercise — but  he  can  really  teach  only 
him  who  attends.  The  first  big,  outstanding  thought  with 
reference  to  attention  is  that  we  should  secure  it,  not  so 
much  in  the  interest  of  order,  important  as  it  is  in  that 
connection,  but  because  it  is  the  sine  qua  non  of  learning. 

A  boy  may  sit  in  a  class  in  algebra  for  weeks,  with  his 
mind  far  afield  on  some  pet  scheme,  or  building  palatial 
edifices  in  the  air,  but  not  until  he  attends  does  he  begin 
to  grasp  the  problems  presented.  It  is  literally  as  well  as 
scripturally  possible  "to  have  ears  and  hear  not."  Attention 
is  the  mother  of  learning. 

Think  of  the  force  of  that  word  attention  in  the  Amer- 
ican Army.  It  is  a  delight  to  see  the  ranks  straighten  to 
that  command — would  that  our  messages  of  truth  could 


Attention  69 

challenge  the  same  response  from  that  vast  army  of  seekers 
after  truth — the  boys  and  girls  of  the  Church.  The  sol- 
dier at  attention  not  only  stands  erect,  nor  does  he  merely 
keep  silence — he  is  eagerly  receptive — anxious  to  receive 
a  message  v^hich  he  is  to  translate  into  action.  His  atti- 
tude, perhaps,  is  our  best  answer  to  the  question,  "What  is 
attention?"  Betts  says,  "The  concentration  of  the  mind's 
energy  on  one  object  of  thought  is  attention." 

As  Magnusson  expresses  it,  "Attention  is  the  centering  of 
consciousness  on  a  portion  of  its  contents."  And  Angell 
adds,  "Attention  is  simply  a  name  for  the  central  and  most 
active  portion  of  the  field  of  consciousness." 

The  mind,  of  course,  during  waking  hours,  is  never 
merely  passive.  With  its  flood  of  ideas  it  is  always  recall- 
ing, observing,  comparing,  analyzing,  building  toward  con- 
clusions. These  processes  go  on  inevitably — go  on  with 
little  concern  about  attention.  But  when  we  narrow  the 
field — when  we  bring  our  mental  energy  to  a  focus  on 
something  specific  and  particular  we  then  attend. 

Betts,  in  his  The  Mind  and  Its  Education,  very  happily 
illustrates  the  meaning  of  attention: 

"Attention  Measures  Mental  Efficiency. — In  a  state  of  attention 
the  mind  may  be  likened  to  the  rays  of  the  sun  which  have  been 
passed  through  a  burning  glass.  You  may  let  all  the  rays  which 
can  pass  through  your  window  pane  fall  hour  after  hour  upon  the 
paper  lying  on  your  desk,  and  no  marked  effects  follow.  But  let 
the  same  amount  of  sunlight  be  passed  through  a  lens  and  con- 
verged to  a  point  the  size  of  your  pencil,  and  the  paper  will  at  once 
burst  into  flame." 

To  follow  another  analogy,  attention  is  to  the  energies 
of  the  mind  what  the  pipe  line  leading  into  the  power  plant 
is  to  the  water  in  the  canyon  above.  It  directs  and  con- 
centrates for  the  generation  of  power.  Just  as  the  water 
might  run  on  and  on  to  little  or  no  purpose,  so  the  ener- 
gies of  a  boy  or  girl  may  be  permitted  to  drift  aimlessly 


70  Principles  of  Teaching 

toward  no  conviction  unless  the  teacher  wins  him  to  an 
attention  that  rivets  truth  to  his  Hfe. 

In  a  discussion  of  attention  the  question  of  the  relation 
of  interest  to  attention  is  bound  to  arise.  Do  we  attend  to 
things  because  they  are  interesting?  Or  are  we  interested 
in  things  because  we  give  them  our  attention?  The  two 
terms  are  so  interwoven  in  meaning  that  they  are  frequent- 
ly treated  under  one  chapter  heading.  Our  purpose  here 
is  not  to  attempt  to  divorce  them,  but  rather  to  give  them 
emphasis  because  of  their  significance  in  the  teaching 
process. 

Attention  denotes  a  focusing  of  mental  energy  on  a  par- 
ticular idea  or  object;  interest,  subjectively  considered,  is 
an  attitude  of  mind.  Perhaps  we  can  get  a  clearer  idea 
of  the  two  terms  if  we  consider  the  various  types  of  atten- 
tion. First  of  all  there  is  what  is  called  Involuntary  atten- 
tion. This  is  the  type  over  which  the  mind  has  little  or 
no  control.  A  person  sits  reading — his  attention  fixed  on 
the  page  in  front  of  him — when  suddenly  a  rock  crashes 
through  the  window  immediately  behind  him.  He  jumps 
to  see  what  is  wrong.  His  attention  to  his  book  is  shifted 
to  the  window,  not  because  he  wills  it  so,  but  because  of 
the  suddenness  and  force  of  the  stimulus.  The  excitation 
of  the  auditory  nerve  centers  compels  attention.  The  attend- 
ant feeling  may  be  one  of  pleasure  or  of  pain — there  may 
be  an  interest  developed  or  there  may  not.  Involuntary 
attention  clearly  does  not  rest  upon  interest. 

Then  there  is  what  is  called  Nonvoluntary  attention.  I 
go  to  a  theatre  and  some  particular  musical  number  is  fea- 
tured. It  grips  my  interest  and  I  follow  it  with  rapt  atten- 
tion, wholly  without  conscious  effort.  Unlike  the  case  of 
a  sudden  noise,  in  this  experience  my  attention  is  not  physi- 
ologically automatic — I  could  control  it  if  I  chose — but  I 


Attention  71 

choose  now  to  give  it.  Interest  clearly  is  the  motor  power 
behind  such  attention.  Then,  finally,  there  is  Voluntary 
attention.  I  sit  at  a  table  working  out  a  problem  in  arith- 
metic. Outside  there  is  being  played  a  most  exciting  ball 
game.  My  interests  are  almost  wholly  centered  in  the  out- 
come of  the  game,  but  duty  bids  me  work  out  my  problem. 
I  make  myself  attend  to  it  in  spite  of  the  pull  of  my  nat- 
ural interests. 

And  so  attention  is  seen  to  be  purely  the  result  of 
physiological  stimulus;  it  is  seen  to  accompany — fairly 
to  be  bom  out  of  it — interest.  It  is  seen  to  be  the  re- 
sult of  an  operation  of  the  will  against  the  natural  force 
of  interest.  This  three-fold  classification  is  of  particular 
significance  to  the  teacher.  He  may  be  sure  that  if  he 
resorts  to  the  use  of  unusual  stimuli  he  can  arrest  attention, 
though  by  so  doing  he  has  no  guarantee  of  holding  it;  he 
may  feel  certain  of  attention  if  he  can  bring  before  pupils 
objects  and  ideas  which  to  them  are  interesting;  he  may 
so  win  them  to  the  purposes  of  his  recitation  that  they  will 
give  attention  even  though  they  are  not  interested  in  what 
may  be  going  on  for  the  time  being.  It  is  evident,  how- 
ever, that  resorting  to  violent  stimuli  is  dangerous,  that 
forced  attention  is  ultimately  disagreeable  and  certainly  not 
a  modern  commonplace  in  experience,  that  attention  which 
attends  genuine  interest  is  the  attention  most  generally  to 
be  sought. 

One  question  still  remains:  "How  shall  we  proceed  to 
secure  and  to  hold  attention?" 

In  the  first  place  we  should  remind  ourselves  that  it  is 
a  difficult  matter  to  give  sustained  attention  to  a  single 
object  or  idea,  unless  the  object  or  idea  changes.  The  diffi- 
culty is  greater  with  children  than  with  adults.    In  the 


72  Principles  of  Teaching 

second  place  we  should  be  mindful  that  it  is  poor  policy 
either  to  demand  attention  or  to  beg  for  it. 

Where  attention  has  to  be  secured  out  of  disorder  we 
are  justified  in  making  use  of  stimuli  that  shock  pupils 
into  attention.  One  of  the  best  illustrations  of  this  sort  of 
procedure  was  the  method  used  in  the  David  Belasco  theatre 
in  New  York  to  get  audiences  quiet  for  the  opening  of  the 
performances.  Mr.  Belasco  was  convinced  that  the  orches- 
tra had  become  a  mere  accompaniment  to  the  clatter  and 
noise  of  the  audience  and  so  he  did  not  trust  to  that  means 
to  secure  order.  In  fact,  he  discarded  the  orchestra  idea. 
At  the  appointed  hour  for  the  curtain  to  rise,  his  theatre 
became  suddenly  dark.  So  dark  that  the  blackness  was 
startling.  Immediately  upon  the  silence  that  attended  the 
shock  the  soft  chiming  of  bells  became  audible  which  led 
the  audience  to  strain  in  an  attempt  to  catch  fully  the  effect 
of  the  chime.  At  that  point  the  curtains  were  drawn  and 
the  first  lines  of  the  play  fell  upon  the  ears  of  a  perfectly 
quiet  audience. 

It  is  safer  and  better,  of  course,  to  anticipate  disorder  by 
getting  the  lesson  under  way  in  an  interesting  manner. 
These  artificial  devices  are  serviceable  as  emergency  mea- 
sures as  well  as  helpful  as  restful  variations  in  a  class 
hour.  Change  in  posture,  group  exercises,  periods  of  re- 
laxation, all  help  to  make  attention  the  more  easily  pos- 
sible. 

The  key  to  sustained  attention,  when  all  is  said  and  done, 
is  interest.  There  is  no  substitute  for  the  fascination  of 
interest.  As  Magnusson  says:  "Monotony  is  the  great 
enemy  of  attention.  Interest  is  the  attention- compelling 
element  of  instincts  and  desires."  The  teacher  can  feel 
assured  of  success  only  when  he  is  so  fully  prepared  that 
his  material  wins  attention  because  of  its  rjphness  and  ecp- 


Attention  73 

propriateness.  Special  thought  should  be  given  in  the  prep- 
aration of  a  lesson  to  the  attack  to  be  made  during  the  first 
two  minutes  of  a  recitation.  A  pointed,  vital  question,  a 
challenging  statement,  a  striking  incident,  a  fascinating, 
appropriate  story,  a  significant  quotation — these  are  a  few 
of  the  legitimate  challenges  to  attention. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XI 

1.  Discuss  the  statement:  "There  is  no  such  thing  as  inattention; 
when  pupils  appear  inattentive,  they  are  singly  attentive  to  some- 
thing more  interesting  than  the  lesson." 

2.  Explain  the  force  of  attention  in  the  learning  process. 

3.  What  is  attention? 

4.  Discuss  and  illustrate  the  different  types  of  attention. 

5.  Give  some  practical  suggestions  on  the  securing  of  attention. 

6.  Point  out  the  distinction  between  attention  and  interest. 

7.  Discuss  the  effect  of  monotony  on  attention. 

8.  How  do  children  and  adults  differ  in  their  powers  of  attention? 

Helpful  References 

Pillsburg,  Attention;  Norsworthy  and  Whitley,  Psychology  oj 
Childhood;  Strayer  and  Norsworthy,  How  to  Teach;  Betts,  How  to 
Teach  Religion;  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teachers;  Fitch, 
The  Art  of  Securing  Attention;  Thorndike,  Principles  of  Teaching; 
Dewey,  Interest  and  Effort  in  Education;  Brumbaugh,  The  Making 
of  a  Teacher. 


CHAPTER  XII 

WHAT  MAKES  FOR  INTEREST 

Outline — Chapter  XII 

Individual  differences  and  interest. — What  makes  for  interest.— 
Interest  begets  interest. — Preparation  is  a  great  guarantee. — Knowl- 
edge of  the  lives  of  boys  and  girls  a  great  help. — The  factors  of  inter- 
estingness:  The  Vital,  The  Unusual,  The  Uncertain,  The  Concrete, 
The  Similar,  The  Antagonistic,  The  Animate. 

After  discussing  the  relation  of  interest  to  attention  we 
still  face  the  question:  What  is  it  that  makes  an  interesting 
object,  or  an  idea  interesting?  Why  do  we  find  some  things 
naturally  interesting  while  others  are  dull  and  common- 
place? Of  course,  everything  is  not  equally  interesting  to 
all  people.  Individual  differences  make  clear  the  fact  that 
a  certain  stimulus  will  call  for  a  response  in  one  particular 
person,  quite  unlike  the  response  manifested  in  a  person 
of  different  temperament  and  training.  But  psychologists 
are  agreed  that  in  spite  of  these  differences  there  are  cer- 
tain elements  of  interests  that  are  generally  and  fundamen- 
tally appealing  to  human  nature.  To  know  what  it  is  that 
makes  for  interest  is  one  of  the  prerequisites  of  good 
teaching. 

But  before  naming  these  "factors  of  interestingness," 
may  we  not  also  name  and  discuss  briefly  some  other  essen- 
tials in  the  matter  of  creating  and  maintaining  interest? 

In  the  first  place  it  is  good  to  remember  that  a  teacher 
who  would  have  his  pupils  interested  must  himself  be  inter- 
ested. If  he  would  see  their  faces  light  up  with  the  glow 
of  enthusiasm,  he  must  be  the  charged  battery  to  generate 
the  current.  Interest  begets  interest.  It  is  as  contagious  as 
whooping  cough — if  a  class  is  exposed  it  is  sure  to  catch 


What  Makes  for  Interest  75 

it.  The  teacher  who  constantly  complains  of  a  dull  class, 
very  likely  is  simply  facing  a  reaction  to  his  own  dullness 
or  disagreeableness.  "Blue  Monday"  isn't  properly  so 
named  merely  because  of  the  drowsy  pupil.  The  teacher 
inevitably  sets  the  pace  and  determines  the  tone  of  his  class. 
Many  a  teacher  when  tired,  or  out  of  patience,  has  con- 
cluded a  recitation  feeling  that  his  pupils  were  about  the 
most  stupid  group  he  has  ever  faced;  the  same  teacher 
keyed  up  to  enthusiasm  has  felt  at  the  close  of  another 
recitation  that  these  same  pupils  could  not  be  surpassed. 
A  student  with  whom  the  writer  talked  a  short  time  ago 
remarked  that  she  could  always  tell  whether  the  day's  class 
was  going  to  be  interesting  under  a  particular  teacher  as 
soon  as  she  caught  the  mood  in  which  she  entered  the  class- 
room. Half-heartedness,  indifference,  and  unpleasantness 
are  all  negative — they  neither  attract  nor  stimulate.  In- 
terest and  enthusiasm  are  the  sunshine  of  the  classroom 
— they  are  to  the  human  soul  what  the  sun's  rays  are  to 
the  plant. 

The  second  great  guarantee  of  interest  is  preparation. 
The  teacher  needs  to  have  his  subject  matter  so  thoroughly 
in  mind  that,  free  from  textbook  and  notes,  he  can  reach 
out  to  a  real  contact  with  his  boys  and  girls.  If  his  eyes 
are  glued  to  his  book,  he  cannot  hope  to  arouse  keen  inter- 
est. The  eye  is  a  great  force  in  gripping  the  attention  of 
a  class  or  audience.  They  want  nothing  to  stand  between 
them  and  the  speaker.  Not  long  ago  one  of  the  most  force- 
ful and  eloquent  public  speakers  in  Utah  failed  miserably, 
in  addressing  a  thoroughly  fine  audience,  because  he  was 
lost  in  the  machinery  of  his  notes.  His  material  was  ex- 
cellent— his  power  as  an  orator  unquestioned — yet  he  was 
bound  down  by  a  lack  of  preparation  that  cost  him  the 
mastery  of  his  audience. 


76  Principles  of  Teaching 

Not  only  does  adequate  preparation  enable  a  teacher  to 
reach  out  and  take  hold  of  his  pupils;  it  makes  it  possible 
for  him  to  capitalize  on  the  situations  that  are  bound  to 
arise  in  class  discussion.  A  concrete  illustration  to  clear 
up  a  troublesome  question,  an  appropriate  incident  to  hit 
off  some  general  truth,  a  happy  phrase  to  crystallize  a 
thought — all  these  things  are  bom  only  of  adequate  prep- 
aration. 

Not  long  ago  a  candidate  for  the  presidency  of  the 
United  States  delighted  an  audience  of  ten  thousand  or 
more  in  the  Salt  Lake  Tabernacle  by  his  remarkable 
handling  of  questions  and  comments  thrown  at  him  from 
that  vast  audience.  There  was  no  hesitancy  or  uncertainty. 
He  spoke  "as  one  who  knew."  He  was  prepared.  He  had 
so  lived  with  the  questions  of  the  day  that  they  fairly 
seemed  to  be  part  of  him.  The  interesting  teacher  never 
teaches  all  he  knows.  His  reserve  material  inspires  both 
interest  and  confidence.  A  class  begins  to  lose  interest  in 
a  teacher  the  moment  they  suspect  that  his  stock  in  trade 
is  running  low.  The  mystery,  "how  one  small  head  could 
carry  all  he  knew,"  is  still  fascinating.  Thorough  prep- 
aration, moreover,  minimizes  the  likelihood  of  routine,  the 
monotony  of  which  is  always  deadening.  A  class  likes  a 
teacher — is  interested  in  him — when  it  can't  anticipate  just 
what  he  is  going  to  do  next  and  how  he  is  going  to  do  it. 

A  further  aid  in  holding  interest  is  to  know  intimately 
the  life  of  the  boys  and  girls  taught.  To  appreciate  fully 
their  attitude — to  know  what  sort  of  things  in  life  generally 
appeal  to  them — is  a  very  great  asset  to  any  teacher.  If  a 
teacher  knows  that  a  boy's  reaction  to  the  story  of  the  Israel- 
ites' crossing  the  Red  Sea  is  that  that  story  is  "some  bunk," 
he  is  fortified  in  knowing  how  to  present  other  subjects 
which  are  similar  tests  to  a  boy's  faith  and  understanding. 


What  Makes  for  Interest  77 

To  know  pupils'  attitudes  and  mode  of  life  is  to  know  what 
sort  of  illustrations  to  use,  what  emphasis  to  put  upon  emo- 
tional material,  what  stress  to  lay  on  practical  application. 
In  short,  it  is  to  know  just  how  to  "connect  up."  It  stimu- 
lates to  a  testing  of  values  so  that  a  teacher  selects  and 
adapts  his  material  to  the  needs  of  the  boys  and  girls  whom 
he  teaches. 

And,  finally,  as  a  key  to  interest,  a  teacher  needs  to  know 
what  the  "factors  of  interestingness"  are.  According  to 
the  findings  of  the  Public  Speaking  Department  of  the 
University  of  Chicago,  they  are  summed  up  in  these  seven 
terms: 

The  Vital  The  Similar 

The  Unusual  The  Antagonistic 

The  Uncertain  The  Animate 
The  Concrete 

This  list  becomes  more  and  more  helpful  as  it  is  pon- 
dered. It  is  surprising  to  find  how  experience  can  be 
explained  on  the  score  of  interest  by  reference  to  these 
terms.  Those  things  are  vital  which  pertain  to  life — which 
affect  existence.  Dangers  are  always  interesting.  Catastro- 
phies  are  fascinating.  Just  today  all  America  is  scanning 
the  newspapers  throughout  the  country  to  find  an  explan- 
ation of  the  Wall  Street  explosion.  We  shall  not  soon  forget 
the  feverish  interest  that  gripped  the  people  of  the  world 
during  our  recent  world  wars. 

When  life  is  at  stake,  interest  runs  high.  So  it  does 
when  property,  liberty,  and  other  sacred  rights,  so  vital 
to  life,  are  affected.  Anything  vital  enough  to  justify  the 
publication  of  an  "extra"  may  be  depended  upon  to  grip 
the  interest  of  men  and  women. 


78  Principles  of  Teaching 

It  is  equally  clear  that  a  fascination  attaches  to  things 
that  are  unusual.  New  styles  attract  because  of  this  fact. 
Let  a  man  oddly  dressed  walk  along  a  thoroughfare — the 
passersby  are  interested  immediately.  A  "loud"  hat  or 
necktie,  or  other  item  of  apparel,  attracts  attention  because 
it  is  out  of  the  ordinary.  Much  of  the  interest  and  delight 
in  traveling  lies  in  this  element  of  the  new  and  unusual 
which  the  traveler  encounters.  The  experiences  of  child- 
hood which  stand  out  most  prominently  are  usually  those 
which  at  the  time  riveted  themselves  to  the  mind  through 
the  interest  of  their  extraordinariness. 

Every  reader  knows  the  fascination  of  uncertainty.  "How 
will  the  book  turn  out?"  prompts  many  a  person  to  turn 
through  hundreds  of  pages  of  a  novel.  An  accident  is 
interesting  not  only  because  of  its  vital  significance,  but 
because  there  is  always  a  question  as  to  how  seriously  those 
involved  may  be  hurt.  One  of  the  clearest  illustrations  of 
the  force  of  the  uncertain  is  found  attending  baseball 
games.  Let  the  score  stand  at  10  to  2  in  the  eighth  inning 
and  the  grandstands  and  bleachers  begin  to  empty.  Few 
spectators  care  to  remain.  The  game  is  too  clearly  settled. 
As  the  boys  say,  it  is  "sewed  up"  and  there  is  nothing 
uncertain  to  grip  interest.  But  let  the  score  stand  3  to  2  or 
2  to  2  in  the  eighth  and  even  the  man  scheduled  home  for 
dinner  stays  to  the  end.  He  wants  to  know  how  the  game 
is  "coming  out." 

It  is  easier  also  to  be  interested  in  concrete  than  in  ab- 
stract things.  General  truths  are  not  gripping — concrete 
illustrations  of  those  truths  are.  If  I  declare  that  it  is  im- 
portant to  have  faith,  I  create  but  little  interest  in  an  audi- 
ence. But  if  I  tell  that  same  audience  how  some  individual 
has  been  miraculously  healed  through  faith,  I  have  their 
interest  completely.   Concrete  illustrations  fit  into  and  link 


What  Makes  for  Interest  79 

up  with  our  own  experiences  so  easily  and  forcefully  that 
they  are  particularly  interesting. 

So,  too,  with  things  that  are  similar.  The  mind  naturally 
links  like  with  like.  We  are  fond  of  making  comparisons. 
The  interest  in  the  similar  is  due  to  that  fundamental  law 
of  learning  that  we  proceed  from  what  is  known  to  that 
which  is  unknown  and  we  proceed  along  points  of  simi- 
larity. 

And  how  natural  it  seems  to  be  interested  in  things  an- 
tagonistic! Our  love  of  contests  of  all  sorts  is  evidence 
of  the  fact.  Who  can  resist  the  interest  that  attaches  to  a 
quarrel — a  fight — a  clash  of  any  kind.  The  best  of  classes 
will  leave  the  best  of  teachers,  mentally  at  least,  to  witness 
a  dog  fight.  Our  champion  prize  fighters  make  fortunes 
out  of  man's  interest  in  the  antagonistic. 

And  then,  finally,  we  are  interested  in  the  animate. 
We  like  action.  Things  in  motion  have  a  peculiar  fasci- 
nation. Who  does  not  watch  with  interest  a  moving  loco- 
motive? Advertising  experts  appreciate  the  appeal  of  the 
animate,  as  is  evidenced  by  the  great  variety  of  moving 
objects  that  challenge  our  interest  as  we  pass  up  and  down 
the  streets  of  a  city  and  we  respond  to  the  challenge.  In 
fact,  it  is  natural  to  respond  to  the  appeal  of  all  of  these 
seven  terms — hence  their  significance  in  teaching. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XII 

1.  Discuss  the  force  of  individual  differences  in  choosing  material 
that  will  be  interesting. 

2.  Why  is  it  so  essential  that  the  teacher  be  interested  in  what 
he  hopes  to  interest  his  pupils  in? 

3.  Show  how  preparation  makes  for  interest. 

4.  Why  is  an  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  lives  of  pupils  so 
essential  a  factor  with  the  interesting  teacher? 

5.  Illustrate  concretely  the  force  of  each  of  the  factors  of  interest- 
ingness. 

Helpful  References 

Those  listed  in  Chapter  XL 


CHAPTER  XIII 

A  LABORATORY  LESSON  IN  INTEREST 

Outline — Chapter  XIII 

Interest  should  be  inherent  in  the  lesson  taught. — An  illustration 
of  "dragged  in"  interest. — Interest  and  the  "easy"  idea. — A  proper 
interpretation  of  interest. — How  to  make  the  subject  of  Fasting  inter- 
esting.— The  various  possibilities. — How  to  secure  interest  in  the 
Atonement. — How  to  secure  interest  in  the  Resurrection. — How  to 
secure  interest  in  the  story  of  Jonah. 

"Oh,  that's  all  right,"  says  one.  "It  is  easy  enough  to 
talk  about  interest,  and  it's  easy  to  be  interesting  if  you 
can  choose  anything  you  Hke  to  amuse  a  class.  But  if  you 
have  to  teach  them  theology,  and  especially  some  of  the 
dry  lessons  that  are  outlined  for  us,  I  don't  see  how  we 
can  be  expected  to  make  our  work  interesting." 

Of  course,  there  is  some  point  to  such  an  objection. 
Having  been  asked  to  teach  the  truths  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus 
Christ,  we  cannot  defend  the  practice  of  bringing  in  all 
kinds  of  material  just  because  it  is  funny.  And,  of  course, 
it  is  true,  too,  that  some  lesson  outlines  upon  first  thought 
do  appear  rather  forbidding.  But  it  is  equally  true  that 
there  is  a  path  of  interest  through  the  most  unpromising 
material,  though  that  path  does  not  always  run  alongside 
the  teacher's  highroad  of  ease  and  unconcern.  A  false  no- 
tion of  interest  is  that  it  denotes  mere  amusement — that 
it  is  something  aside  from  serious  and  sober  thought. 

The  writer  recalls  visiting  a  class  taught  by  a  person 
holding  such  a  notion.  Having  given  his  lesson  but  little 
thought  he  apologized  for  its  lack  of  interest  by  saying, 
"Now,  boys  and  girls,  if  you  will  just  be  quiet  while  we 
go  over  the  lesson,  even  though  it  isn't  very  interesting, 
I'll  read  you  our  next  chapter  of  Huckleberry  Finn"  And 
yet  the  lesson,  hurried  over,  with  a  little  intensive  study 


A  Laboratory  Lesson  in  Interest  81 

could  have  been  made  as  fascinating  as  the  reading  of 
Huckleberry  Finn  and  notably  more  profitable. 

Another  misconception  relative  to  interest  is  the  idea  that 
to  make  a  subject  interesting  you  must  so  popularize  it 
that  you  cheapen  it.  This  idea  is  typified  in  the  "snap" 
courses  in  school — courses  made  interesting  at  the  expense 
of  painstaking  application.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  to  cheapen 
a  thing  is  ultimately  to  kill  interest  in  it.  Genuine  interest 
of  real  worth  is  born  of  effort  and  devotion  to  a  worthy 
objective.  Far  from  dissipating  the  mind's  energies,  it 
heightens  and  concentrates  them  to  the  mastery  of  the  big- 
ger and  finer  things  of  life. 

A  subject  to  be  made  interesting  must  present  some  ele- 
ment of  newness,  yet  must  be  so  linked  up  with  the  ex- 
perience of  the  learner  as  to  be  made  comprehensible.  It 
must,  moreover,  be  made  to  appeal  as  essential  and  helpful 
in  the  life  of  the  learner.  The  two  outstanding  queries  of 
the  uninterested  pupil  are: 

What  is  it  all  about? 
What's  the  use? 

Let  us,  then,  turn  to  two  or  three  subjects  which  at  first 
thought  may  appear  more  or  less  dull  to  see  whether  there 
is  an  approach  to  them  that  can  be  made  interesting. 

Members  of  the  teacher-training  class  at  Provo  were 
asked  to  name  four  or  five  subjects  which  they  regarded 
hard  to  stimulate  interest  in.   They  named  the  following: 

Fasting. 

The  Fall. 

The  Atonement. 

The  Resurrection. 

The  Story  of  Jonah. 


82  Principles  of  Teaching 

Let  us  suppose  that  I  have  met  my  Second  Intermediate 
class  of  eighteen  boys  and  girls  to  discuss  the  subject  of 
fasting.  I  might  begin  by  relating  an  actual  experience 
in  which  through  fasting  and  prayer  on  the  part  of  the 
members  of  a  particular  family  a  little  boy  has  just  been 
most  miraculously  restored  to  health,  after  an  operation  for 
appendicitis.  It  was  an  infection  case,  and  three  doctors 
agreed  there  was  no  possible  chance  of  recovery.  A  fourth 
doctor  held  out  the  possibility  of  one  chance  in  a  hundred. 
And  yet  a  two  days'  fast,  coupled  with  a  faith  I  have  seldom 
seen  equalled,  has  been  rewarded  by  the  complete  recovery 
of  the  boy,  who  is  now  thoroughly  well  and  strong. 

Such  a  concrete  illustration  is  one  possibility  for  arous- 
ing interest. 

Or,  I  might  proceed  with  a  few  definite,  pointed  ques- 
tions : 

"How  many  of  you  eighteen  boys  and  girls  fasted  this 
month?" 

The  answers  show  that  seven  have  fasted;  eleven  have  not. 

I  proceed  then  to  inquire  why  the  eleven  have  failed 
to  fast.    Various  explanations  are  offered: 

"Oh,  I  forgot." 

"We  don't  fast  in  our  home." 

"Father  has  to  work  all  day  Sunday;  and  so,  because 
mother  has  to  get  breakfast  for  him,  we  all  eat." 

"I  have  a  headache  if  I  fast,  so  I  think  it  is  better 
not  to." 

"I  don't  see  any  use  in  fasting.  Going  around  with  a 
long,  hungry  face  can't  help  anyone." 

"It's  easy  to  fast  when  they  won't  give  you  anything  to 
eat." 

"I  like  to  fast  just  to  show  myself  that  I  don't  live  to  be 
eating  all  the  time." 


A  Laboratory  Lesson  in  Interest  83 

"I  believe  it's  a  good  thing  to  give  the  body  a  Httle  rest 
once  in  a  while." 

"I  feel  different  v^hen  I  fast — more  spiritual  or  some- 
thing." 

"It  must  be  right  to  fast.  The  Church  wouldn't  ask  us 
to  if  it  wasn't  a  good  thing." 

The  definiteness  of  these  replies,  coupled  with  the  sus- 
pense of  wondering  what  the  next  answer  will  be,  keeps 
up  a  lively  interest. 

A  third  possibility  would  be  to  call  for  the  experiences 
of  the  pupils,  or  experiences  which  have  occurred  in  their 
families,  or  concerning  which  they  have  read.  A  very  rich 
compilation  of  interesting  material  can  be  collected  under 
such  a  scheme. 

Or,  finally,  I  may  choose  to  proceed  immediately  with 
a  vigorous  analysis  and  discussion  of  the  whole  problem. 
I  arouse  interest  by  quoting  a  friend  who  has  put  the  query 
to  me,  "What  is  the  use  of  fasting?"  and  then  enlist  the 
cooperation  of  the  class  in  formulating  a  reply.  Together 
we  work  out  the  possible  justification  of  fasting. 

The  following  outline  may  represent  the  line  of  our 
thought: 

1.  Jesus  taught  us  to  fast. 

a.  His  forty  days  in  the  wilderness. 

b.  His  injunction  to  his  apostles. 

2.  Our  leaders  have  instituted  fasting  in  these  latter 
days. 

3.  By  fasting  we  develop  a  mastery  over  our  appetites. 
The  body  is  made  to  serve  the  will. 

4.  Physiologically,  it  is  a  good  thing  to  fast.  Many 
scientists  are  now  recommending  regular  rests  for  the  di- 
gestive organs. 


84  Principles  of  Teaching 

5.  Fasting  makes  possible  an  elevation  of  spirit. 

6.  Our  system  of  fasting  makes  it  possible  to  see  that 
no  one  in  the  Church  wants  for  food. 

7.  Fasting  enables  us  to  appreciate  the  feelings  of  those 
who  are  less  fortunate  in  the  world  than  we  are,  who  are 
denied  the  blessings  we  enjoy. 

Of  course,  each  idea  needs  to  be  introduced  and  devel- 
oped in  a  concrete,  vigorous  manner.  So  treated,  fasting 
can  be  made  a  very  fascinating  subject. 

The  following  suggestions  on  introducing  the  lesson  on 
the  Resurrection  to  little  children  have  been  drawn  up  by 
one  of  the  most  successful  kindergarten  teachers  in  the 
Church: 

"There  are  several  things  to  be  considered  before  present- 
ing the  lesson  on  the  Resurrection  to  little  children. 

"First,  the  teacher  must  feel  that  she  can  present  it.  In 
other  words,  she  must  love  the  story  and  feel  the  importance 
of  it.  She  must  also  be  able  to  see  the  beautiful  side  and 
remember  that  she  is  teaching,  *There  is  no  death;  but  life 
eternal.' 

"The  next  question  to  consider  is:  How  are  we  going  to 
present  it?  We  must  lead  the  child  from  the  known  to 
the  unknown,  through  the  child's  own  experience.  There- 
fore we  go  to  nature,  because  all  nature  appeals  to  the 
child.  But  in  order  to  create  the  right  atmosphere,  the 
teacher  in  selecting  the  subject  must  feel  that  what  he  has 
selected  is  the  very  thing  he  wants  in  order  to  explain  to 
the  child,  'There  is  no  death.' 

"There  are  several  ways  in  which  the  subject  may  be  ap- 
proached through  nature.  We  may  take  the  Autumn  and 
let  the  children  tell  what  happens  to  the  trees,  flowers,  and 
difiFerent  plants.   Lead  them  to  see  the  condition  after  the 


A  Laboratory  Lesson  in  Interest  85 

leaves  are  off.  Then  what  will  happen  next  Spring.  Or 
we  may  take  one  specific  tree  or  brush  and  talk  of  the  twig 
where  the  leaves  were  in  the  summer,  but  have  now  fallen 
to  the  ground.  The  twig  looks  dead.  But  on  opening  the 
bud  and  removing  the  brown  covering  we  find  the  tiny 
leaf  inside  waiting  and  preparing  to  come  forth  in  the 
Spring. 

"The  bulb  may  be  used  in  a  similar  way,  leading  the 
child  to  see  the  bulb  as  it  is  before  planting,  then  to  see 
what  happens  when  we  plant  it. 

"The  caterpillar  may  also  be  used.  Here  we  have  the 
live  worm  getting  ready  to  go  into  his  cocoon  and  is  absent 
for  some  time;  then  he  returns,  only  in  another  form.  A 
higher  stage. 

"Lead  the  child  to  see  that  every  thing  in  nature  has  a 
period  of  changing,  of  apparently  going  away  for  a  short 
time,  but  is  not  dead — it  returns  to  life. 

"Be  sure  to  have  the  objects  you  are  talking  about  before 
the  class,  while  you  are  discussing  the  subject.  If  not  ob« 
tainable,  use  a  picture,  or  draw  them." 

The  problem  of  the  story  of  Jonah  is  usually  submitted 
with  a  twinkle  in  the  eye  of  him  who  raises  the  question. 
The  world  has  so  generally  relegated  it  to  the  heap  of  the 
impossible  that  even  some  of  our  own  people  look  rather 
amazed  when  a  champion  for  Jonah  steps  forward.  And 
yet  this  story  properly  approached  is  one  of  the  teacher's 
greatest  opportunities.  If  it  is  to  be  presented  to  small 
children  it  can  be  told  very  beautifully,  either  as  a  lesson 
on  disobedience  or,  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  people 
of  Nineveh,  as  a  lesson  on  fasting  and  prayer.  Little  chil- 
dren will  not  be  troubled  with  doubt  and  disbelief  unless 
the  teacher  fosters  such  attitudes. 


86  Principles  of  Teaching 

To  older  minds,  of  course,  the  story  already  is  a  good 
bit  of  a  stumbling  block,  and  therefore  needs  to  be  given 
thoughtful  preparation. 

At  the  outset,  with  older  students,  we  ought  to  lead 
them  into  the  beauties  of  the  story — beauties  which  all 
too  frequently  are  wholly  unknown  to  the  ordinary  boy 
or  girl.   Read  the  story: 

The  call  that  comes  to  Jonah.  His  punishment. 
His  hesitancy.  His    attitude    toward    the 

His  dodging  of  duty.  people  of  Nineveh. 

His  selfish  judgments.  The  lesson  taught. 

"Yes,"  says  the  young  skeptic,  "but  how  about  the  whale 
idea?  Do  you  expect  us  to  believe  that  stuff?  It's  con- 
trary to  all  natural  law." 

Let's  meet  the  issue  squarely.  The  Bible  says  that  Jonah 
was  swallowed  by  a  big  fish.  Science  is  agreed  that  that 
part  of  the  account  is  easily  possible — nothing  contrary  to 
natural  law  so  far. 

"But  what  about  the  three  days?  That  surely  is." 
Here  is  a  challenge.    Is  it  possible  that  life  can  be  sus- 
pended, "and  restored"?    Let  the  sciptures  testify.    It  was 
so  in  the  case  of  the  daughter  of  Jairus.    (Mark  5:22-43.) 
So  was  it  in  the  case  of  Lazarus.  (John  11:23-44.) 
Consider  the  case  of  of  the  Son  of  God  Himself  1   Buried 
in  the  tomb,  Jesus  rose  the  third  day.   If  you  can  believe 
in  the  resurrection,  you  can  believe  in  the  restoration  of 
Jonah.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  Jesus  Himself  accepted 
the  story  of  Jonah.   See  Matthew  12:40: 

"For  as  Jonah  was  three  days  and  three  nights  in  the  whale's 
belly;  so  shall  the  Son  of  man  be  three  days  and  three  nights  in 
the  heart  of  the  earth." 


A  Laboratory  Lesson  in  Interest  87 

To  doubt  Jonah  is  to  question  the  Master.  Not  only  so, 
but  if  a  person  throws  out  the  story  of  Jonah,  he  faces  a 
chain  of  miraculous  events  from  one  end  of  the  Bible  to 
the  other  from  which  he  will  have  difficulty  to  escape.  You 
ask  me  to  explain  Jonah,  I  shall  reply  by  asking  you  to 
explain : 

The  creation  of  man.  Elisha  and  the  ax. 

The  flood.  The  birth  of  the  Savior. 

The  confusion  of  Babel.  His  resurrection. 

The  parting  of  the  Red  Sea.  One- third  of  the  account  giv- 
The  three  Hebrews  and  the       en  by  Matthew, 

furnace.  Your  own  birth. 

May  one  not  accept  with  confidence  the  word  of  God 
as  contained  in  the  Doctrine  &  Covenants,  Sec.  35:8? 

"For  I  am  God,  and  mine  arm  is  not  shortened;  and  I 
will  show  miracles,  signs  and  wonders  unto  all  those  who 
believe  on  my  name." 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XIII 

1.  Discuss  the  proper  use  of  stories  in  securing  and  maintaining 
interest. 

2.  Point  out  the  danger  of  bringing  in  foreign  "funny"  material. 

3.  Show  how  difficult  subjects  may  be  made  of  even  greater  inter- 
est than  easy  ones. 

4.  Use  the  greater  part  of  this  class  hour  for  illustrating  how  to 
create  interest  in  subjects  ordinarily  found  hard  to  teach. 

Helpful  References 
Those  listed  in  Chapter  XI. 


CHAPTER  XIV 

THE  MORE  IMMEDIATE  PROBLEMS  IN  TEACHING 

Outline — Chapter  XIV 

The  steps  involved  in  the  preparation  of  a  lesson:  The  aim;  or- 
ganization; illustration;  application;  questions. — Problems  involved 
in  the  presentation  of  a  lesson:  The  point  of  contact;  illustration; 
the  lesson  statement. — Various  possibilities. — The  review:  question- 
ing; application. — The  matter  summarized. 

So  many  textbooks  have  been  written  about  teaching — 
so  many  points  of  view  have  been  advanced — such  a  variety 
of  terminology  has  been  employed,  even  in  the  expression 
of  a  single  educational  notion — that  beginning  teachers  are 
frequently  at  a  loss  to  know  just  how  to  set  about  the  task 
of  teaching.  Leaving  for  further  consideration  the  more 
purely  theoretical  aspects  of  our  problem,  let  us  face  the 
questions  of  most  immediate  concern: 

How  TO  Prepare  a  Lesson. 
How  TO  Present  a  Lesson. 

Is  there  not  a  common -sense  procedure  which  we  can 
agree  to  as  promising  best  results  in  these  two  funda- 
mental steps?  At  the  outset  let  us  agree  that  preparation 
and  presentation  are  inseparable  aspects  of  but  one  process. 
Preparation  consists  of  the  work  done  behind  the  scenes — 
presentation  involves  the  getting  over  of  the  results  of  that 
work  to  the  audience — the  class.  Frequently  teachers  are 
confused  because  they  mistake  directions  governing  prepa- 
ration as  applying  to  presentation.  For  instance,  one  teacher 
proceeded  to  drill  a  class  of  small  children  on  the  memoriz- 
ing of  the  aim — an  abstract  general  truth — unmindful  of 
the  fact  that  the  aim  was  set  down  for  the  teacher's  guid- 
ance— a  focus  for  his  preparation  done  behind  the  scenes. 


The  More  Immediate  Problems  in  Teaching      89 

Though  in  the  preparation  of  a  lesson  we  keep  the  aim 
clearly  in  mind,  and  though,  when  we  stand  before  our 
class,  we  let  it  function  in  the  background  of  our  conscious- 
ness as  an  objective  in  our  procedure,  we  ought  not  to  hurl 
it  at  our  class.  As  a  generalized  truth  it  can  make  but 
little  appeal  to  young  minds,  and  it  ought  to  be  self-evident, 
at  the  end  of  a  successful  recitation,  to  mature  minds. 

And  so  with  the  matter  of  organization.  We  skeletonize 
our  thoughts  behind  the  scenes,  but  the  skeleton  is  rather 
an  unsightly  specimen  to  exhibit  before  a  class.  The  out- 
line should  be  inherent  in  the  lesson  as  presented,  but  it 
ought  not  to  protrude  so  that  the  means  will  be  mistaken 
for  an  end.  Subsequent  chapters  will  illustrate  both  the 
selection  of  an  aim  and  its  elaboration  through  suitable 
organization. 

The  successful  preparation  of  a  lesson  involves  at  least 
five  major  steps.  They  are  named  here  that  the  problem 
of  preparation  may  be  grasped  as  a  whole.  Later  chapters 
will  develop  at  length  each  step  in  its  turn. 

1.  The  Aim.  A  generalized  statement,  a  kernel  of 
truth  about  which  all  of  the  facts  of  the  lesson  are  made 
to  center.  A  lesson  may  be  built  up  on  a  passage  of  scrip- 
ture, on  the  experience  of  a  person  or  a  people,  or  on  a 
vital  question,  etc.  But  in  any  case,  though  we  are  inter- 
ested in  the  facts  involved,  we  are  interested  not  in  the  facts 
as  an  end  in  themselves,  but  rather  because  of  the  truth 
involved  in  the  facts.  In  other  words,  we  seek  to  sift  out 
of  the  material  offered  in  a  lesson  an  essential  truth  which 
helps  us  in  a  solution  of  the  problems  of  life.  Attention 
to  the  aim  is  a  guarantee  against  mere  running  over  of 
matter  of  fact. 

2.  Organization.     A  teacher  should  outline  his  lesson  so 


90  Principles  of  Teaching 

ilia  I  pupils  may  easily  follow  him  through  the  subject  mat- 
ter presented  to  the  ultimate  truth  that  lies  beyond. 

3.  Illustration.  Illustrations  are  what  make  truth  vivid. 
Successful  teachers  owe  much  of  their  success  to  their 
ability  through  story  or  incident  to  drive  home  to  the  ex- 
perience of  pupils  those  fundamental  truths  which  in  their 
general  terms  make  but  little  appeal.  One  of  the  most  help- 
ful practices  for  teachers  who  would  become  effective  is  the 
habit  of  clipping  and  filing  available  illustrative  material. 
There  is  a  wealth  of  rich,  concrete  matter  appearing  regu- 
larly in  our  magazines  and  other  publications.  What  is 
good  today  likely  will  be  equally  good  a  year  or  two  years 
hence  when  we  shall  face  the  problem  of  teaching  again 
today's  lesson.  An  alphabetic  letter  file  may  be  had  for  a 
few  cents  in  which  can  be  filed  away  all  sorts  of  helpful 
material.   It  pays  to  collect  and  save! 

4.  Application.  Having  selected  his  aim,  the  teacher 
knows  the  result  he  should  like  to  have  follow  his  lesson, 
in  the  lives  of  his  pupils.  He  knows,  too,  their  tendencies 
and  their  needs.  In  giving  attention  to  application  he  is 
merely  making  a  survey  of  the  possible  channel  into  which 
he  can  direct  his  pupils'  activities.  In  considering  appli- 
cation he  asks,  "Of  what  use  will  this  material  be  in  the 
experience  of  my  pupils?"  The  test- application  is  the  real 
test — both  of  the  subject  matter  presented  and  of  the  ef- 
fectiveness of  the  presentation. 

5.  Questions.  Finally,  lesson  preparation  is  not  com- 
plete unless  the  teacher  has  formulated  a  few  thought-pro- 
voking questions  which  go  to  the  very  heart  of  the  lesson. 
The  question  is  the  great  challenge  to  the  seeker  after  truth. 
It  is  easy  to  ask  questions,  but  to  propound  queries  that  stir 
pupils  to  an  intellectual  awakening  is  a  real  art.  Surely 
no  preparation  can  be  fully  complete  unless  it  involves: 


The  More  Immediate  Problems  in  Teaching     91 

The  selection  of  an  aim. 
The  orderly  organization  of  material. 
The  collecting  of  rich  illustrations. 
The  pondering  of  facts  to  their  application. 
The  formulating  of  at  least  a  few  thoroughly 
stimulating  questions. 

Can  we  not  agree  to  these  steps  as  fundamental  in  the 
proper  preparation  of  our  lessons  in  all  of  our  Church 
organizations? 

With  the  subject  matter  well  in  mind — the  work  behind 
the  scenes  completed,  the  teacher  is  then  prepared  for  the 
problem  of  presentation — is  ready  to  appear  on  the  stage 
of  class  activity.  The  first  outstanding  problem  in  lesson 
presentation  is  that  of  the  Point  of  Contact.  This  is  a 
phrase  variously  interpreted  and  often  misunderstood.  Per- 
haps it  is  not  the  happiest  expression  we  could  wish,  but 
it  is  so  generally  used  and  is  so  signficant  when  understood 
that  we  ought  to  standardize  it  and  interpret  it  as  it  affects 
our  Church  work. 

When  a  class  assembles  for  recitation  purposes  its  mem- 
bers present  themselves  with  all  kinds  of  mental  attitudes 
and  mind  content.  The  various  groups  of  a  Mutual  class 
may  have  been  engaged  in  all  sorts  of  activities  just  before 
entering  their  classroom.  One  group  may  have  been  dis- 
cussing politics;  another  may  have  been  engaged  in  a  game 
of  ball;  a  third  may  have  been  practicing  as  a  quartette; 
and  still  a  fourth  may  have  been  busy  at  office  work.  Facing 
such  a  collection  of  groups  stands  a  teacher  who  for  an 
hour  or  more  has  dismissed  all  temporal  matters,  and  has 
been  pondering  the  spiritual  significance  of  prayer.  Evi- 
dently there  is  a  great  mental  chasm  between  them.  Their 
coming  together  and  thinking  on  common  ground  involves 


92  Principles  of  Teaching 

the  Point  of  Contact.  There  must  be  contact  if  an  influ- 
ence for  good  is  to  be  exerted.  Either  the  teacher  must 
succeed  in  bringing  the  boys  to  where  he  is  "in  thought," 
or  he  must  go  to  "where  they  are." 

Teachers  in  Bible  lessons  all  too  frequently  hurry  off 
into  the  Holy  Land,  going  back  some  two  thouand  years, 
and  leaving  their  pupils  in  Utah  and  in  the  here  and 
the  present.  No  wonder  that  pupils  say  of  such  a  teacher, 
"We  don't  'get'  him."  To  proceed  without  preparing  the 
minds  of  pupils  for  the  message  and  discussion  of  the  lesson 
is  like  planting  seed  without  having  first  plowed  and  pre- 
pared the  ground. 

In  the  Bible  lesson,  it  would  be  easy  to  bridge  over  from 
the  interests  of  today  to  those  of  Bible  days.  Suppose  our 
lesson  is  on  Joseph  who  was  sold  into  Egypt.  Instead  of 
proceeding  at  once  with  a  statement  as  to  the  parentage  of 
Joseph,  etc.,  we  might  well  center  the  interests  of  these 
various-minded  boys  on  a  current  observation  of  today — a 
wonderfully  fine  harvest  field  of  grain.  They  have  all  seen 
that.  Make  a  striking  observation  relative  to  the  grain, 
or  put  a  question  that  will  lead  them  to  do  that  for  you. 
Having  raised  an  issue,  you  continue  by  inquiring  whether 
or  not  the  same  conditions  have  prevailed  elsewhere  and  at 
other  times.  Did  they  prevail  in  the  days  of  Israel?  The 
step  then  to  the  story  of  Joseph's  dream,  etc.,  is  an  easy  one. 

This  illustration,  though  simple  and  more  or  less  crude, 
indicates  that  to  establish  a  point  of  contact,  we  must  reach 
out  to  where  the  pupil  now  is,  and  lead  easily  and  naturally 
to  where  you  would  have  him  go.  Surely  we  cannot  pre- 
sume that  he  has  already  traveled  the  same  intellectual  road 
that  we  have  gone  over. 

Suppose  we  face  a  group  of  adolescent  boys  to  teach  them 
a  lesson  on  the  importance  of  their  attending  church.    If 


The  More  Immediate  Problems  in  Teaching      93 

we  proceed  with  a  preachment  on  their  duties  and  obliga- 
tions, we  are  quite  certain  to  lose  their  interest.  Boys  do 
not  like  to  be  preached  at. 

We  know,  however,  that  they  are  interested  in  automo- 
biles. By  starting  out  with  some  vital  observation  or  ques- 
tion out  of  the  automobile  world,  we  may  count  on  their 
attention.  Following  the  discussion  thus  raised,  we  might 
then  inquire  the  purpose  of  the  garages  that  we  find  along 
all  public  highways.  We  could  dwell  upon  the  significance 
of  repairs  in  maintaining  the  efficiency  of  cars.  Now  we 
are  prepared  for  the  query,  Is  it  not  essential  that  we  have 
spiritual  garages  for  the  souls  of  men,  garages  where  sup- 
plies and  repairs  may  be  had? 

The  "gas"  of  faith. 

The  "oil"  of  consolation. 

The  "adjustment"  of  repentance. 

The  "charging"  of  our  spiritual  batteries,  etc. 

Once  led  into  the  subject,  boys  can  be  made  to  see  that 
spiritual  problems  are  even  more  vital  than  material  ones. 

The  point  of  contact  established,  we  next  face  the  matter 
of  Lesson  Statement.  The  subject  matter  must  either  be  in 
mind  already  because  of  home  preparation,  or  the  teacher 
must  supply  it.  In  the  smaller  classes  the  teacher  generally 
will  have  to  tell  in  good  part  what  he  wishes  to  convey;  in 
the  larger  classes,  there  are  the  possibilities  of  home  prep- 
aration, topical  reports,  the  lecture,  and  the  socialized  reci- 
tation built  up  by  questions  and  discussions.  It  is  not  in- 
tended here  to  discuss  the  various  methods  of  lesson  presen- 
tation— the  thought  being  simply  that  in  some  way  the  les- 
son statement  must  be  presented. 

Then  there  is  the  problem  of  connecting  up  the  present 
lesson  with  those  that  have  already  been  presented.    The 


94  Principles  of  Teaching 

review  is  a  vital  factor  in  fixing  in  the  mind  the  relative 
value  of  material  covered. 

Then,  too,  there  is  the  matter  of  questioning  to  test 
knowledge  and  stimulate  discussion,  together  with  the 
weaving  in  of  illustrative  material  that  has  already  been 
thought  out  or  which  may  suggest  itself  as  the  lesson  pro- 
gresses. If,  as  all  this  material  has  been  presented,  the 
application  has  been  made  sufficiently  clear  to  the  pupils, 
the  presentation  is  complete;  otherwise  avenues  of  action 
should  be  pointed  out,  care  being  taken  to  stimulate  rather 
than  to  moralize. 

In  conclusion,  then,  we  have  the  matter  of  preparation 
as  follows: 


Preparation 

A^ 

;  it  involves  suhj* 

ect 

As  it  involves  pres 

matter: 

entation: 

1. 

The  Aim 

Point  of  Contact 

2. 

Organization 

Lesson  Statement 

3. 

Illustration 

Review 

4. 

Application 

Illustration 

5. 

Questions 

Application 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XIV 

1.  Discuss  the  helpfulness  of  having  a  definite  procedure  in  the 
matter  of  lesson  preparation. 

2.  Point  out  the  differences  between  lesson  preparation  and  lesson 
presentation. 

3.  Name  and  discuss  the  essential  steps  in  preparing  a  lesson. 

4.  To  what  extent  would  you  favor  adopting  these  steps  as  the 
fundamental  processes? 

5.  Discuss  the  meaning  and  significants  of  "The  Point  of  Con- 
tact." 


The  More  Immediate  Problems  in  Teaching      95 


6.  Why  is  some  kind  of  lesson  statement  a  prerequisite  to  a  good 
recitation? 

7.  Show  how  this  statement  may  be  made. 

8.  What  do  you  consider  your  most  valuable  device  in  the  prep- 
aration of  a  lesson? 

9.  Discuss  the  importance  of  filing  away  the  material  looked  up 
in  the  preparation  of  the  regular  work  of  teaching. 

10.    Indicate  some  of  the  best  methods  of  filing. 

Helpful  References 

Betts,  How  to  Teach  Religion;  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School 
Teachers;  Thomdike,  Principles  of  Teaching;  Strayer  and  Nors- 
worthy,  How  to  Teach;  Earhart,  Types  of  Teaching;  Bctts,  Classroom 
Method  in  Management;  Bagley,  Classroom  Management. 


CHAPTER  XV 

ORGANIZING  A  LESSON 

Outline — Chapter  XV 

A  review  of  the  steps  in  lesson  preparation. — The  values  of  out- 
lining.— Objections  answered. — Outlining  a  means,  not  an  end. — ^The 
essentials  in  outlining. — An  illustrative  outline  on  prayer. 

Preparing  a  lesson  is  no  easy  matter,  particularly  for 
those  teachers  who  are  new  to  the  calling.  There  are  those, 
of  course,  for  whom  reading  an  assigned  chapter  through 
constitutes  a  preparation,  but  to  the  successful  teacher  this 
preliminary  reading  is  only  the  initial  step  in  the  process. 
Adequate  preparation  involves  the  following  questions: 

What  aim  shall  I  select  out  of  the  material  available  as 
the  focus  for  my  day's  work? 

How  shall  I  build  about  that  aim  a  body  of  facts  that 
will  establish  it  as  a  fundamental  truth  in  life? 

How  shall  I  illustrate  the  truths  presented  so  that  they 
will  strike  home  in  the  experiences  of  my  boys  and  girls? 

How  shall  I  make  sure  that  members  of  the  class  will 
go  out  from  the  recitation  to  put  into  practice  the  teach- 
ings of  the  day? 

What  questions  ought  I  to  ask  to  emphasize  the  outstand- 
ing points  of  my  lesson? 

What  method  of  presentation  can  I  most  safely  follow 
to  make  my  lesson  effective? 

How  may  I  discipline  my  class  so  that  no  disturbances 
will  interfere  with  our  discussions? 

Reduced  to  simple  terms,  the  matter  of  preparation  to- 
gether with  presentation.  Involves  the  problems  of 

Organization  Application 

Aim  Methods  of  presentation 

Illustration  Questioning 


Organizing  a  Lesson  97 

It  is  difficult  to  single  out  any  one  factor  and  treat  it  as 
if  it  were  independent  of  the  others — teaching  is  a  complex 
art  with  all  of  these  factors  inseparably  contributing  to  the 
results  desired — but,  for  purposes  of  clearness,  may  we  not 
proceed  to  give  attention  to  each  in  its  turn  that  in  the  end 
the  teaching  process  may  the  more  definitely  stand  out  in 
all  its  aspects? 

For  convenience,  then,  let  us  in  this  chapter  consider 
the  problem  of  organization.  How  to  outline  a  lesson  is 
one  of  the  most  fundamental  considerations  involved  in 
the  teaching  process.  In  fact,  it  is  doubtful  whether  there 
is  any  one  more  helpful  attainment  than  the  ability  clearly 
to  outline  subject  matter.  It  not  only  enables  the  teacher 
to  proceed  systematically,  thereby  insuring  clearness  and 
adequate  treatment  of  a  lesson,  but  it  makes  it  so  easy  and 
profitable  for  a  class  to  follow  the  discussion.  Outlining 
to  teaching  is  what  organization  is  to  business.  Just  as  the 
aim  points  out  the  goal  we  seek,  so  the  outline  indicates  the 
route  we  shall  follow  to  attain  the  goal.  Outlining  is 
simply  surveying  the  road  before  the  concrete  is  laid. 

Occasionally  a  teacher  objects  to  outlining  on  the  ground 
that  it  is  too  mechanical — that  it  destroys  spontaneity  and 
the  flow  of  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord.  It  has  always  seemed 
to  the  writer  that  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  is  quite  as  pleased 
to  follow  a  straight  path  as  it  is  to  follow  a  crooked  one. 
Outlining  is  not  in  any  sense  a  substitute  for  inspiration — 
it  is  merely  a  guarantee,  by  way  of  preparation,  that  the 
teacher  has  done  his  part  and  can  in  good  conscience  ask 
for  that  spiritual  aid  and  guidance  which  he  then  is  entitled 
to.  The  fact  that  order  is  a  law  of  heaven  rather  indicates 
that  there  is  no  divine  injunction  against  outlining. 

Of  course,  outlining  is  not  an  end  in  itself — it  is  a  means 
merely  to  more  systematic  procedure.   Two  difficulties  fre- 


98  Principles  of  Teaching 

quently  attach  to  outlining:  one  is  that  the  outhne  is  made 
so  complex  that  it  hinders  rather  than  helps  in  the  matter 
of  clearness;  the  other  is  that  a  teacher  may  become  "out- 
line bound,"  in  which  case  his  teaching  becomes  mechanical 
and  labored.  Such  a  teacher  illustrates  clearly  the  force 
of  the  passage,  "The  letter  killeth,  but  the  spirit  giveth 
life." 

But  if  the  outline  is  made  simple — if  it  is  considered  as 
merely  a  skeleton  upon  which  is  to  be  built  the  lesson — it 
is  one  of  the  greatest  assets  a  teacher  can  have.  Perhaps 
we  can  make  the  matter  clearest  by  going  through  the  proc- 
ess of  outlining  a  lesson,  indicating  the  essential  steps  in- 
volved. 

Suppose  we  are  asked  to  prepare  a  lesson  on  prayer. 
Keep  in  mind  that  in  such  a  preparation  we  face  the  prob- 
lems listed  at  the  beginning  of  this  chapter:  the  aim,  the 
illustration,  the  application,  etc.,  and  keep  in  mind  also 
that  each  of  these  subjects  will  be  taken  up  in  its  turn  and 
that  for  the  present  we  are  concerned  primarily  with  the 
query,  "How  can  I  organize  a  lesson  on  prayer?"  Let  us 
assume,  too,  that  we  are  preparing  this  lesson  for  young 
men  and  women  about  twenty  years  of  age. 

First  of  all,  I  must  decide  why  I  am  to  teach  the  sub- 
ject of  prayer.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  the  matter  of  the 
aim  is  to  be  considered  fully  in  the  succeeding  chapter, 
suppose  we  agree  that  our  purpose  in  this  lesson  shall  be 
to  establish  prayer  as  a  habit  of  life. 

Step  number  one,  then,  is  the  selection  of  an  aim — a 
focus  for  the  thought  of  the  lesson. 

Step  number  two  is  the  collection  of  random  thoughts. 
As  I  begin  to  ponder  the  subject  of  prayer  and  its  influ- 


Organizing  a  Lesson  99 

ence  on  life,  all  sorts  of  ideas  crowd  into  my  mind.  Per- 
haps I  read  some  one's  discussion  of  prayer — perhaps  I 
talk  to  a  friend  relative  to  it — perhaps  I  just  ran  the  subject 
over  in  my  mind.  The  thoughts  that  come  to  me  may  be 
vague  and  wholly  disconnected.  My  immediate  concern  is 
content — order  will  come  later.  And  so  I  jot  down,  either 
in  my  mind  or  on  paper,  such  ideas  as  these: 

"Prayer  is  the  soul's  sincere  desire." 
The  Song  "Sweet  hour  of  prayer." 
What  is  the  use  of  prayer? 
Are  prayers  answered? 
How  often  should  I  pray? 

Does  the  Lord  hear  and  answer  our  prayers,  or  do  we  answer  them 
ourselves? 
What  kinds  of  prayers  are  there? 
How  may  I  know  how  to  pray? 
Should  prayers  always  be  answered  affirmatively? 
What  are  the  characteristics  of  a  good  prayer? 
What  prayers  have  impressed  me  most? 

And  so  I  go  on.  My  task  in  step  two  is  to  scout  about 
intellectually  in  search  of  available,  suitable  material. 
Many  of  my  jottings  may  duplicate  others  already  set 
down;  others  may  not  be  appropriate  for  my  need;  still 
others  may  be  wholly  irrelevant.  But  I  am  seeking  a  wealth 
of  material  that  I  may  make  my  recitation  as  rich  as 
possible. 

Now,  step  three  becomes  a  process  of  correlation  and 
elimination — a  process  of  hitting  upon  my  main  headings 
— setting  up  the  milestones  to  mark  my  course  of  develop- 
ment. And  I  so  sift  the  material  in  my  mind  and  sort  it 
out  under  appropriate  captions.  After  a  good  bit  of  intel- 
lectual rummaging  about,  I  find  that  my  random  thoughts 
on  prayer  fall  rather  naturally  into  four  main  divisions, 
each  capable  of  expression  in  a  question: 


100  Principles  of  Teaching 

I.  What  is  prayer? 

II.  Why  should  I  pray? 

III.  How  should  I  pray? 

IV.  When  should  I  pray? 

But  now  that  I  have  these  major  headings,  I  still  face 
the  problems  of  enriching  them  and  elaborating  them  so 
that  they  will  have  body  enough  to  stand.  In  other  words, 
I  build  up  my  sub-headings.  Under  the  first  question,  for 
instance,  I  group  these  thoughts: 

I.  What  Is  Prayer? 

1.  It  is  communion  with  God. 

2.  It  is  the  key  to  God's  storehouse. 

3.  It  is  the  key  to  God's  heart. 

4.  It  is  "The  soul's  sincere  desire." 

5.  It  is  the  great  anchor  of  faith. 

Under  question  two,  I  group: 

II.  Why  Should  I  Pray? 

1.  Because  I  am  commanded  of  the  Lord  to  pray. 

2.  Because  through  prayer  I  keep  in  tune  with  the  Spirit 
of  the  Lord. 

3.  Because  it  is  through  prayer  that  I  acknowledge  the 
goodness  of  God. 

4.  Because  through  prayer  I  petition  for  needed  blessings. 

5.  Because  through  prayer  I  establish  and  preserve  an  atti- 
tude of  humility. 

Under  question  three: 

III.  How  Should  I  Pray? 

1.  Simply. 

2.  Sincerely. 

3.  In  spirit. 

4.  After  the  pattern  of  His  prayer. 

5.  In  secret  as  well  as  in  public. 

Under  question  four: 

IV.    When  Should  I  Pray? 

1.  Regularly. 

2.  Morning  and   evening. 

3.  To  meet  special  needs. 

4.  My  attitude  should  always  be  one  of  prayerfulness. 


Organizing  a  Lesson 


101 


This  matter  of  organization  may  be  diagrammatically 
illustrated  as  follows: 


Random  Thoughts 
The  hymn 


Organized  Thoughts 


Jine  i>orig 

I.  What  is  Prayer? 

What  is  the  use 
of  prayer? 

Focus 

or 

Aim 

To    establish 

prayer    as    a 

life  habit. 

II.  Why  Should  I  Pray? 

Are    prayers    an- 
swered? 

How  often  should 
I  pray? 

III.  How  Should  I  Pray? 

IV.  When  Should  I  Pray? 

What  are  the 

a   good    prayer, 
etc.? 


In  short,  organizing  involves  the  search  for  thought 
and  the  bringing  of  order  out  of  chaos.  Having  selected 
the  aim,  the  main  headings,  and  the  sub-headings,  we  now 
face  step  four — the  enriching  of  these  sub-headings  in  illus- 
tration, incident,  etc.,  so  that  we  may  link  up  these  thoughts 
with  the  experience  of  our  pupils.  We  may  think  of  so 
much  stimulating  material  that  during  the  ordinary  class 
hour  we  can  cover  well  only  one  of  these  questions.  Our 
purpose  and  the  needs  of  the  class  must  determine  the  ex- 
tent of  our  detail.  The  actual  material  that  could  be  used 
to  enrich  this  lesson  on  prayer  will  be  given  in  the  chapter 
on  illustration. 

Step  five  involves  the  problem  of  application,  or  "carry- 
over into  life" — a  subject  to  which  another  chapter  will 
be  devoted.  Of  course,  we  ought  to  say  here,  in  passing, 
that  application  is  not  something  added  to  or  "tacked  on" 


102  Principles  of  Teaching 

a  lesson.  It  may  be  emphasized  at  the  close  of  a  lesson, 
but  in  reality  it  pervades  and  is  inherent  in  the  whole 
lesson. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XV 

1.  What  is  meant  by  calling  teaching  a  composite  process? 

2.  Point  out  the  essential  advantages  in  outlining  lessons. 

3.  Show  how  outlining  is  not  in  conflict  with  inspiration. 

4.  Name  the  essential  steps  in  lesson  organization. 

5.  Choose  a  subject  from  one  of  the  manuals  now  in  use  in  one 
of  our  organizations  and  build  up  a  typical  lesson. 

Heijpful  References 
Those  listed  in  Chapter  XIV. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

ILLUSTRATING  AND   SUPPLEMENTING  A  LESSON 

Outline — Chapter  XVI 

The  force  of  illustrations. — Three  kinds  of  illustration  material: 
1.  maps;  2.  pictures;  3.  incidents.  —  The  force  of  maps  and  map 
drawing. — The  appeal  of  good  pictures. 

Illustrations 
Illustrative  material  for  a  lesson  on  prayer. 

Having  discussed  the  organization  of  a  lesson  together 
with  the  formulation  of  the  aim,  let  us  now  turn  to  the 
problem  of  illustrating  and  supplementing  a  lesson.  In 
organizing  a  subject  for  teaching  we  drive  the  nails  of 
major  thoughts — through  illustration  we  clinch  those  nails 
so  that  they  will  be  less  likely  to  pull  out  of  the  memory. 

The  three  chief  classes  of  illustrative  and  supplementary 
material  are: 

Maps,  pictures,  incidents — actual,  imaginary. 

It  is  clear  that  in  the  lesson  outlined  on  prayer,  in  chapter 
fourteen,  we  should  have  little  occasion  for  the  use  of  a 
map.  We  can,  however,  in  connection  with  that  lesson, 
point  out  the  force  of  pictures  and  incidents. 

Maps  naturally  are  of  greatest  service  in  lessons  with 
historical  and  geographical  background.  The  journeyings 
of  Israel  mean  so  much  more  to  us  when  we  can  follow 
them  from  place  to  place  on  a  good  map.  So  the  Book  of 
Mormon  account  clears  up  if  we  are  similarly  guided. 
Had  we  authentic  maps  of  the  lands  named  in  the  Book 
of  Mormon,  how  much  clearer  and  more  interesting  the  his- 
tory would  become!  We  would  know  the  exact  spot  on  our 


104  Principles  of  Teaching 

present-day  maps  where  Lehi  and  his  family  landed  from 
their  heaven-directed  barges;  we  would  know  where  to  find 
the  land  Bountiful;  where  may  now  be  found  the  ancient 
site  of  the  City  of  Zarahemla;  where  flows  the  River  Sidon; 
what  country  is  indicated  by  the  "land  northward";  the 
journeys  of  the  Nephites  as  they  were  being  driven;  what 
states  saw  there  continued  struggles  against  their  inveterate 
enemies,  the  Lamanites,  and  how  they  reached  their  final 
battle-ground  near  the  Hill  Cumorah.  To  visit  with  Jesus 
in  Palestine  adds  a  charm  to  the  New  Testament  that  is 
really  hard  to  evaluate,  and  surely  the  travels  of  our  own 
pioneers  call  for  the  aid  of  a  good  map.  Thoroughly  to 
appreciate  all  that  they  did  requires  that  we  travel  over 
the  wonderful  trail  they  followed — that  being  impossible, 
the  next  nearest  approach  is  to  see  actually  drawn  out  the 
magnitude  of  their  achievement.  The  appeal  to  the  eye 
couples  so  forcefully  with  the  appeal  to  the  ear  that  no 
classroom  ought  to  be  without  its  maps.  Perhaps  it  is  not 
beyond  possibilities  to  conceive  that  at  a  not  distant  date 
we  shall  have  made  available  films  for  class  use  to  intensify 
the  great  lessons  we  draw  from  history. 

Pictures  make  a  wonderful  appeal,  particularly  so  to 
children.  It  is  impossible  to  measure  the  inspirational  ap- 
peal that  a  single  masterpiece  exerts  on  a  class  of  boys  and 
girls.  A  theological  class  in  one  of  the  Sunday  Schools  of 
Salt  Lake  County  was  once  blessed  with  a  most  magnetic 
and  powerful  teacher.  Upon  his  death,  the  class  had  his 
picture  framed  and  hung  on  the  front  wall  of  the  room  in 
which  he  had  taught.  From  that  day  to  this  the  silent  in- 
spiration of  that  picture  has  stimulated  scores  of  young 
men  and  women  to  the  high  ideals  for  which  he  stood. 


Illustrating  and  Supplementing  a  Lesson       105 

More  generally  applicable  and  more  easily  available,  of 
course,  is  the  Incident.  The  ability  to  tell  a  story  is  one 
of  the  finest  attainments  of  the  teacher — particularly  if  he 
will  take  the  pains  to  find  vigorously  wholesome  and  appro- 
priate ones.  May  we  repeat  the  warning  that  stories  ought 
not  to  be  told  merely  to  fill  out  the  hour,  nor  to  tickle  the 
ears  of  the  class,  but  to  intensify  and  heighten  the  truths 
contained  in  our  lessons. 

Included  under  the  heading  Incident  may  be  listed  short 
poems  and  all  kinds  of  literary  bits  that  fit  in  appropriately 
as  spice  to  a  lesson.  On  the  subject  Prayer,  the  following 
are  some  possibilities: 

Under  question  I,  "What  is  prayer?"  the  hymn,  "Prayer 
Is  the  Soul's  Sincere  Desire." 

Prayer  is  the  soul's  sincere  desire, 

Uttered  or  unexpressed; 
The  motion  of  a  hidden  fire 

That  trembles  in  the  breast. 

Prayer  is  the  burden  of  a  sigh. 

The  falling  of  a  tear, 
The  upward  glancing  of  an  eye, 

When  none  but  God  is  near. 

Prayer  is  the  simplest  form  of  speech 

Tliat  infant  lips  can  try; 
Prayer,  the  subhmest  strains  that  reach 

The  Majesty  on  high. 

Prayer  is  the  Christian's  vital  breath. 

The  Christian's  native  air; 
His  watchword  at  the  gates  of  death; 

He  enters  heav'n  with  prayer. 

Prayer  is  the  contrite  sinner's  vr)ice 

Returning  from  his  ways. 
While  angels  in  their  songs  rejoice, 

And  cry,  "Behold,  he  prays  I" 

The  Saints  in  prayer  appear  as  one 

In  word  and  deed  and  mind. 
While  with  the  Father  and  the  Son 

Their  fellowship  they  find. 


106  PwNciPLES  OF  Teaching 


Nor  prayer  is  made  on  earth  alone, — 

The  Holy  Spirit  pleads. 
And  Jesus,  on  the  Father's  throne. 

For  sinners  intercedes. 

O  thou  by  whom  we  come  to  God, 

The  Life,  the  Truth,  the  Way! 
The  path  of  prayer  Thyself  has  trod; 

Lord,  teach  us  how  to  pray! 

The  two  songs:  "Sweet  Hour  of  Prayer,"  "Did  You  Think 
to  Pray?" 

"For  my  soul  delighteth  in  the  song  of  the  heart,  yea,  the  song  of 
the  righteous  is  a  prayer  unto  me,  and  it  shall  be  answered  with  a 
blessing  upon  their  heads."  (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  25:12.) 

The  following  selection: 

"Prayer — sweet  breath  from  out  a  joyous  heart  wafting  gratitude 
to  Heaven. 

"Prayer — a  sacred  confidence  between  a  fearful  soul  and  God. 

"Prayer —  a  holy  balm  which  soothes  and  heals  the  scars  in  a 
wounded  breast. 

"Prayer — an  angel's  kiss  on  the  longing  lips  of  loneliness. 

"Prayer — a  rod  that  bars  the  way  between  the  human  soul  and  sin. 

"Prayer — a  choking  sob  of  anguish  from  pain-drawn  lips  in  plea 
for  help." 

Under  question  11.    "Why  should  I  pray?" 

"And  that  thou  mayest  more  fully  keep  thyself  unspotted  from  the 
world,  thou  shalt  go  to  the  house  of  prayer  and  offer  up  thy  sacra- 
ments upon  my  holy  day."  (Doc.  &  (IIov.,  Sec.  59:9.) 

"Pray  always  that  you  enter  not  into  temptation,  that  you  may 
abide  the  day  of  his  coming,  whether  in  life  or  in  death.  Even  .so. 
Amen."    (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  61:39.) 

"Remember  that  that  which  cometh  from  above  is  sacred,  and 
must  be  spoken  with  care,  and  by  constraint  of  the  Spirit,  and  in 
this  there  is  no  condemnation,  and  ye  receive  the  Spirit  through 
prayer;  wherefore,  without  this  there  remaineth  condemnation." 
(Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  63:64.) 

"The  keys  of  the  kingdom  of  God  are  committed  unto  man  on 
the  earth,  and  from  thence  shall  the  gospel  roll  forth  unto  the  ends 
of  the  earth,  as  the  stone  which  is  cut  out  of  the  mountain  without 
hands  shall  roll  forth,  until  it  has  filled  the  whole  earth; 


Illustrating  and  Supplementing  a  Lesson       107 


"Yea,  a  voice  crying — Prepare  ye  the  way  of  the  Lord,  prepare  ye 
the  supper  of  the  Lamb,  make  ready  for  the  Bridegroom; 

"Pray  unto  the  Lord,  call  upon  his  holy  name,  make  known  his 
wonderful  works  among  the  people; 

"Call  upon  the  Lord,  that  his  kingdom  may  go  forth  upon  the 
earth,  that  the  inhabitants  thereof  may  receive  it,  and  be  prepared 
for  the  days  to  come,  in  the  which  the  Son  of  man  shall  come  down 
in  heaven,  clothed  in  the  brightness  of  his  glory,  to  meet  the  king- 
dom of  God  which  is  set  up  on  the  earth; 

"Wherefore  may  the  kingdom  of  God  go  forth,  that  the  kingdom 
of  heaven  may  come,  that  thou,  O  God,  mayest  be  glorified  in  heaven 
so  on  earth,  that  thy  enemies  may  be  subdued;  for  thine  is  the 
honor,  power  and  glory,  for  ever  and  ever.  Amen."  (Doc.  &  Gov., 
Sec.  65:2-6.) 

"Watch  and  pray,  that  ye  enter  not  into  temptation:  the  Spirit 
indeed  is  willing,  but  the  flesh  is  weak."    (Matt.  26:42.) 

The  following  incidents  were  related  by  a  member  of 
the  B.  Y.  U.  Course  and  are  typical  of  scores  of  others 
available  for  this  lesson: 

Brother  Hunter's  Account  of  the  Manifestation  of  the  Successor 
to  the  Prophet  Joseph 

"There  was  a  great  deal  of  discussion  among  the  brethren  and  sis- 
ters as  to  who  should  lead  the  Church;  some  thought  it  should  be  the 
Prophet's  son;  some,  one  of  his  counselors,  and  some  the  President 
of  the  Quorum  of  the  Twelve.  I  was  at  a  loss  to  come  to  any  con- 
clusion. It  worried  me  considerably  and  I  prayed  earnestly  that  God 
would  make  known  to  me  who  it  should  be,  but  without  avail. 

"I  went  to  the  meeting  that  had  been  called  and  listened  thought- 
fully to  what  was  said  and  done.  The  longer  I  listened  the  more 
mystified  I  became.  I  bowed  my  head  in  my  hands  and  prayed  for 
God  to  give  me  understanding.  While  I  was  in  this  attitude,  Brother 
Brigham  arose  to  speak,  I  suppose.  I  heard  a  voice — the  Prophet's 
voice  as  natural  and  true  as  I  ever  heard  it.  I  raised  up  quickly, 
fully  expecting  to  see  the  Prophet,  and  I  did.  There  he  stood  and 
there  he  spoke.  I  listened  breathlessly.  The  form  of  the  Prophc. 
gradually  changed  to  that  of  Brother  Brigham,  but  the  voice  was 
not  Brother  Brigham's.  It  was  still  the  Prophet's.  Then  beside 
Brother  Brigham  I  saw  the  Prophet,  who  turned  toward  the  speaker 
and  smiled.  My  heart  beat  rapidly  with  joy  and  I  knew  beyond 
the  shadow  of  a  doubt  that  Brother  Brigham  was  called  of  God  to 
lead  the  Church." 

Brother  Huntsman's  Baby  Healed 

"A  fine,  plump  baby  girl  had  come  to  the  Huntsman  home.  As 
weeks  and  months  passed  and  the  child  failed  to  use  its  lower  limbs. 


108  Principles  of  Teaching 


a  doctor  was  called  and  pronounced  the  trouble  infantile  paralysis. 
He  said  that  it  would  never  walk,  for  experience  had  showed  that 
whenever  this  affliction  affected  the  lower  part  of  the  body  the  med- 
ical profession  could  not  cure  it. 

"The  Huntsman  people  were  faithful  Latter-day  Saints  and  did  not 
give  up  hope,  but  called  in  the  Elders.  After  a  time  conference  was 
held  at  Shelley  and  Elder  David  O.  McKay  and  one  other  of  the 
general  Church  authorities  were  in  attendance — I  don't  remember 
who.  After  the  afternoon  session  the  child  was  administered  to. 
While  sealing  the  anointing,  Brother  McKay  promised  the  child  the 
use  of  its  limbs  and  every  organ  of  the  body. 

"That  night  it  began  to  move  them,  and  the  next  morning  stood 
alone  by  the  aid  of  chairs.  In  a  few  days  it  walked,  although  being 
fairly  Heshy,  Soon  after  I  moved  away  from  Shelley,  but  a  year  or  so 
afterwards  I  had  occasion  to  go  to  Idaho  Falls  and  there  I  met 
Brother  and  Sister  Huntsman.  The  child  was  with  them  and  ran 
and  played  as  other  children." 

A  Psychology  Student  Receives  Aid 

"A  friend  of  mine  who  was  a  student  in  an  eastern  university  told 
the  following  incident  of  how  the  Lord  came  to  his  aid. 

"The  psychology  class  while  studying  the  relationship  of  the  brain 
to  life  and  intelligence  entered  into  a  discussion  as  to  the  nature  of 
intelligence,  and  in  some  way  the  teachings  of  the  Prophet  Joseph 
Smith  were  brought  into  the  discussion  and  jeered  at,  by  all  mem- 
bers except  my  friend,  who  was  a  "Mormon."  His  defense  brought 
forth  ridicule  and  intensified  the  discussion. 

"As  the  class  period  had  expired  without  completing  the  argument, 
a  week  from  that  day  was  the  time  set  to  complete  it.  Of  course, 
my  friend  felt  that  he  should  do  all  possible  to  defend  the  attitude 
of  the  Church,  so  he  studied,  fasted  and  prayed,  to  secure  the  aid 
of  inspiration,  for  he  well  knew  that  nothing  but  scientific  proof 
would  be  accepted. 

"The  day  came  and  he  realized  that  he  was  illy  prepared,  but  still 
hoped  for  divine  assistance.  During  the  giving  of  evidence  to  dis- 
pose of  the  existence  of  intelligence  separate  from  the  workings  of 
the  brain,  and  ridiculing  the  existence  of  a  spirit,  he  prayed  silently 
and  earnestly. 

"His  turn  came  and  he  arose  to  speak.  After  the  opening  sentences 
he  glanced  down  on  the  paper  for  his  evidence  and  found  a  strangf; 
handwriting  there.  He  says  a  peculiar  power  took  possession  of  him. 
He  spoke  rapidly  and  fluently,  he  declared,  without  comprehending 
or  at  least  remembering  what  he  said.  As  he  finished,  his  own 
writing  was  on  the  paper  and  he  knew  not  what  had  been  spoken, 
but  there  was  no  evidence  offered  to  offset  it. 

"The  professor  asked  him  to  give  the  names  of  the  books  from 
which  he  obtained  his  points,  and  on  being  told  that  God  gave  them 
to  him,  he  replied,  'It's  strange,  but  I  can't  believe  such  nonsense.' " 


Illustrating  and  Supplementing  a  Lesson      109 

Under  question  III.   "How  should  I  pray?" 

The  Lord's  Prayer  as  a  pattern. 
The  prayer  in  Gethsemane. 

The  Bee-Keeper's  prayer — 1920,  June  number  of  Young 
Woman's  Journal. 

"And  again,  I  command  thee  that  thou  shalt  pray  vocally  as  well 
as  well  as  in  private."  (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  19:28.) 

"Therefore  I  say  unto  you.  What  things  soever  ye  desire,  when  ye 
pray,  believe  that  ye  receive  them,  and  ye  shall  have  them."  (Mark 
11:24.) 

"At  that  day  ye  shall  ask  in  my  name:  and  I  say  unto  you,  that 
I  will  pray  the  Father  for  you."    (John  16:26.) 

Under  question  IV.    "When  should  I  pray?" 

"He  shall  pray  unto  God,  and  he  will  be  favourable  unto  him: 
and  he  shall  see  his  face  with  joy:  for  he  will  render  unto  man  his 
righteousness."    (Job  33:26.) 

"And  now  concerning  the  residue,  let  them  journey  and  declare 
the  world  among  the  congregations  of  the  wicked,  inasmuch  as  it 
is  given."    (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  61:33.) 

"Draw  near  unto  me  and  I  will  draw  near  unto  you:  seek  me  dili- 
gently and  ye  shall  find  me;  ask  and  ye  shall  receive;  knock  and  it 
shall  be  opened  unto  you; 

"Whatsoever  ye  ask  the  Father  in  my  name  it  shall  be  given  unto 
you,  that  is  expedient  for  you."    (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  88:63-64.) 

"Pray  always  that  you  enter  not  into  temptation,  that  you  may 
abide  the  day  of  his  coming,  whether  in  life  or  in  death."  (Doc.  & 
Gov.,  Sec.  61:39.) 

"Therefore  let  the  Ghurch  take  heed  and  pray  always,  lest  they 
fall  into  temptation."    (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  20:33.) 

"Behold,  I  manifest  unto  you,  Joseph  Knight,  by  these  words,  that 
you  must  take  up  your  cross,  in  the  which  you  must  pray  vocally 
before  the  world  as  well  as  in  secret,  and  in  your  family,  and  among 
your  friends,  and  in  all  places."    (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  23:6.) 

"Yea,  cry  unto  him  for  mercy;  for  he  is  mighty  to  save. 

"Yea,  humble  yourselves,  and  continue  in  prayer  unto  him; 

"Gry  unto  him  when  ye  are  in  your  fields;  yea,  over  all  your  flocks; 

"Gry  unto  him  in  your  houses;  yea,  over  all  your  household,  both 
morning,  mid-day  and  evening; 

"Yea,  cry  unto  him  against  the  power  of  your  enemies; 

"Yea,  cry  unto  him  against  the  devil,  who  is  an  enemy  to  all 
righteousness 


110  Principles  of  Teaching 

"Cry  unto  him  over  the  crops  of  your  fields,  that  ye  may  prosper 
in  them: 

"Cry  over  the  flocks  in  your  fields,  that  they  may  increase. 

"But  this  is  not  all;  ye  must  pour  out  your  sf>uis  in  your  closets, 
and  your  secret  places,  and  in  your  wilderness; 

"Yea,  and  when  you  do  not  cry  unto  the  Lord,  let  your  hearts  be 
full,  drawn  out  in  prayer  unto  him  continually  for  your  welfare, 
and  also  for  the  welfare  of  those  who  are  around  you. 

"And  now  behold,  my  beloved  brethren,  I  say  unto  you,  do  not 
suppose  that  this  is  all;  for  after  ye  have  done  all  these  things,  if 
ye  turn  away  the  needy,  and  the  naked,  and  visit  not  the  sick  and 
afflicted,  and  impart  of  your  substance,  if  ye  have,  to  those  who  stand 
in  need;  I  say  unto  you,  if  ye  do  not  any  of  these  things,  behold, 
your  prayer  is  vain,  and  availeth  you  nothing,  and  ye  are  as  hypo- 
crites who  do  deny  the  faith; 

"Therefore,  if  ye  do  not  remember  to  be  charitable,  ye  are  as 
dross,  which  the  refiners  do  cast  out,  (it  being  of  no  worth),  and  is 
trodden  underfoot  of  men."    (Alma  34:18-29.) 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XVI 

1.  Why  need  we  illustrate  general  truths? 

2.  Discuss  the  value  of  having  pupils  draw  up  their  own  maps. 

3.  Give  out  of  your  own  experience  illustrations  of  the  force  of 
pictures. 

4.  Point  out  the  value  in  teaching  of  appealing  to  more  than  one 
of  the  senses. 

5.  Discuss  the  importance  of  good  stories  in  teaching. 

6.  What  are  the  characteristics  of  a  good  illustrative  story? 

7.  Take  an  ordinarily  commonplace  subject  and  show  how  to 
illustrate  it. 

,  Helpful  References 

Those  listed  in  Chapter  XIV. 

Also  Pictures  in  Religious  Education,  by  Frederica  Beard. 


CHAPTER  XVII 

THE  AIM 

Outline — Chapter  XVII 

Two  illustrations  of  the  value  of  an  aim. — Significance  of  the  aim 
in  religious  training. — Inadequacy  of  eleventh-hour  preparation. — The 
teacher's  obligation  to  see  through  facts  to  truths  that  lie  beyond. 

What  an  aim  is. — Illustration. — How  to  determine  the  aim. — How 
to  express  it. 

The  late  Jacob  Riis,  noted  author  and  lecturer,  used  to 
tell  a  very  inspirational  story  on  the  force  of  having  some- 
thing to  focus  attention  upon.  According  to  his  story,  cer- 
tain men  who  lived  just  outside  of  Chicago,  in  its  early 
history,  had  great  difficulty  walking  to  and  from  work  dur- 
ing stormy  weather,  because  of  the  almost  impassably 
muddy  conditions  of  the  sidewalks.  After  trudging  through 
mud  and  slush  for  a  long  time,  they  conceived  the  idea  of 
laying  a  plank  walk  through  the  worst  sections.  And  so 
they  laid  two  six- inch  planks  side  by  side.  The  scheme 
helped  wonderfully,  except  on  short  winter  days  when  the 
men  had  to  go  to  work  in  the  darkness  of  early  morning 
and  return  in  the  darkness  of  evening.  It  often  was  so  dark 
that  they  would  step  off  the  planks,  and  once  off  they  were 
about  as  muddy  as  if  there  had  been  no  walk  at  all.  Finally 
someone  suggested  the  idea  that  if  a  lantern  were  hung  up 
at  each  end  of  the  walk  it  would  then  be  easy  to  fix  the 
eye  upon  the  lantern  and  keep  on  the  walk.  The  suggestion 
was  acted  upon,  and  thereafter  the  light  of  the  lantern  did 
hold  them  to  the  plank.  Jacob  Riis  argued  that  the  lantern 
of  an  ideal  held  aloft  would  similarly  hold  young  men  in 
life's  path  of  righteousness. 

A  similar  story  is  told  of  a  farmer  who  experienced  great 
difficulty  in  keeping  a  particular  hen  inside  the  run  which 


112  Principles  of  Teaching 

he  had  built  outside  the  hen  house.  He  had  put  up  a  wire 
fence  high  enough,  as  he  thought,  to  keep  in  the  most  ambi- 
tious chicken.  In  fact,  he  argued  that  no  hen  could  fly 
over  it.  One  hen  persisted  in  getting  out  regularly,  though 
the  farmer  could  never  discover  how  she  did  it.  Finally 
he  decided  to  lay  for  her  (she  laid  for  him  regularly).  To 
his  great  surprise,  he  watched  her  walk  around  the  run 
carefully  surveying  it  as  she  proceeded.  At  length  she 
caught  sight  of  a  beam  running  along  the  top  of  the  wire 
just  above  the  gate.  With  her  eye  fixed  upon  it  she  made 
one  mighty  effort  and  was  over. 

The  moral  of  the  two  stories  is  self-evident.  Both  hens 
and  men  can  "go  over"  if  they  have  something  to  aim  at. 
It  is  so  in  life  generally,  and  what  is  true  of  life  generally 
is  particularly  true  in  the  matter  of  teaching.  The  aim 
is  one  of  the  most  significant  features  in  the  teaching 
process. 

The  teacher  who  knows  where  he  is  going  can  always 
get  followers. 

Important  as  is  the  aim  in  all  educational  endeavor,  it  is 
doubly  so  in  religious  training.  We  teach  religiously  not 
merely  to  build  up  facts  or  make  for  mental  power;  we 
teach  to  mold  character.  We  should  see  through  facts, 
therefore,  to  the  fundamental  truth  lying  behind  and  be- 
yond them.  Such  a  truth  constitutes  an  aim  in  religious 
instruction. 

One  of  the  most  regrettable  facts  connected  with  some 
of  our  teaching  is  that  teachers  leave  the  preparation  of 
their  lessons  until  the  few  minutes  just  preceding  their  reci- 
tation hour.  They  then  hurry  through  a  mass  of  facts, 
rush  into  class  and  mull  over  these  dry  husks,  unable  in 
the  rush  even  to  see  the  kernel  of  truth  lying  within.  Little 
wonder  pupils  tire  of  such  rations.  It  is  the  teacher's  obli- 


The  Aim  113 

gation  to  "see  through"  and  discover  the  gems  that  really 
make  lessons  worth  while. 

Forty-five  minutes  once  a  week  is  so  meagre  an  allotment 
of  time  for  the  teaching  of  the  greatest  principles  of  life! 
Surely  every  one  of  those  minutes  should  be  sacredly 
guarded  for  the  consideration  of  vital  truths.  The  aim, 
coupled  with  careful  organization,  is  one  of  the  best  safe- 
guards possible. 

The  aim  is  the  great  focus  for  a  lesson's  thought.  It  is 
the  center  about  which  all  else  revolves.  It  specifies  what 
shall  be  included  and  what  excluded  out  of  the  great  mass 
of  available  material.  A  single  chapter  of  scripture  may 
contain  truths  enough  for  a  dozen  lessons,  only  one  of 
which  can  be  treated  in  any  one  recitation.  The  aim  singles 
out  what  can  be  appropriately  grouped  under  one  unified 
discussion. 

If  we  turn,  for  instance,  to  the  ninth  chapter  of  Matthew, 
we  find  at  least  eight  different  major  incidents,  each  one 
deserving  a  lesson  in  itself.    There  is  the  case  of: 

The  palsy. 

The  charge  of  blasphemy. 

The  glorifying  of  God  by  the  multitude. 

The  calling  of  Matthew. 

The  statement  that  only  the  sick  need  the  physician. 

The  case  of  new  cloth  and  the  old  garment. 

The  raising  of  the  daughter  of  Jairus. 

The  healing  of  the  two  blind  men. 

It  is  perfectly  clear  that  all  of  these  incidents  could  not 
be  adequately  considered  in  any  one  lesson.  Assuming 
that  the  teacher  is  free  to  handle  this  ninth  chapter  as  he 
pleases,  we  are  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  knowing  his 
class,  as  he  does,  he  must  choose  that  incident  or  that  com- 


114  Principles  of  Teaching 

bination  of  incidents  which  will  mean  most  in  the  lives  of 
his  pupils.  In  other  words,  he  centers  his  attention  upon 
one  major  central  truth — his  aim.  By  so  doing  he  guards 
against  wandering  and  inadequacy  of  treatment  and  makes 
for  the  unified  presentation  of  one  forceful  thought. 

It  ought  to  be  pointed  out  here  that  every  teacher  must 
be  the  judge  as  to  what  constitutes  for  him  the  best  aim. 
It  is  quite  clear  that  any  one  teacher  could  find  in  this  ninth 
chapter  of  Matthew  at  least  four  or  five  worthy  aims.  Three 
different  teachers  could  possibly  find  as  many  more,  each 
equally  worthy  of  development.  All  other  things  being 
equal,  that  aim  is  best  which  most  completely  and  force- 
fully covers  the  chapter  or  passage  in  question.  To  illus- 
trate: Suppose  we  are  asked  to  teach  a  lesson  on  the 
Prodigal  Son.  One  aim  that  could  be  chosen  clearly  is 
that  of  jealousy  on  the  part  of  the  prodigal's  brother.  A 
second  one  might  be  repentance,  as  typified  in  the  action 
of  the  prodigal.  Still  a  third  might  be  the  compassion  and 
forgiveness  of  the  father,  as  typical  of  those  same  qualities 
in  our  heavenly  Father.  Which,  to  you,  is  the  most  force- 
ful and  significant?  That  one  to  you  is  your  best  aim. 

The  wording  of  the  aim  is  a  matter  that  gives  rise  to  a 
good  bit  of  disagreement.  There  are  those  who  maintain 
that  if  the  aim  announces  the  subject  as  a  sort  of  heading 
that  is  sufficient.  Others  contend  that  the  aim  should  crys- 
tallize into  axiomatic  form  the  thought  of  the  lesson.  Of 
course,  the  real  force  of  the  aim  lies  in  its  serving  as  the 
focus  of  thought.  The  wording  of  it  is  of  secondary  im- 
portance. And  yet  it  is  very  excellent  practice  to  reduce 
to  formal  statement  the  truth  to  be  presented.  It  is  helpful 
to  adopt  the  ruling  that  the  aim  should  express  both  a  cause 
and  a  result.  Perhaps  an  illustration  would  indicate  the 
difference  between  the  aim  stated  as  a  mere  heading,  and 


The  Aim  115 

stated  fully  and  formally.   Take  the  case  of  the  daughter 
of  Jairus  already  referred  to, 

Mere  Headings: 

Daughter  of  Jairus  restored,  or 
The  power  of  faith. 

Formal  Aim: 

Implicit  faith  in  God  wins  His  choicest 
blessings. 

Surely  the  latter  is  a  more  significant  expression  and 
offers  better  training  to  the  teacher  than  the  setting  down 
of  mere  headings. 

The  ability  thus  to  crystallize  out  of  a  great  variety  of 
facts  a  single  focusing  statement,  coupled  with  the  ability 
then  to  build  about  that  statement  a  clearly  organized  am- 
plification, is  the  sign  of  a  real  teacher.  Instead  of  gen- 
eralizing further,  let  us  turn  to  the  questions  on  this  lesson 
where  some  laboratory  exercises  are  set  down  calling  for 
actual  practice  in  the  selection  and  justification  of  a  num- 
ber of  aims. 


Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XVII 

1.  What  is  an  aim? 

2.  Why   is  it   particularly  essential   to  good   religious  teaching? 

3.  What  are  the  objections  to  "eleventh-hour"  preparation? 

4.  To  what  extent  is  a  teacher  handicapped  in  deciding  upon 
an  aim  for  another  teacher  to  follow? 

5.  Turn  to  the  following  references  and  determine  what  possible 
aims  might  be  developed  under  each.  Is  any  aim  adequate  for  the 
whole  reference?  In  each  case  which  do  you  consider  your  best 
aim?  Why?  How  much  of  the  reference  would  you  include  in  a 
single  lesson? 

John,  Chapter  I;  Isaiah,  Chapter  II;  III  Nephi,  Chapter  X;  Doc- 
trine &  Covenants,  Section  87. 

Helpful  References 

Colgrove,  The  Teacher  and  the  School;  Betts,  How  to  Teach 
Religion;  Driggs,  The  Art  of  Teaching;  Strayer  and  Norsworihy, 
How  to  Teach 


CHAPTER  XVIII 

APPLICATION 

Outline — Chapter  XVIII 

The  question  of  application. — The  matter  a  complex  one. — Various 
conceptions  of  the  term  as  it  affects  the  intellect,  the  emotions,  or 
the  will. — Application  may  be  immediate  or  delayed. — How  to  make 
the  application. — Illustrations. — Making  the  application  and  moraliz- 
ing.— Utah  moral  codes  as  objectives  behind  our  teaching. 

Application  is  one  of  the  most  important  subjects  in  the 
whole  range  of  religious  education.  It  is  also  one  concern- 
ing which  there  are  greater  varieties  of  opinions  than  con- 
cerning almost  any  other  subject. 

What  is  application? 

How  is  it  made? 

Is  it  inherent  in  the  lesson,  or  is  it  added  as  a  sort  of 
supplement  to  the  lesson? 

When  is  it  best  made? 

Does  it  always  involve  action? 

These  questions  are  only  typical  of  the  uncertainty  that 
exists  relative  to  this  term. 

Application  really  goes  to  the  very  heart  of  all  teaching. 
Colloquially  expressed,  it  raises  the  question  in  teaching, 
"What's  the  use?"  Why  should  certain  subject  matter  be 
presented  to  a  class?  How  are  class  members  better  for 
having  considered  particular  facts?  In  short,  application 
involves  the  question,  "What  is  the  carry-over  value  of  the 
lesson?" 

It  is  impossible  to  dispose  adequately  of  the  matter  of 
application  in  a  single  statement.  It  fairly  epitomizes  the 
whole  process  of  teaching  and  therefore  is  so  comprehen- 
sive that  it  calls  for  analysis.  The  ultimate  purpose  behind 


Application  117 

teaching,  of  course,  as  behind  all  life,  is  salvation.  But 
salvation  is  not  had  in  a  day.  It  is  not  the  result  of  a 
single  act,  nor  does  it  grow  out  of  particular  thoughts  and 
aspirations.  Salvation  is  achieved  as  a  sum  total  of  all  that 
we  think,  say,  do,  and  are.  Any  lesson,  therefore,  that 
makes  pupils  better  in  thought,  word,  deed,  or  being,  has 
had  to  that  extent  its  application. 

Application  of  a  lesson  involves,  then,  the  making  sure, 
on  the  part  of  the  teacher,  that  the  truths  taught  carry  over 
into  the  life  of  the  pupil  and  modify  it  for  good.  Someone 
has  said  that  the  application  has  been  made  when  a  pupil 

"Knows  more. 
Feels  better. 
Acts  more  nobly," 

as  a  result  of  the  teaching  done.  There  is  a  prevalent  con- 
ception that  application  has  been  made  in  a  recitation  only 
when  pupils  go  out  from  a  recitation  and  translate  the  prin- 
ciple studied  into  immediate  action.  There  are  lessons 
where  such  applications  can  be  made  and,  of  course,  they 
are  to  be  commended.  Particularly  are  they  valuable  in 
the  case  of  young  children.  But  surely  there  are  other 
justifiable  interpretations  to  the  term  application. 

We  need  to  remind  ourselves  that  there  are  three  distinct 
types  of  subject  matter  that  constitute  the  body  of  our  teach- 
ing material.  These  are,  first  of  all,  those  lessons  which 
are  almost  wholly  intellectual.  Debates  are  conducted  by 
the  hundreds  on  subjects  that  lead  not  to  action  but  to 
clearer  judgment.  Classes  study  subjects  by  the  month  for 
the  purpose  of  satisfying  intellectual  hunger.  Such  ques- 
tions, for  instance,  as  "Succession  in  the  Presidency,"  or 
the  "Nature  of  the  Godhead" — questions  gone  into  by  thor- 


118  Principles  of  Teaching 

oughly  converted  Latter-day  Saints,  not  to  bring  themselves 
into  the  Church,  nor  to  lead  themselves  into  any  other  kind 
of  action  except  the  satisfying  of  their  own  souls  as  to  the 
truth.  In  other  words,  it  appears  clear  that  there  may  be 
application  on  a  purely  intellectual  level.  Application 
upon  application  is  made  until  a  person  builds  up  a  struc- 
ture of  faith  that  stands  upon  the  rock  in  the  face  of  all 
difficulties. 

A  second  type  of  lessons  appeals  to  the  emotions.  They 
aim  to  make  pupils  feel  better.  They  may  or  may  not  lead 
to  immediate  action.  Ideally,  of  course,  every  worthy  emo- 
tion aroused  should  find,  if  possible,  suitable  channels  for 
expression.  Pent  up  emotions  may  become  positively 
harmful.  The  younger  the  pupils  the  more  especially  is 
this  true.  Practically  every  educator  recognizes  this  fact 
and  gives  expression  to  it  in  language  similar  to  the  follow- 
ing quotation  from  Professor  S.  H.  Clark: 

"Never  awaken  an  emotion  unless,  at  the  same  time,  you  strive 
to  open  a  channel  through  vi^hich  the  emotion  may  pass  into  the 
realm  of  elevated  action.  If  we  are  studying  the  ideals  of  literature, 
religion,  etc.,  with  our  class,  we  have  failed  in  the  highest  duty  of 
teaching  if  we  have  not  given  them  the  ideal,  if  we  have  not  given 
them,  by  means  of  some  suggestion,  the  opportunity  for  realizing 
the  ideal.  If  there  is  an  emotion  excited  in  our  pupils  through  a 
talk  on  ethics  or  sociology,  it  matters  not,  we  fail  in  our  duty,  if 
we  do  not  take  an  occasion  at  once  to  guide  that  emotion  so  that 
it  may  express  itself  in  elevated  action." 

And  yet  there  is  a  question  whether  this  insistence  upon 
action  may  not  be  exaggerated.  Abraham  Lincoln  wit- 
nessed an  auction  sale  of  slaves  in  his  younger  days.  He 
did  not  go  out  immediately  and  issue  an  emancipation 
proclamation,  and  yet  there  are  few  who  can  doubt  that 
that  auction  sale  registered  an  application  in  an  ideal  that 
persisted  in  the  mind  of  Lincoln  through  all  those  years 
preceding  our  great  civil  war. 


Application  119 

Many  a  man  has  been  saved  in  the  hour  of  temptation, 
in  his  later  life,  by  the  vividness  of  the  recollection  of 
sacred  truths  taught  at  his  mother's  knee.  There  may  be 
just  a  little  danger  of  cheapening  the  process  of  application 
if  it  is  insisted  that  for  every  ideal  impressed  upon  the 
minds  of  pupils  there  must  be  a  corresponding  immediate 
response  in  daily  actions  of  the  pupils  taught.  May  not  a 
wonderful  impression  become  the  more  v^^onderful  as  it  is 
hallowed  by  the  pondering  of  the  mind  through  the  matur- 
ing years  of  childhood  and  young  manhood? 

Finally  there  is  the  lesson  which,  though  it  involves  both 
the  intellect  and  the  emotions,  appeals  primarily  to  the  will 
and  calls  for  action.  There  can  be  no  question  but  that 
this  is  the  type  of  lesson  of  greatest  significance  in  religious 
education.  We  meet  our  pupils  so  infrequently,  at  best, 
that  at  most  we  can  do  but  a  fraction  of  what  we  should 
like  to  do  to  modify  their  lives.  Our  concern  is  to  change 
for  the  better  their  attitude  and  conduct,  and  therefore  we 
must  address  ourselves  to  the  problems  they  face  in  the 
every- day  life  which  they  are  to  live  between  recitations. 
As  Betts  in  his  How  to  Teach  Religion  so  well  says: 

"In  the  last  analysis  the  child  does  not  come  to  us  that  he  may 
learn  this  or  that  set  of  facts,  nor  that  he  may  develop  such  and 
such  a  group  of  feelings,  but  that  through  these  he  may  live  better. 
The  final  test  of  our  teaching,  therefore,  is  just  like  this:  Because 
of  our  instruction,  does  the  child  live  differently  here  and  now, 
as  a  child,  in  all  his  multiform  relations  in  the  home,  the  school, 
the  church,  the  community,  and  in  his  own  personal  life?  Are  the 
lessons  we  teach  translated  continuously  into  better  conduct,  finer 
acts,  and  stronger  character,  as  shown  in  the  daily  run  of  the  learner's 
experience? 

"It  is  true  that  the  full  fruits  of  our  teaching  and  of  the  child's 
learning  must  wait  for  tim.e  and  experience  to  bring  the  individual 
to  fuller  development.  But  it  is  also  true  that  it  is  impossible  for 
the  child  to  lay  up  a  store  of  unused  knowledge  and  have  it  remain 
against  a  later  time  of  need  in  a  distant  future.  The  only  knowledge 
that  forms  a  vital  part  of  our  equipment  is  knowledge  that  is  in 
active  service,  guiding  our  thoughts  and  decisions  from  day  to  day. 


120  Principles  of  Teaching 

Unused  knowledge  quickly  vanishes  away,  leaving  little  more  perma- 
nent impression  on  the  life  than  that  left  on  the  wave  when  we  plunge 
our  hand  into  the  water  and  take  it  out  again.  In  similar  way  the 
interests,  ideals,  and  emotions  which  are  aroused,  without  at  the  same 
time  affording  a  natural  outlet  for  expression  in  deeds  and  conduct, 
soon  fade  away  without  having  fulfilled  the  purpose  for  which  they 
exist.  The  great  thing  in  religious  education  is  to  find  immediate 
and  natural  outlet  in  expression,  a  way  for  the  child  to  use  what 
he  learns;  to  get  the  child  to  do  those  things  pointed  out  by  the 
lessons  we  teach  him." 

As  the  teacher  faces  this  "carry-over"  problem  he  is 
impressed  that  he  must  touch  the  lives  of  his  pupils  not 
only  as  individuals  but  as  members  of  a  social  group.  It 
becomes  his  obligation  not  only  to  direct  them  in  matters 
pertaining  to  their  ov^n  v^elfare,  physically,  intellectually, 
and  morally,  but  he  has  a  responsibility  in  helping  to  estab- 
lish the  standards  of  society  to  v^hich  individuals  naturally 
subscribe  more  or  less  unconsciously. 

The  strong  teacher's  influence  can  be  made  to  affect  the 
ideals  of  the  athletic  field,  of  the  amusement  hall,  of  the 
church,  of  the  business  center,  and  of  the  home.  These 
agencies  offer  such  a  variety  of  possibilities  that  every  lesson 
offers  easily  some  avenue  of  application.  By  v^ay  of  illus- 
tration let  us  turn  to  a  few  subjects  and  point  out  some 
possibilities  in  the  matter  of  application.  May  it  be  said 
here,  in  passing,  that  the  secret  of  making  application  lies 
in  not  getting  lost  in  the  past  so  that  we  may  walk  along 
with  our  heads  turned  back  over  the  shoulder  of  time  pon- 
dering merely  the  things  of  the  past.  All  too  often  the 
teacher  hurries  over  into  the  Holy  Land  of  some  four  thou- 
sand years  ago,  leaving  a  class  of  twentieth  century  boys 
and  girls  here  at  home  to  wonder  what  all  that  ancient 
material  has  to  do  with  the  problems  that  confront  them 
here  and  now.  Not  that  we  should  ignore  the  past.  Suc- 
cessful application  lies  in  reaching  back  into  the  past  for 
a  solution  of  today's  difficulties.    But  the  solution  is  our 


Application  121 

great  concern.   "We  look  back  that  we  may  the  better  go 
forward." 

To  illustrate: 

A  lesson  on  Cain  and  Abel  may  find  its  application  in  a 
solution  of  the  problems  of  the  jealousy  and  selfishness 
that  exist  today.  This  story  ought  not  to  be  merely  a  re- 
counting of  murder.  There  is  a  little  Cain — a  little  Abel — 
in  all  of  us.  Consider  the  case  of  the  boy  who  smashed 
up  his  brother's  new  sled  as  well  as  his  own,  because  he 
couldn't  keep  up  in  coasting.  The  nature  of  the  class  will 
determine  the  particular  application.  Or  consider  the  story 
of  Samson  and  Delilah:  at  first  thought,  a  story  with  but 
little  to  contribute  to  a  solution  of  today's  problems.  Yet 
out  of  that  story  application  can  be  made  beautifully, 
through  either  of  these  two  truths: 

He  who  plays  with  sin  will  eventually  be  conquered  by 
it;  or, 

Marrying  outside  one's  church  is  attended  by  grave 
dangers. 

A  lesson  on  helpfulness  was  once  beautifully  and  rather 
dramatically  given  through  the  story  of  a  rescue  of  a  train. 
A  lad  was  out  at  play  on  a  railroad  track  when  he  discov- 
ered that  a  recent  storm  had  washed  out  part  of  the  road 
bed.  He  remembered  that  the  through  passenger  train  was 
due  in  a  few  minutes,  and  so  rushed  along  the  track  and 
by  frantically  waving  his  hat  succeeded  in  stopping  the 
train  just  in  time  to  prevent  a  terrible  catastrophe.  A  few 
well-directed  questions  called  for  the  pupils'  own  idea  of 
application.  They,  too,  would  flag  a  train  if  such  an  occa- 
sion should  arise.  They  could  help  people  generally  to 
guard  against  danger.  They  even  carried  the  idea  over  into 


122  Principles  of  Teaching 

rendering  any  kind  of  service,  about  the  home,  at  school, 
and  elsewhere,  as  long  as  it  was  helpful. 

And  so  illustrations  could  be  multiplied.  The  important 
thing  is  that,  having  decided  upon  a  central  truth  for  a 
lesson,  the  teacher  then  conceives  avenues  whereby  the 
truth  may  be  carried  over  through  action  into  the  lives  of 
pupils.  And,  of  course,  he  must  see  that  they  are  directed 
in  setting  about  the  action. 

The  question  often  arises,  "Isn't  there  danger  of  moral- 
izing in  making  an  application?"  or  "What  is  the  differ- 
ence between  an  application  and  moralizing?"  Genuine  and 
natural  application  ought  to  be  inherent  in  the  material 
presented.  A  good  story  ought  to  drive  home  its  message 
without  further  comment.  Moralizing  consists  of  "tacking 
on"  some  generalized  exhortation  relative  to  conduct. 
Moralizing  is  either  an  unnecessary  and  unwelcome  injunc- 
tion to  be  or  to  do  good,  or  it  is  an  apology  for  a  lesson  that 
in  and  of  itself  drives  home  no  message.  The  school  boy's 
definition  of  moralizing  is  helpful  and  suggestive: 

"Moralizing  is  rubbing  goodness  in  unnecessarily." 

In  making  application  of  truths  presented,  teachers  nat- 
urally face  the  question  as  to  what  constitutes  the  funda- 
mentals in  character  development  that  are  to  be  achieved. 
As  a  sort  of  guide,  the  two  Utah  codes  of  morals,  one  for 
children  and  one  for  youths,  are  rich  in  suggestion,  both  for 
pupil  and  teacher.  They  are  submitted  herewith  as  help- 
ful in  setting  up  the  objectives  toward  which  we  are 
working: 

Children's  Code 

I  want  to  grow  up  to  be  wise  and  strong,  happy  and  able  to  make 

others  happy,  to  love  and  to  be  loved,  and  to  do  my  part  in  the 
world's  work. 


Application  123 


During  my  infancy  loving  hands  cared  for  me,  gave  me  food, 
clothing  and  shelter,  and  protected  me  from  harm.  I  am  grateful 
for  this  care,  and  I  want  to  be  worthy  of  the  love  and  confidence 
of  my  mother  and  father  and  to  do  all  I  can  to  make  them  happy, 

I  will  be  obedient  to  my  parents  and  teachers;  they  are  wiser  than 
I  and  thoughtful  of  my  welfare. 

I  have  already  learned  that  good  health  is  necessary  to  strength 
and  happiness,  and  that  in  order  to  be  well  and  to  grow  strong,  I 
must  have  good,  wholesome  food,  ample  exercise  and  sleep,  and 
abundant  pure  water  and  fresh  air — nature's  free  gifts  to  all. 

My  whole  body  I  will  keep  clean  and  each  part  of  it  as  sound  as 
good  care  can  make  it. 

I  will  have  respect  for  all  useful  work,  both  mental  and  physical. 
I  must  learn  to  be  helpful  that  I  may  know  the  joy  of  service  and 
the  dignity  of  work  well  done. 

I  will  begin  now  to  earn  some  of  the  things  I  use.  I  must  learn 
how  to  spend,  and  how  to  be  generous. 

Waste  is  the  mother  of  want,  and  even  though  the  want  may  not 
be  mine,  if  I  am  extravagant  I  am  likely  to  bring  suffering  to  others. 
Waste  of  time  is  as  wrong  as  waste  of  things;  I  will  not  be  an  idler. 

I  will  not  put  unnecessary  burdens  upon  my  associates  by  untidy, 
careless  habits;  orderly  ways  save  my  own  time  and  things  as  well 
as  those  of  others. 

I  will  take  thought  for  the  comfort  and  welfare  of  our  animal 
friends  and  will  always  avoid  cruelty. 

I  will  strive  for  courage  to  speak  the  truth  and  for  strength  to  be 
fair  in  all  my  work  and  play,  to  be  true  to  my  word  and  faithful  to 
my  trust.  I  hate  lying  and  cheating;  they  are  signs  of  cowardice 
and  greed.  I  will  not  seek  pleasure  or  profit  at  the  cost  of  my  self- 
respect.  I  will  be  considerate  of  the  rights  and  feeling  of  others 
as  I  would  have  them  respect  mine. 

I  will  try  to  control  my  temper  and  to  be  cheerful,  kind,  and 
courteous  in  all  my  dealings. 

I  will  strive  to  be  pure  in  thought,  speech  and  action. 

My  country  has  provided  laws  and  civil  officers  to  protect  me, 
schools  for  my  instruction,  and  many  other  aids  to  a  happy,  useful 
life.  I  am  grateful  for  these  benefits  and  will  show  my  patriotism 
by  obeying  the  laws  and  defending  my  country  against  evils,  both 
within  and  without. 

I  will  keep  my  eyes  and  ears  open  to  enjoy  the  world  about  me, 
and  my  mind  alert  to  understand  and  appreciate  the  good  things 
mankind  has  provided  for  me — science  and  art,  poetry  and  music, 
history  and  story. 

May  God,  the  kind  and  loving  Father,  help  me  all  my  life  to  see 
the  right  way  and  to  follow  it. 

Moral  Code  for  Youths 

I  am  happy  to  be  a  member  of  that  great  human  society  which 
has  accumulated  all  the  treasures  of  civilization.    I  have  benefited 


24  Principles  of  Teaching 


by  the  united  labors  of  all  mankind;  for  this  I  owe  a  debt  of  grati- 
tude to  humanity,  a  debt  I  can  pay  only  by  serving  that  humanity 
to  the  fullest  extent  of  my  ability.  Through  small  services  freely 
given  toward  the  comfort  and  happiness  of  my  associates,  I  may  grow 
in  power  of  usefulness  and  in  my  turn  contribute  to  the  welfare  of 
the  generations  that  are  to  come. 

My  body  is  the  instrument  of  my  mind  and  the  foundation  of 
my  character.  Every  organ  must  be  conserved  to  perform  its  proper 
function  in  the  development  and  perfection  of  my  life.  I  will,  there- 
fore, eat  only  wholesome  food,  breathe  pure  air,  take  ample  exercise 
and  sleep,  and  keep  my  body  clean  and  sound.  To  this  end,  I  will 
refrain  from  the  use  of  intoxicating  drinks,  narcotics  and  stimulants; 
these  lend  only  a  seeming  strength,  but  in  reality  they  undermine 
my  powers  of  service  and  of  lasting  happiness.  By  abstaining  from 
these  indulgences  I  can,  moreover,  help  others  to  abstain,  and  thereby 
increase  their  strength  and  happiness.  By  temperate  living  and 
plenty  of  exercise  in  the  open  I  can  preserve  my  health  and  the  more 
easily  refrain  from  evil  thoughts  and  evil  deeds. 

I  will  not  pollute  my  body  or  that  of  another  by  any  form  of  self- 
indulgence  or  perverse  yielding  to  passion.  Such  indulgence  is  a 
desecration  of  the  fountains  of  life  and  an  insult  to  the  dignity  of 
manhood  and  womanhood. 

Through  the  formation  of  sane,  health-promoting  habits  I  can  avoid 
having  my  usefulness  diminished  and  my  happiness  impaired  by  the 
consequences  of  my  own  folly. 

I  will  be  modest  in  dress  and  maimer,  that  I  may  in  no  wise 
encourage  sensuality. 

I  will  be  thoughtful  of  the  effects  of  my  actions  and  so  restrain 
myself  that  no  act  of  mine  may  mar  the  life  or  detract  from  the 
happiness  of  my  associates  or  of  my  successors. 

I  will  deal  honestly,  fairly  and  kindly  with  my  fellows — always 
mindful  that  their  lives  and  their  happiness  are  as  sacred  to  them 
as  mine  are  to  me. 

I  will  avoid  impatience  and  ill  temper  and  will  endeavor  to  be 
courteous  always. 

I  will  try  to  save  individuals  rather  than  to  condemn  them,  even 
though  their  evil  deeds  must  be  condemned  and  offenders  punished. 

I  will  have  respect  for  the  time  of  my  fellows  as  I  respect  their 
property. 

I  will  not  engage  in  games  of  chance,  since  I  do  not  desire  reward 
at  the  expense  of  others. 

In  all  my  dealings  I  will  strive  for  courage  to  speak  the  truth;  I 
despise  cowardice  and  lying.  I  will  do  what  I  know  to  be  right, 
though  others  may  ridicule  or  scorn  me. 

I  will  be  personally  responsible  for  all  that  I  do,  and,  recognizing 
my  limited  wisdom,  I  will  ever  seek  Divine  Guidance  to  lead  me  in 
the  right  way. 


Application  125 


I  will  strive  for  independence  of  judgment,  but  with  due  regard 
for  the  superior  wisdom  of  my  elders.  I  must  grant  to  my  fellows 
the  same  right  of  independent  judgment  that  I  claim  for  myself. 

Whatever  I  undertake  I  will  do  with  my  might,  and,  win  or  lose, 
accept  the  result  with  good  cheer.  I  would  rather  be  worthy  of  suc- 
cess than  to  secure  it  unworthily. 

I  will  be  prompt  and  orderly  in  all  my  affairs,  otherwise  I  become 
a  hindrance  to  social  efficiency.  I  will  avoid  waste  and  extravagance 
lest  I  bring  needless  privation  and  suffering  to  others  as  well  as  to 
myself. 

It  is  my  privilege  to  have  a  part  in  the  world's  work — a  part  I 
must  choose  and  perform  with  all  diligence.  "What  can  I  do  best 
that  society  needs  most?"  When  I  have  answered  this  question  I 
will  pursue  my  vocation  intelligently  and  energetically;  first,  as  a 
means  of  service  to  my  fellow-men;  and  second,  as  a  means  of  self- 
support  and  aid  to  those  that  may  be  dependent  upon  me. 

May  the  love  and  appreciation  I  have  for  my  country  never 
be  dishonored  by  any  act  of  lawlessness  or  want  of  loyalty,  but  may 
I  ever  honor,  uphold  and  obey  the  law  and  defend  my  countrv^  against 
unrighteousness,  injustice  and  violence.  When  it  becomes  my  privi- 
lege to  vote  I  will  use  the  right  of  suffrage  as  a  patriotic  means  of 
co-operating  with  my  fellow  citizens  for  the  promotion  of  social 
justice,  peace  and  progress.  Should  I  be  called  to  public  office, 
I  will  strive  for  moral  courage  to  exercise  authority  in  accord  with 
justice  and  humanity;  and,  whether  in  or  out  of  office,  I  will  respond 
freely  to  every  opportunity  for  public  service. 

I  am  grateful  for  the  beauties  of  nature  and  for  the  great  works 
of  art,  music,  literature  and  science,  it  is  my  privilege  to  enjoy. 
These  I  will  seek  to  understand  and  appreciate,  that  I  may  cultivate 
broader  siTnpathies  and  fellowship  with  mankind,  the  world,  and  the 
Creator  of  all. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XVIII 

1.  How  does  application  go  to  the  ver^'  heart  of  teaching? 

2.  Discuss  the  various  conceptions  of  the  term. 

3.  Distinguish  between  immediate  and  delayed  application. 

4.  Discuss  the  possibility  of  intellectual  application. 

5.  How  can  applications  best  be  made? 

6.  When  can  applications  best  be  made? 

7.  Distinguish  between  making   an   application  and  moralizing. 

Helpful  References 

Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teachers;  Betts,  How  to  Teach 
Religion;  Brumbaugh,  The  Making  of  a  Teacher;  Betts,  The  Reci- 
tation; Strayer  and  Norsworthy,  How  to  Teach;  Thomdike,  Principles 
of  Teaching;  Colgrove,  The  Teacher  and  the  School. 


CHAPTER  XIX 

METHODS  OF  THE  RECITATION 

Outline — Chapter  XIX 

The  question  of  method  raised. — Danger  of  an  entire  disregard  of 
method. — ^The  case  of  the  "born"  teacher. — Sound  pedagogy  largely 
a  matter  of  common  sense. — Danger  of  being  committed  to  a  single 
method. — The  five  possible  methods:  The  Story  Method;  Reading 
'Round;  The  Special  Topic;  The  Lecture;  The  Discussion. 

Two  of  the  most  practical  questions  that  a  teacher  ever 
has  to  solve  are: 

How  shall  I  go  about  to  prepare  a  lesson? 

Having  prepared  a  lesson,  how  shall  I  set  about  to  teach 
it  to  my  class? 

The  first  of  these  questions  has  already  been  discussed 
in  preceding  chapters;  the  second  now  calls  for  our  con- 
sideration. 

Is  there  a  one  best  method?  If  so,  what  is  it?  What 
steps  does  it  involve?  Instead  of  answering  these  questions 
directly,  perhaps  it  will  be  better  to  point  out  the  various 
methods  of  the  recitation,  set  down  their  characteristics  and 
relative  values,  and  then  formulate  a  conclusion. 

At  the  outset  it  may  be  advisable  to  sound  two  notes  of 
warning.  One  is  against  an  entire  disregard  of  methods. 
There  are  those  persons  who  believe  that  teachers  are  born, 
not  made,  and  that  therefore  a  discussion  of  methods  is 
useless.  The  born  teacher,  say  these  persons,  just  teaches 
naturally  according  to  his  own  personality.  To  change  his 
method  would  be  to  destroy  his  effectiveness.  If  he  isn't 
a  teacher  then  the  study  of  methods  will  not  make  him  one. 
In  either  case  work  done  on  methods  is  lost. 

Of  course,  experience  refutes  both  contentions.  It  is  ad- 
mittedly true  that  great  teachers  are  born  to  their  work — 


Methods  of  the  Recitation  127 

that  some  individuals  just  naturally  impress  others  and 
stimulate  them  to  high  ideals.  And  yet  there  is  no  one  so 
gifted  that  he  cannot  improve  through  a  study  of  the  game 
he  is  to  play.  Most  great  athletes  are  by  nature  athletic. 
And  yet  every  one  of  them  trains  to  perfect  himself.  The 
best  athletes  America  sent  to  the  Olympic  games  were  won- 
derfully capable  men,  but  they  were  wonderfully  trained 
men,  as  well.  They  had  studied  the  methods  of  their  par- 
ticular sports.  Great  singers  are  born  with  great  vocal 
potentialities,  but  the  greatest  singers  become  so  as  the  re- 
sult of  thorough  training.  Methods  elevate  them  to  fame. 
What  is  true  of  the  other  arts  ought  also  to  be  true  of 
teaching. 

As  to  the  class  of  teachers  not  bom  to  the  calling,  it  seems 
perfectly  clear  that  here  is  the  great  opportunity  for  a 
study  of  the  fundamentals  underlying  good  teaching. 
Sound  pedagogy  is  just  a  matter  of  good,  common  sense. 
Any  normal  person  by  studying  how  to  do  anything  ought 
in  the  end  to  come  to  do  that  thing  better  than  if  he  ignored 
it.  I  may  not  know  how  to  operate  an  automobile.  But 
if  I  study  how  to  operate  one,  if  I  observe  those  who  do 
know  how,  and  if  I  practice  operating  one — surely  I  shall 
come  to  be  more  efficient  as  a  chauffeur. 

But  while  many  will  admit  that  this  law  of  development 
applies  in  the  mechanical  world,  they  hold  that  there  is 
something  mystic  about  teaching  for  which  only  a  peda- 
gogical birthright  is  a  solution.  The  fallacy  of  such  a 
contention  seems  too  evident  to  call  for  argument.  At  least 
the  only  sensibly  hopeful  view  to  take  in  such  a  Church  as 
ours,  in  which  so  many  members  must  perforce  be  called 
to  be  teachers,  is  that  power  in  teaching  can  be  developed 
as  it  can  in  any  other  field  of  endeavor. 


128  Principles  of  Teaching 

The  other  bit  of  warning  applies  to  the  kind  of  teacher 
who  is  unalterably  committed  to  a  single  method,  not  only 
as  the  best  method,  but  the  only  one  worth  following. 
Method  depends  so  essentially  on  the  personality  of  the 
teacher,  on  the  nature  of  the  pupils  taught,  and  on  the 
subject  matter  to  be  presented,  that  it  is  a  very  dangerous 
thing  to  say  that,  in  spite  of  circumstances,  one  method  is 
invariably  the  best  method. 

Let  us,  then,  turn  to  the  different  methods  and  consider 
their  relative  values.  Five  possibilities  immediately  suggest 
themselves : 

1.  The  story  method. 

2.  The  "reading  'round"  method. 

3.  The  special  topic  method. 

4.  The  lecture  method. 

5.  The  discussion  method,  built  up  through 
questions  and  answers. 

1.  The  Story  Method.  The  story  is  the  method  for 
childhood.  "All  the  world  loves  a  story."  Children  cer- 
tainly are  a  part  of  that  world.  How  they  thrill  in  response 
to  the  appeal  of  a  good  story.  Their  little  souls  fairly 
seem  to  open  to  receive  it.  What  an  opportunity — what  a 
sacred  trust — is  the  teacher's  as  he  undertakes  to  satisfy 
that  soul  hunger!  The  subject,  the  story,  has  been  so  fully 
gone  into  by  Brother  Driggs  in  his  book.  The  Art  of  Teach- 
ing, that  we  need  not  attempt  to  discuss  it  fully  here.  Then, 
too,  so  many  other  excellent  books  have  been  written  on  the 
art  of  the  story  that  the  teacher  need  only  be  referred  to 
them.  Suffice  it  here  to  make  two  observations  in  passing. 
The  best  stories  for  purposes  of  religious  instruction  should 
possess  four  essential  characteristics: 


Methods  of  the  Recitation  129 

Point — Brevity — Message — Adaptation  to  the  experience 
of  pupils. 

And,  of  course,  this  message  should  be  a  truth  appro- 
priate to  the  occasion — a  message  heightened  by  the  spirit 
of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ. 

The  second  observation  has  to  do  with  the  telling  of  the 
story.  Naturally  it  should  be  well  told.  But  the  story  hour 
should  not  be  one  of  mere  telling.  The  child,  in  addition 
to  listening  to  the  story,  should  be  given  opportunity  to 
express  its  reaction  to  the  story  told — should  be  directed 
in  discovering  the  avenue  through  which  it  will  carry  into 
action  the  emotion  aroused  by  the  story. 

2.  The  ''Reading  'Round''  Method.  The  old  idea  of  a 
class  coming  together  and  sitting  through  a  process  of  read- 
ing in  turn  from  the  one  book  in  the  class  as  it  was  passed 
about  is  largely  a  thing  of  the  past.  Let  us  hope  that  the 
day  when  neither  teacher  nor  pupil  prepared  his  lesson  is 
gone  forever.  Surely  "reading  'round"  is  a  poor  substi- 
tute for  preparation.  And  it  clearly  is  a  dull,  routine 
method  of  procedure.  But  there  was  one  merit  attached 
to  it  that  is  worthy  our  consideration.  It  did  bring  the 
scriptures  into  the  hands  of  our  pupils.  Whatever  method 
we  may  follow,  this  contact  with  the  actual  word  of  the 
Lord  is  a  valuable  asset.  We  cannot  advocate  resorting  to 
the  old  notion  of  "reading  'round"  as  an  apology  for  a 
recitation,  but  we  can  well  point  out  the  merit  of  seeing 
to  it  that  pupils  see  and  read  the  scriptures.  If  the  lesson 
can  be  so  conducted  that  reading  is  indulged  in  as  a  supple- 
mentary laboratory  exercise  —  a  turning  through  of  gems 
that  entice  the  reader  to  make  further  study  of  the  book — 
then  reading  can  be  made  a  very  valuable  factor  in  the 
teaching  process.  Then,  too,  it  is  educational  just  to  have 
members  of  a  class  turn  through  the  scriptures  to  know 


130  Principles  of  Teaching 

what  they  are — what  books  are  involved  and  where  they 
may  be  found.  Ignorance  with  respect  to  the  scriptures 
is  alarmingly  prevalent.  The  following  report  taken  from 
the  New  York  Tribune  relative  to  a  simple  test  in  Bible 
literature,  given  by  an  Eastern  university  to  139  students, 
is  significant: 

"Out  of  139  only  12  reached  75%;  90  received  less  than 
50%;  10  could  not  name  a  single  book  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. Some  who  did  spelled  them  Salms,  Joob,  etc.  Some 
named  Paul,  Babylonians,  and  Gentiles  as  Old  Testament 
books." 

Surely  much  might  be  said  in  favor  of  the  use  of  books 
in  our  classes. 

3.  The  Special  Topic  Method.  Much  can  be  said  both 
for  and  against  the  topic  method.  At  least  three  objections 
to  its  use  can  be  raised: 

A.  It  makes  for  piece-meal  preparation.  The  lesson  is 
partitioned  off  into  segments,  one  of  which  may  be  prepared 
by  a  particular  pupil  who  does  not  concern  himself  at 
all  with  the  rest  of  the  lesson.  This  method,  therefore, 
encourages  fragmentary  and  incomplete  preparation. 

B.  It  makes  for  a  disconnected  presentation  which  makes 
it  quite  impossible  for  pupils  to  get  a  unified  conception 
of  the  whole  lesson.  This  is  doubly  bad,  because  of  the 
fact  that  frequently  those  who  are  assigned  parts  absent 
themselves  from  class. 

C.  It  often  results  in  dull,  commonplace  recitations.  All 
too  frequently,  especially  if  topic  assignments  are  the  usual 
method  of  procedure,  those  pupils  given  the  various  topics 
to  work  up  content  themselves  with  very  meagre  prepara- 
tion. They  come  to  class,  therefore,  and  merely  run  over 
so  many  facts  wholly  without  inspiration  and  often  by  con- 
stant reference  to  notes  or  the  text, 


Methods  of  the  Recitation  131 

Of  course,  these  difficulties  can  be  overcome  largely  by 
the  judicious  use  of  the  topic  method.  It  ought  not  gen- 
erally to  be  followed  as  the  regular  order  of  business,  but 
rather  as  a  supplementary  means  of  enriching  the  lesson. 
It  ought  not  to  be  used  so  as  to  excuse  all  class  members 
from  regular  preparation  of  the  lesson  as  a  whole.  If  the 
teacher  will  assign  the  lesson  proper  to  all  of  the  class  and 
then  select  certain  aspects — certain  suggested  problems — 
for  more  intensive  research,  the  reports  on  special  topics 
can  be  made  to  contribute  wonderfully  to  the  richness  of 
the  class  hour.  The  topic  method,  then,  is  primarily  a 
supplemental  method,  and  if  wisely  used  has  these  advan- 
tages: 

A.  It  makes  for  an  enriched  lesson.  It  makes  possible 
expert  opinion,  and  the  results  of  special,  careful  investiga- 
tion which  the  class  as  a  whole  would  be  unable  to  make. 

B.  It  lends  variety  to  class  procedure  and  guarantees 
that  the  teacher  will  not  do  all  the  talking. 

C.  It  fosters  individual  expression.  It  trains  pupils  to 
formulate  an  attack,  to  organize  findings,  and  to  stand  and 
deliver  a  connected  and  well  thought  out  message. 

D.  It  promotes  a  habit  of  investigation — it  leads  pupils 
to  work  out  for  themselves  the  problems  of  the  Gospel 
which  they  encounter. 

4.  The  Lecture  Method.  The  comment  of  a  student  of 
the  Brigham  Young  University  on  the  lecture  method  was 
unique:  "The  lecture  method  wouldn't  be  so  bad  if  a 
teacher  really  lectured — he  usually  just  talks.  And  talking 
a  lot  when  you  haven't  much  to  say  is  pretty  discouraging 
to  a  class." 

Aimless  talking  which  indulges  in  the  main  in  vague  gen- 
eralities  can  never    be  justified.    Preaching   presumes    a 


132  Principles  of  Teaching 

pulpit  and  has  little  place  in  classwork.  The  teacher  who 
persists  in  talking  most  of  the  time  overvalues  his  own 
thoughts  and  minimizes  the  ideas  of  others.  Much  talking 
stifles  initiative  and  independent  thinking.  Then,  too,  it 
gives  no  opportunity  for  developing  pupils'  power  of  self- 
expression  and  provides  no  means  for  the  teacher  to  check 
the  reaction  going  on  in  the  pupils'  minds — assuming  that 
one  goes  on!  It  is  astonishing  what  erroneous  notions  mem- 
bers of  a  class  can  get  from  merely  hearing  a  lesson  pre- 
sented. Given  a  chance  to  express  their  conclusions,  they 
will  themselves  correct  many  of  their  false  impressions. 

There  are  occasions,  however,  when  a  lecture  is  extremely 
valuable.  Frequently  after  several  weeks  of  discussion  a 
class  is  hungry  to  hear  "the  truth  about  the  matter."  There 
is  then  afforded  a  splendid  opportunity  for  the  teacher  to 
drive  home  a  real  message.  Then,  too,  specialists,  because 
of  their  advanced  study  on  a  particular  subject,  can  often 
present  in  an  hour  the  results  of  years  of  investigation. 

Furthermore,  in  a  lecture,  the  teacher  can  make  an  emo- 
tional appeal  which  is  practically  out  of  the  question  in 
other  methods.  His  enthusiasm  and  conviction  can  be  made 
to  "carry"  his  pupils  to  the  contemplation  of  new  truths. 
Used  with  discretion,  the  real  lecture  is  a  valuable  asset  in 
teaching;  indulged  in  regularly  as  mere  talking  or  preach- 
ing, the  method  ought  certainly  to  be  discouraged. 

5.  The  Discussion  Method.  This  method,  built  upon 
questions  and  their  answers,  is  commendable  for  its  democ- 
racy and  because  of  the  fact  that  it  stimulates  both  thought 
and  discussion  on  the  part  of  most  if  not  all  of  the  pupils. 
Questions  are  so  vital  to  good  teaching  that  Chapter  XXI 
will  be  devoted  to  their  consideration.  Suffice  it  to  say 
here  that  for  all  practical  purposes  it  is  the  basis  of  the 
best  teaching.  Discussions  make  it  possible  to  reach  pupils 


Methods  of  the  Recitation  133 

"Where  they  are" — make  it  possible  for  everyone  to  con- 
tribute of  his  experience  to  everyone  else. 

The  one  outstanding  difficulty  with  the  discussion  method 
lies  in  the  fact  that  it  calls  for  such  skilful  direction.  It 
so  easily  runs  off  on  tangents  that  the  teacher  is  kept  on 
his  mettle  holding  to  the  subject  in  hand. 

After  all,  each  method  has  its  advantages  and  its  disad- 
vantages. There  are  times  when  any  one  of  them  can  be 
profitably  used;  it  is  clear  that  any  one  of  them  can  be 
abused — can  be  made  more  or  less  monotonous.  Perhaps 
we  can  wisely  conclude  that,  ''The  best  method  is  a  variety 
of  methods.'* 

Questions  and  Suggestegns — Chapter  XIX 

1.  Why  is  it  essential  that  teachers  study  methods  of  the  reci- 
tation? 

2.  What  method  do  you  regularly  follow?   Why? 

3.  To  what  extent  is  it  that  a  bom  teacher  teaches  without 
method? 

4.  What  is  pedagogy? 

5.  Discuss  the  relative  value  of  each  of  the  five  methods  listed 
in  this  chapter. 

6.  Discuss  the  statement,  "The  best  method  is  a  variety  of 
methods. 

Helpful  References 

Betts,  How  to  Teach  Religion;  Betts,  The  Recitation;  Earhart, 
Types  of  Teaching;  Bagley,  Classroom  Management;  Strayer  and 
Norsworthy,  How  to  Teach. 


CHAPTER  XX 

REVIEW  AND  PREVIEW 

Outline — Chapter  XX 

The  need  of  review  in  our  Church  teaching. — Review  a  real  help 
to  learning  in  that  it  makes  for:  repetition,  proper  connection,  proper 
evaluation  of  truth. 

An  intelligent  review  is  the  result  only  of  thorough  preparation  on 
the  part  of  the  teacher. — Assignment  and  preparation. — Ability  to 
make  assignments  a  test  of  good  teaching. 

Characteristics  of  a  good  assigrmient:  It  is  definite. — It  raises  a 
problem. — It  connects  with  the  experience  of  pupils. — It  stimulates 
to  action. 

General  and  specific  assignments. — When  to  make  assignments. 

Each  organization  within  the  Church  follows  regularly 
its  own  course  of  study.  At  the  beginning  of  the  year  it 
sets  out  upon  a  prescribed  subject  subdivided  according  to 
the  number  of  meetings  scheduled  for  the  year's  work.  As 
a  result,  no  one  lesson  stands  out  independent  of  all  others, 
but  rather  fits  in  naturally  in  a  sequence  of  chapters  each 
of  which  develops  some  aspects  of  one  big  subject.  Be- 
cause of  such  a  plan  the  matters  of  review  and  preview  take 
on  vital  significance.  Each  lesson  should  be  made  to  link 
up  naturally  with  what  has  already  been  presented  and 
should  point  out  by  way  of  anticipation  what  is  to  follow. 
Many  educators  maintain  that  the  ability  to  conduct  a  good 
review  and  to  make  an  effective  assignment  are  two  of  the 
surest  tests  of  a  good  teacher. 

The  problem  of  review  is  really  one  of  the  most  funda- 
mental processes  in  education.  It  is  the  great  key  to  learn- 
ing. Anyone  who  has  enjoyed  the  fun  of  teaching  young 
children  how  to  read  has  been  impressed  with  the  fact  that 
the  child  has  to  be  led  to  see  and  repeat  the  simplest  words 
over  and  over  again  before  they  are  really  mastered.  It  is 
really  astonishing  how  many  times  as  simple  a  word  as 


Review  and  Preview  135 

"ran"  has  to  be  repeated  before  the  beginner  in  reading 
gets  it  fully  into  his  consciousness.  This  very  difficulty  of 
teaching  mere  words  or  letters  has  led  to  the  abandonment 
of  the  old  "A-B-C"  drill  as  the  first  step  in  reading,  and 
the  substitution  for  it  of  an  indirect  method  wherein, 
through  the  laws  of  association,  groups  of  words  and  sen- 
tences are  mastered  as  the  symbols  which  express  concrete 
and  objectified  ideas.  But  by  way  of  experiment,  one  of 
the  most  impressive  experiences  open  to  teachers  is  to  take 
a  child  of  four  or  five  that  has  not  been  taught  to  read  and 
attempt  to  drill  into  its  consciousness  a  group  of  half  a 
dozen  words  as  simple  as  these:  cat,  fan,  hat,  get,  man,  jam. 
To  the  teacher  who  has  attempted  such  an  experiment  no 
argument  is  necessary  to  prove  the  significance  of  review 
and  repetition. 

Review,  then,  first  of  all,  is  vitally  essential  because  it 
makes  possible  impression  through  repetition  which  insures 
the  fixing  of  ideas.  Literally,  review  means  to  view  again. 
Psychologically  it  is  to  repeat  the  processes  of  mind  which 
were  called  into  operation  the  first  time  the  stimulus  in 
question  started  a  mental  reaction.  The  nervous  system  of 
man  is  so  constituted  that  in  the  acquirement  of  knowl- 
edge, each  time  the  nerve  centers  react  to  the  same  stimulus, 
the  tendency  so  to  react  becomes  stronger,  under  the  mere 
presence  of  the  stimulus,  starts  up  an  automatic  sort  of 
reaction,  and  we  say  that  the  child  knows  the  meaning  of 
the  object  constituting  the  stimulus. 

Not  only  is  review  thus  essential  in  the  beginning  of  the 
learning  process  with  children,  but  it  remains  a  vital  factor 
as  long  as  men  and  women  undertake  to  learn.  Review 
guarantees  recall,  and  recall  re-establishes  "nerve  connec- 
tions" to  the  permanent  fixing  of  impressions.  Very  little 
of  our  knowledge  remains  ours  to  a  purpose  unless  it  is 


136  Principles  of  Teaching 

gone  over  and  over  until  it  is  thoroughly  established.  A 
truth  that  is  taught  in  a  Mutual  lesson  on  a  particular  Tues- 
day night,  but  which  is  never  referred  to  again,  and  there- 
fore never  recalled,  very  likely  vi^ill  soon  be  gone  out  of 
consciousness  and  usefulness.  Those  truths  and  facts 
v^hich  are  of  greatest  functioning  value  to  us  are  those 
vi^hich  we  continue  to  run  over  in  our  minds  and  ponder. 
The  reinforcement  of  review  is  what  establishes  our  perma- 
nent working  stock  of  truth. 

Not  only  is  review  valuable  as  a  matter  of  recall,  but  it 
makes  for  an  enrichment  of  mental  content  which  is  alto- 
gether desirable.  The  real  art  of  review  lies  in  calling  up 
an  old  truth  in  a  new  setting.  Upon  second  perusal  it  is 
seen  in  skilful  review  from  a  slightly  different  angle  so 
that  each  recall  adds  a  reinforcement  that  makes  for  a 
clinching  of  thought  which  makes  it  permanent.  It  very 
often  happens  that  the  first  time  an  idea  is  called  to  our 
attention  it  means  but  little,  because  our  mental  reaction 
is  limited  in  the  particular  field  of  the  presentation;  the 
same  idea  in  a  new  setting  more  in  keeping  with  our  expe- 
rience may  take  on  an  entirely  different  significance.  That 
teaching  is  best,  therefore,  which  presents  truth  from  the 
greatest  number  of  angles  possible,  thereby  guaranteeing 
the  richest  kind  of  associations  in  the  minds  of  pupils. 

Another  value  that  attaches  to  the  review  lies  in  the  fact 
that  it  makes  possible  proper  connection  between  new  ma- 
terial and  old.  It  is  axiomatic  in  teaching  that  pupils  learn 
new  truths  and  take  on  new  experiences,  in  terms  of  the  old. 
Teaching  that  unfolds — that  develops  new  ideas  that  are 
built  upon  those  already  understood — is  the  kind  of  teach- 
ing attended  by  best  results.  In  our  organizations,  meeting 
as  we  do  only  once  a  week,  we  must  appreciate  the  fact 
that  in  the  intervening  time,  between  meetings,  hundreds  of 


Review  and  Preview  137 

ideas  have  crowded  into  the  mind  and  have  displaced  those 
that  may  have  been  there  as  a  result  of  our  teaching.  By 
calling  to  mind  those  ideas  of  a  week  ago,  we  not  only  rein- 
force them,  but  we  start  a  chain  of  thought  to  which  it  will 
be  very  much  easier  to  add  the  link  of  today's  work  than 
to  proceed  as  if  forging  an  entirely  new  chain. 

No  farmer  goes  out  and  plants  grain  on  the  unplowed 
field.  He  plows  and  harrows  that  the  soil  may  be  prepared 
not  only  to  receive  the  seed,  but  to  make  generation  possible. 

A  review  simply  turns  over  the  stubble  field  of  the  pre- 
ceding week's  work,  making  ready  for  the  planting  of  new 
seeds  that  they  may  generate  and  develop. 

Still  a  further  value  in  the  matter  of  review  lies  in  the 
fact  that  the  review  makes  more  easily  possible  the  proper 
evaluation  of  the  facts  taught.  In  every  lesson  there  are 
major  facts  and  truths  presented  and  also  those  minor  or 
subordinate  ones  that  serve  to  amplify  and  illustrate.  All 
too  frequently  a  class  becomes  so  involved  in  the  minor  de- 
tails that  it  may  fail  to  grasp  fully  the  big,  underlying 
truth.  By  careful  review,  the  teacher  can  make  the  essen- 
tials stand  out  in  relief.  These  are  the  things  that  need  to 
be  pondered.  If  they  are  properly  grasped,  thanlcs  to  the 
laws  of  association,  most  of  the  minor  facts  will  naturally 
attach  themselves,  so  that  truths  can  be  retained  in  all  of 
their  richness  of  detail. 

It  is  surprising  to  find  how  frequently  pupils  who  have 
spent  a  year  on  the  Book  of  Mormon  have  very  little  notion 
of  the  big,  outstanding  features  of  the  book.  They  appar- 
ently have  run  over  each  week's  lesson  as  so  many  inde- 
pendent facts,  never  coming  back  to  single  out  the  essen- 
tial things  in  that  early  American  civilization.  Surely  no 
class  ought  to  complete  the  course  without  clearly  compre- 
hending such  major  items  as: 


138  Principles  of  Teaching 

The  contribution  each  of  the  three  colonies  made  to  Book 
of  Mormon  civilization. 

The  general  geographical  location  of  each  colony. 

The  outstanding  characters  in  the  book. 

The  coming  forth  of  the  book. 

Why  it  is  essential. 

How  our  faith  depends  largely  upon  it. 

The  ministry  of  the  Savior  on  this  continent. 

Gospel  teachings  of  the  Book  of  Mormon. 

What  is  true  of  the  study  of  the  Book  of  Mormon  is 
equally  true  of  all  other  subjects.  It  is  so  easy  to  get  lost 
in  a  maze  of  facts,  in  a  course  in  the  principles  of  the 
Gospel,  and  yet  if  a  teacher  will  hold  to  such  basic  con- 
siderations as  the  articles  of  faith,  coming  back  to  them 
regularly  and  linking  facts  presented  under  the  appropriate 
article,  it  is  equally  easy  to  complete  the  course  with  a 
clearly  defined,  skeletonized  basis  for  all  future  study.  Two 
conclusions  seem  obvious :  as  teachers  we  ought  to  conduct 
reviews  regularly  and  frequently;  we  ought  to  prepare  for 
them  as  one  of  the  most  vital  factors  in  teaching. 

Important  as  is  the  review,  the  preview  or  assignment  is 
equally  vital.  To  quote  from  Colgrove's  The  Teacher  and 
the  School: 

"Importance  and  Value  of  Good  Lesson  Assignment.  From  the 
foregoing  consideration  it  is  clear  that  no  other  part  of  the  teacher's 
work  exceeds  in  value  and  importance  the  proper  planning  and  assign- 
ment of  the  daily  lessons.  It  is  supplying  the  class  and  the  school 
with  a  definite  plan  of  work.  It  is  preparing  the  mind  of  each  indi- 
vidual pupil  for  the  reception  of  new  truths  and  whetting  his  intel- 
lectual appetite  for  a  feast  of  good  things.  It  inspires  confidence  by 
pointing  out  to  the  pupil  just  how  he  can  use  his  past  lessons  and 
acquisitions  to  make  new  conquests.  It  prevents  pupils  from  mis- 
understanding the  lesson  or  approaching  it  with  indifference  or 
positive  aversion.  It  enables  the  pupil  to  approach  the  new  lesson 
in  a  perceiving  mood,  and  helps  pupils  to  form  the  habit  of  being 
successful  in  their  work  and  of  making  a  daily  application  of  their 


Review  and  Preview  139 

old  knowledge.  It  prevents  the  teacher  from  degenerating  into  a 
mere  talker,  and,  where  textbooks  are  used,  should  be  the  most  vital 
part  of  the  recitation." 

The  assignment  is  the  great  guarantee  of  a  good  recita- 
tion. It  sets  up  objectives — it  points  the  way — it  starts  the 
thought  process  that  is  to  produce  a  discussion  worth  while 
at  the  subsequent  meeting  of  the  class. 

Much  has  been  said  recently  against  the  practice  on  the 
part  of  the  teacher  of  saying,  "Take  chapter  three  for  next 
time."  There  are  superintendents  of  schools  who  refuse  to 
keep  such  teachers  in  their  service.  To  make  such  an 
assignment,  particularly  in  classes  that  meet  only  once  a 
week,  and  especially  if  the  assignment  is  made,  as  is  too 
usually  the  case,  after  the  signal  for  class  dismissal  has 
been  given,  is  to  promise  the  pupils  a  week  in  advance  that 
their  next  lesson  will  be  very  much  of  a  failure. 

A  good  assignment  is  characterized  by  several  very  defi- 
nite features.  In  the  first  place  it  is  perfectly  clear.  Given 
at  a  time  when  pupils  are  following  it,  it  gives  specific 
direction  as  to  the  work  to  be  done  ahead  in  preparation. 
It  indicates  the  direction  of  intellectual  travel,  points  out 
sources  of  material,  and  indicates  what  is  to  be  looked  for. 
Reference  or  textbooks  are  so  pointedly  referred  to  that 
pupils  not  only  remember  their  names,  they  v/ant  to  turn 
to  them  to  enjoy  their  contributions. 

In  the  second  place,  a  good  assignment  raises  a  problem 
which  is  a  challenge  to  the  mental  powers  of  pupils.  It 
should  carry  a  force  of  anticipation  that  capitalizes  on  that 
great  mover  to  action — curiosity.  For  instance,  if  the  les- 
son to  be  assigned  is  one  on  baptism,  instead  of  simply 
naming  certain  pages  in  a  text  to  be  read,  the  skilful  teacher 
may  well  challenge  his  class  by  bringing  in  a  clipping  from 
a  periodical  or  from  some  other  source  attempting  to  prove 


140  Principles  of  Teaching 

that  sprinkling  is  the  correct  method  of  baptism,  or  that 
baptism  is  not  essential  to  a  man's  obtaining  salvation? 
How  can  members  of  the  class  meet  such  an  argument? 
One  of  their  first  thoughts  will  likely  be  a  query  as  to 
where  available  material  may  be  turned  to.  How  easy, 
then,  to  give  references,  etc.  Some  such  problem  can  be 
raised  relative  to  every  lesson  taught,  and  it  is  a  wonderful 
force  as  an  intellectual  appetizer.  It  should  both  prompt 
to  action  and  point  to  the  path  to  be  followed. 

The  question  is  often  raised  as  to  whether  the  assignment 
should  be  general  or  specific.  Perhaps  the  best  answer 
involves  both  kinds.  There  ought  ordinarily  to  be  a  gen- 
eral assignment  that  affects  all  of  the  members  of  a  class. 
The  class  is  made  up  of  all  the  individuals  in  the  group — 
its  discussing  ought  therefore  to  be  so  made  up.  But  in 
addition  to  this  general  assignment,  specific  topics  given  to 
particular  members  add  an  enrichment  to  the  recitation  of 
very  great  value.  The  services  of  the  specialist  are  always 
of  inestimable  value.  That  class  is  best  wherein  each  mem- 
ber in  turn  becomes  a  specialist  in  looking  up  and  bringing 
in  vital  observations  on  life. 

As  to  the  best  time  for  making  assignments,  it  is  rather 
hard  to  give  a  ruling  that  best  fits  all  cases.  Preferably 
the  assignment  should  grow  out  of  the  discussion  of  the 
lesson  in  hand,  and  therefore  logically  comes  at  the  end  of 
the  recitation  rather  than  at  the  beginning.  There  are 
teachers,  however,  who,  fearing  interruption  at  the  end  of 
the  hour,  map  our  their  work  so  carefully  that  they  can 
make  the  assignment  at  the  outset,  merely  calling  attention 
to  it  at  the  close  of  the  hour.  All  other  things  being  equal, 
if  the  teacher  will  make  himself  hold  sacred  the  time 
necessary  at  the  end  of  the  hour  for  this  all  important  mat- 
ter of  assignment,  it  is  likely  that  best  results  will  follow 


Review  and  Preview  141 

having  the  assignment  of  the  next  lesson  grow  naturally  out 
of  the  work  of  today.  The  important  thing,  however,  is  that 
at  some  point  in  the  recitation,  the  teacher  shall  take  plenty 
of  time  to  make  a  carefully  planned  and  challenging  an- 
nouncement of  the  work  ahead. 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XX 

1.  Why  is  it  essential  to  good  teaching  that  regular  reviews  be 
conducted? 

2.  Why  are  reviews  more  necessary  in  our  religious  work  than 
in  regular  school  work? 

3.  What  are  the  chief  purposes  of  a  review? 

4.  By  taking  a  current  lesson  of  one  of  the  auxiliary  organiza- 
tions, illustrate  the  work  done  in  a  good  review. 

5.  Why  it  is  of  vital  importance  that  a  teacher  give  special  prep- 
aration to  a  review? 

6.  Show  how  good  class  preparation  is  conditional  upon  the 
proper  kind  of  assignment. 

7.  What  are  the  characteristics  of  a  good  assignment? 

8.  What  is  the  best  time  for  making  the  assigrmient? 

9.  Show  how  to  make  a  good  assignment  of  a  current  lesson  from 
one  of  the  organizations. 

Helpful  References 

Betts,  The  Recitation;  Betts,  How  to  Teach  Religion;  Colvin,  The 
Learning  Process;  Colgrove,  The  Teacher  and  the  School;  Strayer 
and  Norsworthy,  How  to  Teach. 


CHAPTER  XXI 

THE  QUESTION  AS  A  FACTOR  IN  EDUCATION 

Outline — Chapter  XXI 

Taking  Stock. — Miss  Stevens'  study  on  questioning. — Miss  Stevens 
quoted. — Various  types  of  questions:  a.  The  review  question:  b.  The 
fact  question;  c.  The  leading  question;  d.  The  thought  or  challeng- 
ing question. — Some  questions  on  questioning. 

How  many  questions  do  you  ask  regularly  during  a  reci- 
tation? 

What  proportion  of  those  questions  are  answered  in  full 
and  complete  statements? 

How  many  of  the  answers  to  your  questions  are  a  matter 
m^erely  of  memory?  How  many  reveal  original,  creative 
thinking? 

Such  questions  as  these  not  only  impress  us  with  the 
force  of  the  question  as  a  means  of  teaching,  but  they  lead 
us  to  examine  into  our  own  method  of  asking  them.  The 
whole  teaching  process  so  easily  and  unconsciously  develops 
into  a  matter  of  routine  that  it  is  good  practice  occasion- 
ally to  take  stock  of  ourselves.  It  is  surprising  to  find  how 
many  teachers  develop  a  particular  type  of  question  which 
becomes  their  sole  stock  in  trade. 

Miss  Ronniett  Stevens,  in  her  thesis.  The  Question  as  a 
Measure  of  Efficiency  in  Instruction,  has  made  one  of  the 
most  enlightening  studies  yet  made  on  the  matter  of  ques- 
tioning. Her  results  are  quoted  by  Weigle,  in  his  Talks  to 
Sunday  School  Teachers,  in  a  passage  of  interest,  not  only 
because  of  Miss  Stevens'  findings,  but  also  because  of  Mr. 
Weigle's  own  conclusions: 

"One  of  the  outstanding  differences,  in  present  practice,  between 
the  public  and  the  Sunday  school,  is  that  most  public  school  teachers 
ask  too  many  questions  and  most  Sunday  school  teachers  do  not  asi 


The  Question  as  a  Factor  in  Education       143 


questions  enough.  For  the  first  half  of  this  statement  there  is  ample 
evidence  in  the  careful  study  by  Miss  Ronniett  Stevens  on  The  Ques- 
tion as  a  Measure  of  Efficiency  in  Instruction.  Miss  Stevens  secured 
complete  stenographic  reports  of  twenty  high  school  lessons  in  Eng- 
lish, history,  science,  Latin,  modem  languages,  and  mathematics; 
she  observed  one  hundred  more  such  lessons  chosen  at  random,  with 
a  view  to  counting  and  noting  the  number  and  nature  of  the  questions 
asked  in  each;  and  she  followed  each  ten  classes  through  an  entire. 
day's  work  for  the  purpose  of  studying  the  aggregate  question- 
stimulus  to  which  each  was  subjected  in  the  course  of  the  day. 

"The  results  of  her  study  are  surprising.  In  only  eight  of  the 
twenty  lessons  completely  reported  the  teacher  asked  less  than  ninety 
questions  in  the  period  of  forty-five  minutes,  the  average  being  sixty- 
eight.  In  each  of  the  remaining  twelve  lessons  more  than  ninety 
questions  were  asked  in  the  same  period  of  time,  the  average  being 
128.  A  freshman  class  in  high  school,  in  a  day's  work  of  five  periods 
of  forty  minutes  each,  not  counting  gjnunasium,  was  subjected  to  516 
questions  and  expected  to  return  516  answers,  which  is  at  the  rate 
of  2:58  questions  and  2:58  answers  per  minute.  The  lowest  number 
of  questions  recorded  in  a  day's  work  for  a  class  was  321,  and  the 
average  number  395. 

"Such  rapid-fire  questioning.  Miss  Stevens  rightly  holds,  defeats 
its  own  ends.  It  maintains  a  nervous  tension  in  the  classroom  that 
must  in  the  long  run  be  injurious.  More  than  that,  it  is  a  symptom 
of  the  fact  that  the  real  work  of  the  hour  is  being  done  by  the 
teacher,and  the  pupil's  share  is  reduced  simply  to  brief,  punctuation- 
like answers  to  the  teacher's  questions.  Such  questions  appeal  to 
mere  memory  or  to  superficial  judgment  rather  than  to  real  thought; 
they  cultivate  in  the  pupil  neither  independent  judgment  nor  the 
power  of  expression;  they  ignore  individual  needs  and  discourage 
initiative;  they  make  out  of  the  classroom  a  place  to  display  knowl- 
edge, rather  than  a  laboratory  in  which  to  acquire  it. 

"The  second  half  of  the  proposition,  that  most  Sunday  school 
teachers  do  not  ask  questions  enough,  has  not  been  established  by 
any  such  investigation  as  that  of  Miss  Stevens.  A  similar  study,  on 
the  basis  of  complete  stenographic  reports,  of  typical  Sunday  school 
lessons,  would  be  a  most  valuable  addition  to  our  resources  in  the 
field  of  religious  pedagogy.  Till  such  a  study  is  made,  one  must 
simply  record  his  conviction  that  Sunday  school  teachers,  as  a  gen- 
eral rule,  ask  too  few,  rather  than  too  many  questions.  This  con- 
viction is  based  upon  general  observation  and  upon  the  frequency 
of  such  remarks  as,  'I  just  can't  get  my  class  to  study,'  'There  are 
only  two  or  three  who  ever  answer  my  questions,'  'My  pupils  don't 
know  anything  about  the  Bible,'  'As  long  as  I  do  all  the  talking, 
things  go  all  right,"  etc."  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teachers. 

The  whole  matter  of  questioning  can  be  made  to  stand 
out  most  clearly,  perhaps,  by  listing  the  various  types  of 


144  Principles  of  Teaching 

question,  the  purposes  which  each  type  serves,  and  the 
characteristics  of  a  good  question. 

First  of  all  there  is  the  Review  question.  The  great  pur- 
pose of  this  type  of  question  is  to  systematize  knowledge. 
Of  course,  it  is  valuable  as  an  aid  to  recollection — it  is  a 
challenge  to  memory — but  it  is  particularly  helpful  in  that 
it  makes  the  big  essential  points  in  a  course  stand  out  in 
relief  with  minor  points  properly  correlated  and  subordi- 
nated. The  review  question  is  a  guide  to  the  pupil  whereby 
he  may  see  the  relative  significance  of  the  work  he  has 
covered.  One  of  our  great  difficulties  lies  in  the  fact  that 
our  teaching  is  so  largely  piece- meal.  Today's  lesson  is 
hurried  through,  isolated  as  it  is  from  all  that  has  gone 
before  and  all  that  may  follow.  The  successful  teacher 
through  the  review  makes  each  lesson  a  link  in  the  chain 
of  thought  that  underlies  the  whole  development  of  the 
subject  in  hand. 

The  review  question  is  essentially  a  carefully  thought 
out,  searching  inquiry.  It  calls  for  a  turning  over,  in  the 
mind,  of  the  material  of  the  whole  course  and  therefore 
should  allow  ample  time  for  pondering.  If  it  does  not 
stimulate  a  "weighing  process,"  it  likely  is  merely  a  fact 
question — a  test  of  memory.  Of  course,  there  is  a  place  at 
times  for  this  hurried  type  of  question,  but  it  serves  the 
purpose  only  of  "connecting  up"  and  should  not  be  mis- 
taken for  the  evaluating  question  of  review. 

The  following  questions  on  the  expulsion  of  the  Saints 
from  Missouri  are  illustrative  review  questions: 

1.  To  what  extent,  if  any,  were  the  Latter-day  Saints 
themselves  responsible  for  their  expulsion  from  Missouri? 

2.  To  what  extent  were  the  persecutions  of  Missouri 
political?   Religious? 


The  Question  as  a  Factor  in  Education       145 

3.  How  do  you  account  for  the  fact  that  the  Lord's 
people  have  always  been  a  chastened  people? 

4.  Show  how  the  Missouri  persecutions  have  been  ulti- 
mately a  blessing  to  the  Latter-day  Saints. 

The  second  type  of  question  is  the  fact  question.  It 
serves  to  check  up  on  mental  alertness  and  recall.  It  is 
often  helpful  in  arresting  attention  and  therefore  has  a  cer- 
tain disciplinary  function.  The  teacher,  of  course,  must 
make  sure  that  his  pupils  are  grasping  the  subject-matter 
presented,  and  the  fact  question  serves  admirably  as  a  test 
of  knowledge.  It  is  usually  a  short  question  calling  for  a 
short  answer,  and  therefore  may  be  used  in  a  rapid-fire 
way  that  stimulates  thought.  It  is  this  type  of  question  that 
is  hurled  so  frequently  at  classes  with  the  consequences 
pointed  out  in  the  quotation  from  Miss  Stevens. 

The  same  author  lists  as  objections  to  the  continued  use 
of  these  rapid-fire  questions  the  following  bad  features. 
They  result  in: 

1.  Nervous  tension. 

2.  The  teacher's  doing  most  of  the  work. 

3.  Emphasis  upon  memory  and  superficial  judgment. 

4.  Little  time  for  the  art  of  expression. 

5.  Little  attention  to  the  needs  of  particular  individuals 
in  a  class. 

6.  The  class  being  made  a  place  for  displaying  knowl- 
edge. 

7.  Little  self-reliant,  independent  thinking. 

As  illustrative  of  the  fact  question  may  we  set  down  the 
following: 


146  Principles  of  Teaching 

Who  was  Joseph  Smith? 

What  was  his  father's  name? 

What  was  his  mother's  name? 

Where  was  he  born? 

How  old  was  he  when  he  received  his  first  vision? 

When  did  he  receive  the  plates? 

The  challenging  question  and  the  leading  question  are 
closely  enough  allied  that  we  may  well  discuss  them  to- 
gether. They  are  both  intended  to  provoke  creative  think- 
ing. The  leading  question  aims  to  capitalize  on  what  is 
already  in  the  pupil's  mind  in  getting  him  to  go  one  step 
further  to  a  conclusion  we  already  have  in  mind.  Instead 
of  telling  a  class  of  young  children  that  Joseph  Smith 
pra\'ed  to  the  Lord  for  help  in  choosing  the  church  to 
which  he  might  best  belong,  we  might  proceed  by  saying 
that  the  Prophet  had  asked  his  father  and  mother — he  had 
asked  his  best  friends — he  had  talked  with  all  the  ministers 
he  could  find — he  had  read  in  all  of  the  available  books — 
now  who  can  tell  what  else  he  could  do?  The  chief  merit 
of  the  leading  question  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  paves  the 
way  for  the  answer.  It  is  particularly  helpful  in  encourag- 
ing young  and  backward  pupils.  But  is  easily  subject  to 
abuse.  So  much  so  that  its  use  is  very  largely  restricted 
in  law  courts.  It  results  too  frequently  in  the  teacher's 
thinking  for  the  pupil,  and  therefore  ought  to  be  used 
with  care. 

The  challenging  question  is  the  question  that  fosters  orig- 
inality of  thought,  independence  of  judgment.  It  simply 
raises  a  problem  and  leaves  pupils  free  to  arrive  at  their 
own  conclusions.  It  makes  for  an  intelligent  faith  so  much 
desired  in  a  democratic  Church  such  as  ours.  It  is  the  one 
question  above  all  others  that  guarantees  a  vital  class  dis- 
tinction. 


The  Question  as  a  Factor  in  Education       147 

Of  course,  there  is  a  place  for  all  four  of  these  types  of 
questions.  As  was  said  relative  to  the  methods  of  the  reci- 
tation, the  best  method  is  a  variety  of  methods.  So  with 
questions.  It  is  perfectly  clear,  however,  that  for  general 
purposes  that  question  which  prompts  greatest  reflection 
and  independent  thinking  is  the  best  one  to  indulge  most 
frequently.  The  following  questions  out  of  a  lesson  on 
Joseph  Smith*s  First  Vision  are  set  down  as  typical  of 
thought-provoking  questions : 

1.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  when  men  choose  a  man  for 
president  of  a  bank  they  look  for  a  man  of  maturity  and 
experience,  how  do  you  explain  that  Joseph  Smith,  a  mere 
boy,  with  little  training  or  experience,  was  entrusted  with 
the  great  responsibility  of  founding  what  we  claim  is  the 
greatest  institution  of  these  latter  days? 

2.  How  can  you  convince  the  world  that  a  just  God 
would  declare  that  none  of  their  churches  is  right? 

3.  What  vital  truths  are  announced  to  the  world 
through  his  first  vision? 

Let  us  conclude  this  chapter  with  one  more  quotation 
from  Miss  Stevens.  When  asked  to  name  the  three  out- 
standing characteristics  of  a  good  question,  she  set  them 
down  as  follows: 

1.  A  good  question  should  stimulate  reflection. 

2.  It  should  be  adapted  to  the  experience  of  the  pupil. 

3.  It  should  draw  forth  a  well-rounded  answer. 

Questions  on  Qxjestioninc 

Do  I  call  on  my  pupils  to  recite  in  a  fixed  order,  according  to 
alphabet  or  seating,  so  that  they  are  warned  not  to  attend  till  Aeir 
turn  comes? 

Do  I  name  the  pupil  who  is  to  answer  before  I  put  the  question? 


148  Principles  of  Teaching 

Do  I  ask  direct  questions  or  alternative  questions  which  can  be 
answered  without  knowledge  or  thought? 

Do  I  ask  chiefly  fact  questions? 

Do  I  ask  leading  or  suggestive  questions? 

Do  I  repeat  my  questions?  Attention. 

Do  I  answer  my  own  questions? 

Do  I  ask  confusing,  changed  questions? 

Do  I  ask  foolish  questions  that  no  one  can  answer? 

Do  my  questions  make  pupils  think? 

Do  my  questions  follow  up  the  answer  and  lead  to  new  organization 
of  knowledge? 

Do  I  repeat  the  pupil's  answer? 

Do  my  questions  reach  all  the  members  of  the  class? 

Do  I  make  the  recitation  an  inquisition,  or  do  I  pursue  a  slow 
pupil  and  listen  while  pupils  express  themselves  freely  and  nat- 
urally? 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XXI 

1.  Why  is  it  essential  that  we  prepare  questions  as  we  do  other 
material? 

2.  What  are  the  dangers  that  attend  the  asking  of  a  great  number 
of  fact  questions? 

3.  Discuss  the  relative  value  of  the  *'WV'  —  what,  who,  when, 

where,  and  why. 

4.  Discuss  each  of  the  questions  on  questioning  in  this  chapter. 

5.  Bring  in  three  thought-provoking  questions  on  one  of  the  cur- 
rent lessons  in  the  month's  work  of  one  of  the  auxiliary  organizations. 

Heupful  References 

Fitch,  The  Art  of  Questioning;  Stevens,  The  Question  as  a  Measure 
of  Efficiency  in  Instruction;  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday  School  Teach- 
ers; Home,  Story  Telling,  Questioning,  and  Studying;  Brumbaugh, 
The  Making  of  a  Teacher;  Driggs,  The  Art  of  Teaching. 


CHAPTER  XXII 
THE  PROBLEM  OF  DISCIPLINE 

Outline — Chapter  XXII 

A  popular  misconception  of  discipline.  —  Discipline  inherent  in 
teaching.  —  Importance  of  discipline  in  our  religious  teaching. — 
Changed  attitude  within  the  past  three  centuries  toward  discipline. — 
What  discipline  is. 

Methods  of  securing  discipline:  The  method  of  rewards;  The 
method  of  "pleasing  the  teacher";  The  method  of  punishment;  The 
method  of  social  appeal;  The  method  of  interest. 

The  importance  of  a  proper  attitude  on  the  part  of  one  who  disci- 
plines.— What  constitutes  such  an  attitude? 

Back  in  19 16  the  writer  of  these  chapters  was  invited  to 
address  a  group  of  teachers  on  the  subject  of  discipHne. 
This  particular  lecture  came  toward  the  end  of  a  series  of 
lectures  given  on  the  various  pedagogical  truths  underlying 
teaching.  One  particular  teacher,  who  had  listened  to  all 
of  the  lectures,  expressed  appreciation  of  the  fact  that  disci- 
pline was  to  be  discussed — it  apparently  was  his  one  con- 
cern, as  indicated  in  his  remark: 

"We  have  listened  to  some  excellent  theories  in  these 
lectures.  But  I  have  to  teach  a  class  of  real  live  boys  and 
girls.  How  can  I  keep  the  little  rascals  quiet  long  enough 
to  work  the  theories  out?" 

The  remark  expresses  admirably  the  attitude  of  very 
many  teachers  relative  to  discipline.  They  regard  teaching 
as  one  thing — discipline  as  quite  another.  With  them 
discipline  involves  some  sort  of  magic  process  or  the  appli- 
cation of  some  iron  rule  authority,  which  secures  order 
that  teaching  may  then  be  indulged  in.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  discipline  is  inherent  in  good  teaching.  It  is  not  a 
matter  of  correction  so  much  as  a  matter  of  prevention. 
The  good  disciplinarian  anticipates  disorder — directs  the 


150  Principles  of  Teaching 

energies  of  his  pupils  so  that  the  disorder  is  made  impos- 
sible by  attention  to  legitimate  interests. 

Discipline  is  one  of  the  most  pressing  problems  in  the 
quorums  and  organizations  of  the  Church  today.  On  every 
hand  the  complaint  is  registered  that  proper  respect  is  not 
shown,  either  for  those  in  important  positions  or  for  our 
places  of  worship. 

The  spirit  that  accompanies  the  political  rally  or  basket- 
ball game,  held  in  our  amusement  halls,  too  frequently  is 
carried  into  our  sacred  meetings.  The  spirit  of  unconcern 
is  carried  into  our  classrooms  until  all  too  often  to  call  the 
condition  one  of  disorder  is  a  very  inadequate  description 
of  the  procedure. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  the  changing  attitude  generally 
in  the  matter  of  discipline.  The  harshness  of  other  days 
is  largely  replaced  by  a  leniency  that  borders  on  "easiness." 
Our  whole  attitude  toward  criminals  has  been  revolution- 
ized, and  our  human  impulses  have  carried  over  into  the 
realm  of  teaching,  until  now,  at  least  in  the  opinion  of  very 
many  critics,  we  have  drifted  largely  into  "soft  pedagogy" 
— a  process  of  trying  to  please  regardless  of  the  conse- 
quences. 

Earlier  treatises  on  education  devoted  a  good  bit  of 
space  to  the  amount  and  kind  of  punishment  that  should 
be  administered  in  a  well-ordered  school.  Punishment  is 
decidedly  out  of  taste  these  days.  The  biography  of  an  old 
German  master  discloses  the  fact  that  during  his  teaching 
career  he  had  administered  911,527  raps  with  his  cane, 
20,989  with  a  ruler,  136,715  with  his  hand,  and  that  he  was 
responsible  for  1,115,800  slaps  on  the  head.  The  same 
attitude  is  reflected  in  the  fact  that  in  England,  as  late  as 
the  year  1800,  two  hundred  twenty-three  offenses  were 
punishable  by  death.   The  offenses  included  shooting  rab- 


The  Problem  of  Discipline  151 

bits,  stealing,  defacing  Westminster  Bridge,  etc.  In  our  day 
we  hesitate  to  apply  the  extreme  penalty  even  to  the 
murderer. 

The  attitude  toward  the  content  of  teaching  has  under- 
gone a  change  quite  in  keeping  with  that  attached  to 
method.  There  was  a  time  when  pedagogical  philosophy 
rather  hinted,  "It  doesn't  make  any  difference  what  you 
teach  a  boy,  as  long  as  he  doesn't  like  it."  The  hint  these 
days  might  more  nearly  read:  "It  doesn't  make  any  dif- 
ference how  valuable  certain  material  is  for  a  boy,  don't 
attempt  to  teach  it  to  him  unless  it  fascinates  him."  Our 
effort  to  interest  our  pupils  has  practically  resulted  in  tak- 
ing the  scriptures,  particularly  the  Old  Testament,  out  of 
our  organizations.  Of  course,  the  doctrine  of  interest  is  a 
very  vital  one,  but  there  are  bounds  beyond  which  we 
ought  not  to  push  it. 

It  is,  therefore,  perfectly  obvious  that  there  is  urgent  need 
of  discipline.  Any  effort  at  social  control  demands  it.  The 
army  succeeds  as  it  does  because  of  its  discipline.  Wherever 
a  group  of  individuals  undertake  action  in  common,  every 
member  must  be  willing  to  sink  interests  of  self  in  welfare 
of  others.  As  was  pointed  out  in  the  chapter  on  Individual 
Differences,  a  class  is  made  up  of  all  kinds  of  individuals. 
They  vary  in  capacity,  in  ideals,  in  training,  in  attitude,  in 
disposition,  and  in  purpose.  Manifestly  group  progress 
will  be  made  possible  in  any  such  case  by  a  mutual  will- 
ingness to  co-operate — a  willingness  to  attend  a  discussion 
even  though  not  particularly  interested  in  it,  but  because 
it  may  be  of  concern  to  someone  else  whose  interests  I 
have  undertaken  to  promote.  My  very  presence  in  the 
class  imposes  such  a  responsibility  upon  me. 

It  is  essential  in  a  discussion  of  discipline  that  we  agree 
as  to  just  what  discipline  is.  It  is  not  mere  silence.  Silent 


152  Principles  of  Teaching 

"quietness"  may  be  agreeable,  but  it  certainly  does  not 
make  for  achievement.  Such  silence  would  be  of  little 
worth  if  it  could  be  achieved,  and  it  cannot  be  achieved 
with  twentieth  century  human  beings.  The  question  of  the 
lad  who  had  been  taken  to  task  for  his  disturbance  is  al- 
ways refreshing.  The  teacher,  after  a  somewhat  prolonged 
scolding,  had  concluded: 

"Now,  Tommie,  do  be  quiet." 

"What  fur?" 

The  English  may  not  be  the  choicest,  but  the  sense  is 
wonderfully  significant  to  the  teacher  who  would  really 
understand  the  problem  of  discipline. 

Discipline  is  not  repression.  The  D  of  discipline  and 
the  D  of  don't  have  been  confused  all  too  often.  Just  as 
the  too  frequent  use  of  the  brakes  on  an  automobile  ruins 
the  lining,  so  the  too  frequent  "don't"  of  repression  ruins 
the  "goodwill  lining"  of  the  boy,  and  when  that  lining  is 
gone  the  "brake  squeaks,"  and  in  emergencies  doesn't  hold 
at  all. 

Discipline  rather  consists  in  that  direction  of  wholesome 
activity  which  creates  an  atmosphere  of  intellectual  en- 
deavor in  which  every  individual  of  a  group  can  profitably 
follow  his  own  interests  while  allowing  every  other  indi- 
vidual to  do  the  same  thing  free  from  interference.  Disci- 
pline makes  it  possible  for  all  to  do  the  thing  to  be  done 
to  advantage.  It  may  at  times  require  silence,  it  may  in- 
volve vigorous  action — it  always  presumes  intelligent  direc- 
tion that  holds  those  concerned  to  the  orderly  pursuit  of 
an  established  goal. 

Various  means  have  been  devised  for  the  securing  of 
discipline.  The  doctrine  of  rewards  has  been  and  still  is 
being  followed  extensively.  To  give  an  individual  some- 
thing for  being  good  has  never  appealed  to  educators  as 


The  Problem  of  Discipline  153 

lundamentally  sound.  It  puts  a  false  evaluation  upon 
virtue.  It  may  be  that  such  a  policy  must  be  resorted  to 
in  emergencies,  but  followed  regularly  it  is  likely  to  be 
attended  with  disastrous  results.  The  boy  who  has  regu- 
larly to  be  bought  into  doing  what  he  should  will  likely 
raise  his  price  until  the  method  of  rewards  becomes  ruinous 
both  to  the  father  and  the  boy.  To  "heroize"  a  boy  in 
class  every  time  he  does  a  meritorious  act  will  very  likely 
spoil  him.  Encouragement,  of  course,  is  helpful,  but  it 
ought  not  to  be  overindulged.  A  stick  of  candy  may  induce 
a  child  to  go  to  bed  agreeably  each  night,  but  the  candy 
may  spoil  other  things  than  the  bedspread.  Moral  fibre 
is  built  up  by  developing  the  habit  of  doing  a  thing  because 
it  is  right — because  it  ought  to  be  done.  There  are  teachers 
and  preachers  who  hold  the  interest  of  those  taught  by 
tickling  their  ears  with  material,  either  funny  or  nonsensi- 
cal. There  is  a  question  whether  it  is  not  a  dangerous 
practice  in  an  effort  to  win  them  to  what  should  be  an 
attitude  of  religious  devotion. 

Then  there  is  the  doctrine  that  children  should  be  good 
to  please  their  parents  and  teachers.  This  doctrine  is  akin 
to  that  of  rewards.  It  sets  up  something  of  a  false  ideal, 
though  of  course  it  is  a  splendid  thing  to  teach  apprecia- 
tion of  those  who  help  us.  Much  can  be  defended  which 
seeks  to  inculcate  in  the  minds  of  children  reverence  for 
their  elders.  The  chief  difficulty  lies  in  the  fact  that  this 
doctrine  may  not  continue  to  appeal  as  fundamentally 
sound. 

A  third  method  for  securing  discipline  is  to  compel  it. 
This  is  to  resort  to  the  law  of  things.  A  certain  amount 
of  law  should  characterize  both  the  home  and  the  class- 
room. Obedience  and  order  are  the  first  laws  of  heaven 
and  are  essential  to  good  social  environment.   But  the  law 


154  Principles  of  Teaching 

should  be  so  administered  that  the  obedience  exacted  rests 
upon  an  intelligent  understanding  of  the  purpose  behind 
the  law.  Otherwise  there  comes  a  time  when  mere  authority 
fails  to  control.  It  is  a  good  thing  to  train  children  to  abide 
by  regulations  out  of  a  sense  of  duty.  If  duty  and  love 
can  be  coupled,  the  combination  makes  for  permanent  law- 
abiding.  Arbitrary  authority  and  blind  obedience  have 
produced  Germany.  Strong  leadership  coupled  with  demo- 
cratic co-operation  and  loyalty  have  produced  America. 

Still  another  doctrine  of  discipline  rests  upon  a  social 
appeal.  Members  of  a  group  agree  that  in  the  interest  of 
everyone's  welfare  each  individual  will  subscribe  to  certain 
conditions  regardless  of  their  application  to  him.  This 
principle,  fundamental  in  all  democracies,  can  safely  be 
trusted  to  secure  desired  results  in  groups  mature  enough 
to  assure  sound  judgment.  The  sense  of  justice  in  the 
human  soul  is  a  safe  guarantee  of  both  liberty  and  good 
order.  Many  of  our  classes  no  doubt  could  be  improved 
noticeably  if  vv^e  could  enlist  the  co-operation  of  the  mem- 
bers to  the  extent  that  they  would  assume  to  govern  them- 
selves. 

Finally  there  is  the  doctrine  of  interest  as  a  means  of 
maintaining  discipline.  This  doctrine  implies  that  a  teacher 
should  get  his  class  so  interested  in  doing  what  he  wants  it 
to  do  that  it  hasn't  any  inclination  to  do  what  it  ought  not 
to  do.  This  doctrine  is  not  the  pernicious  doctrine  hinted 
at  earlier  in  this  chapter  of  cheapening  everything  into 
"easiness."  Genuine  interest  may  lead  not  only  to  effort, 
but  to  sacrifice.  The  boy  who  plays  football  does  not  play 
because  of  the  ease  of  the  game — he  is  fascinated  by  his 
interest  in  the  struggle.  Ample  preparation  and  a  complete 
understanding  of  pupils  will  make  possible  an  interest  that 
disciplines  without  any  evidence  of  discipline.   Surely  this 


The  Problem  of  Discipline  155 

is  the  modern  doctrine  of  discipline,  though  with  it  should 
be  coupled  that  wholesome  respect  for  authority  that 
prompts  citizens  to  abide  by  the  law. 

No  discussion  of  discipline  would  be  complete  which  did 
not  mention  at  least  the  significance  of  attitude  on  the  part 
of  one  who  disciplines.  In  so  many  cases  when  a  boy  is 
corrected  he  complains  of  the  teacher, 

"Oh,  well,  he's  got  it  in  for  me." 

It  is  always  interesting  to  know  whether  a  parent  or 
teacher  disciplines  a  child  because  the  child  needs  it,  or 
because  the  parent  or  teacher  is  unnerved  and  has  to  give 
expression  to  his  feelings.  The  disciplinarian  who  can 
correct,  when  correction  is  necessary,  both  in  firmness  yet 
in  fairness,  so  that  the  person  who  is  corrected  is  made 
to  feel  that  the  correction  grows  out  of  a  desire  to  help 
rather  than  merely  to  punish — that  disciplinarian  will  exert 
an  influence  for  good  that  is  hard  to  estimate.  He  is  both 
a  friend  and  a  benefactor. 

Let  us  conclude  this  chapter  with  that  wonderful  passage 
from  the  Doctrine  &  Covenants  which  gives  us  the  word  of 
the  Lord  on  this  matter  of  controlling  others: 

"Behold,  there  are  many  called,  but  few  are  chosen.  And  why  are 
they  not  chosen? 

"Because  their  hearts  are  set  so  much  upon  the  things  of  this  world, 
and  aspire  to  the  honors  of  men,  that  they  do  not  learn  this  one 
lesson — 

"That  the  rights  of  the  Priesthood  are  inseparably  connected  with 
the  powers  of  heaven,  and  that  the  powers  of  heaven  cannot  be  con- 
trolled nor  handled  only  upon  the  principles  of  righteousness. 

"That  they  may  be  conferred  upon  us,  it  is  true;  but  when  we 
undertake  to  cover  our  sins,  or  to  gratify  our  pride,  our  vain  ambi- 
tions, or  to  exercise  control,  or  dominion,  or  compulsion,  upon  the 
souls  of  the  children  of  men,  in  any  degree  of  unrighteousness, 
behold,  the  heavens  withdraw  themselves;  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  is 
grieved;  and  when  it  is  withdrawn,  Amen  to  the  Priesthood,  or  the 
authority  of  that  man. 

"Behold!  ere  he  is  aware,  he  is  left  unto  himself,  to  kick  against 
the  pricks;  to  persecute  the  Saints,  and  to  fight  against  God. 


156  Principles  of  Teaching 


"We  have  learned,  by  sad  experience,  that  it  is  the  nature  and 
disposition  of  almost  all  men,  as  soon  as  they  get  a  little  authority. 
as  they  suppose,  they  will  immediately  begin  to  exercise  unrighteous 
dominion. 

"Hence  many  are  called,  but  few  are  chosen. 

"No  power  or  influence  can  or  ought  to  be  maintained  by  virtue 
of  the  Priesthood,  only  by  persuasion,  by  long  suffering,  by  gentle- 
ness, and  meekness,  and  by  love  unfeigned; 

"By  kindness,  and  pure  knowledge,  which  shall  greatly  enlarge 
the  soul  without  hypocrisy,  and  without  guile; 

"Reproving  betimes  with  sharpness,  when  moved  upon  by  the  Holy 
Ghost,  and  then  showing  forth  afterwards  an  increase  of  love  toward 
him  whom  thou  hast  reproved,  lest  he  esteem  thee  to  be  his  enemy; 

"That  he  may  know  that  thy  faithfulness  is  stronger  than  the  cords 
of  death; 

"Let  thy  bowels  also  be  full  of  charity  towards  all  men,  and  to 
the  household  of  faith,  and  let  virtue  garnish  thy  thoughts  unceas- 
ingly, then  shall  thy  confidence  wax  strong  in  the  presence  of  God, 
and  the  doctrine  of  the  Priesthood  shall  distil  upon  thy  soul  as  the 
dews  from  heaven. 

"The  Holy  Ghost  shall  be  thy  constant  companion,  and  thy  sceptre 
an  unchanging  sceptre  of  righteousness  and  truth,  and  thy  dominion 
shall  be  an  everlasting  dominion,  and  without  compulsory  means  it 
shall  flow  unto  thee  forever  and  ever."  (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  121:34-46.) 

Questions  and  Suggestions— Chapter  XXIT 

1.  What  constitutes  good  discipline? 

2.  What  factors  contribute  to  make  discipline  a  real  problem  in 
our  Church? 

3.  Discuss  our  attitude  toward  discipline  today  as  compared  with 
the  attitude  toward  it  a  generation  ago. 

4.  Name  the  various  methods  of  securing  discipline. 

5.  Discuss  their  relative  values. 

6.  Why  is  the  teacher's  attitude  so  important  a  factor  in  disci- 
pline? 

7.  What  qualities  are  involved  in  the  proper  attitude? 

8.  Discuss  preparation  in  its  bearing  upon  discipline. 

Helpful  References 

Doctrine  &  Covenants;  Bagley,  School  Discipline;  O'Shea,  Every- 
day Problems  in  Teaching;  Brumbaugh,  The  Making  of  a  Teacher 
Dewey,  Interest  and  Effort  in  Education. 


CHAPTER  XXIII 


CREATING  CLASS  SPIRIT 


Outline — Chapter  XXIII 


The  "pull"  of  a  good  class. — ^The  appeal  of  an  attractive  class- 
room.— Making  it  "our  room." — The  teacher  and  class  spirit. — Capi- 
talizing on  the  leadership  of  the  class. — Stimulating  free  participa- 
tion.— Out  of  class  activities. — Some  possibilities. 

There  is  a  "pull"  to  certain  classes — a  pull  that  has  all 
the  force  of  a  magnet.  Pupils  not  only  go  to  such  a  class 
willingly,  but  anticipate  with  pleasure  the  approach  of  the 
recitation  hour.  When  duty  is  coupled  with  pleasure,  there 
is  a  force  for  righteousness  that  is  beyond  measure.  Of 
the  various  factors  that  contribute  to  the  creation  of  a  class 
spirit,  the  following  are  offered  as  being  among  the  most 
helpful. 

1.  An  Attractive  Classroom.  While  it  is  true  that  most 
of  the  organizations  in  the  Church  do  not  have  surplus 
funds  for  beautifying  their  buildings,  and  while  it  is  equally 
true  that  many  a  good  lesson  has  been  conducted  on  the 
dirt  floors  of  long  cabins,  it  is  equally  true  that  rooms  can 
be  beautified,  and  that  pleasant  surroundings  can  be  made 
a  potent  force  in  holding  to  our  organizations  the  men  and 
women  and  boys  and  girls  of  the  Church.  Of  course,  elab- 
orate, expensive  decorations  ought  to  be  discouraged.  Sim- 
plicity always  is  more  consistent  with  the  spirit  of  worship 
than  is  extravagance.  But  contrast  the  difference  in  effect 
on  children  of  a  bare,  untidy,  makeshift  room  as  against  a 
cozy  room  decorated  with  a  few  beautiful  pictures  or  dra- 
peries and  made  homelike  with  comfortable  seats  and  tidy 
arrangement. 

Nor  is  any  great  expense  involved.  The  writer  recalls 
visiting  a  kindergarten  class  in  one  of  the  schools  in  Salt 


158  Principles  of  Teaching 

Lake  County.  The  ward  authorities  had  not  been  asked 
for  a  dollar  to  fit  up  the  room,  and  yet  it  had  one  of  the 
"homiest"  atmospheres  imaginable.  The  teacher  of  the 
class,  in  addition  to  having  an  interest  in  the  class,  had  an 
artistic  temperament.  She  had  collected  through  a  number 
of  years  the  most  beautiful  pictures  that  had  appeared  in 
the  magazines.  These  in  their  home-made  frames  trans- 
formed the  walls  of  her  room  into  a  veritable  art  gallery 
— ^wherever  the  eye  of  the  visitor  rested,  it  was  greeted  by 
a  picture  that,  through  its  beauty,  drove  home  an  apprecia- 
tion of  the  finer  things  of  life.  The  children,  too,  had  been 
stimulated  to  a  pride  in  their  room.  They  had  brought  in 
the  available  old  rags  from  their  homes  and,  as  the  result 
of  a  Sunday  School  entertainment  which  they  had  put  on 
with  the  co-operation  of  the  other  departments  of  the 
school,  they  had  had  the  rags  woven  into  one  of  those 
cheerful,  old-fashioned  home-made  carpets.  It  was  per- 
fectly clear  that  the  children  took  delight  in  going  to  this 
"their  room"  each  Sunday  morning.  Their  pride  prompted 
them  to  take  care  of  what  they  regarded  as  their  room,  and 
made  for  a  spirit  of  quiet  and  good  order  hard  to  surpass. 

During  the  course  in  teacher-training  at  Provo,  last  sum- 
mer, one  of  the  members  of  the  class  courteously  took  the 
pains  to  see  that  a  bouquet  of  flowers  adorned  the  teacher's 
desk  each  day  that  the  class  met.  It  is  impossible  to  esti- 
mate the  effect  of  those  flowers.  Their  beauty,  coupled  with 
the  thoughtfulness  that  brought  them  in,  made  for  a  "fra- 
grance of  spirit"  that  exerted  a  remarkable  influence. 

Once  the  idea  becomes  established,  pupils  will  take  de- 
light in  making  their  classroom  a  place  in  which  they  will 
love  to  meet. 

2.  The  Teacher.  We  have  already  discussed  at  length 
the  personality  of  the  teacher  and  its  force  in  teaching.  We 


Creating  Class  Spirit  159 

need  only  emphasize  the  fact  here  that  the  magnetism  of 
the  teacher,  either  through  what  he  is  or  what  he  gives,  is 
the  one  great  factor  that  makes  for  class  spirit.  The  class 
inevitably  reflects  the  attitude  of  the  man  who  directs  it. 
He  must  radiate  enthusiasm  before  it  can  be  caught  by  his 
pupils.  His  inspiration  in  making  them  feel  that  their  class 
is  "the  one  class"  of  an  organization  is  only  too  gladly  re- 
sponded to  by  those  whom  he  teaches.  If  he  impresses  the 
class  with  the  fact  that  he  joins  with  them  because  he  loves 
so  to  do  rather  than  because  he  has  a  duty  to  perform — if 
he  makes  suggestions  in  the  interest  of  a  better  class — if  he 
starts  out  by  doing  something  himself  by  way  of  a  contri- 
bution to  the  class  and  its  spirit — he  can  be  reasonably 
sure  that  his  class  will  come  more  than  half-way  to  join  in 
his  plans. 

Not  only  his  attitude  is  a  vital  factor — ^his  preparation 
must  be  of  the  same  enthusiastic  type.  A  pupil  of  a  very 
successful  teacher  in  Salt  Lake  City  recently  made  the  re- 
mark, "I  wouldn't  think  of  missing  Brother 's  class. 

He  gives  me  food  for  a  week."  Pressed  as  to  the  explana- 
tion of  this  enthusiasm,  he  added,    "Brother  is 

unique.  He  always  attacks  a  subject  in  such  a  new  and 
thorough  way.  He  goes  below  the  surface  and  really 
teaches  us  the  Gospel."  It  is  not  strange,  of  course,  that 
such  advertising  on  the  part  of  class  members  has  built 
up  an  enrollment  of  some  seventy-five  pupils.  Let  us,  then, 
remind  ourselves  that  boys  like  a  teacher 

"Who  has  pep," 

"Who  tells  us  something  new," 

"Who  doesn't  preach  at  us." 

3.  Capitalizing  on  the  Leadership  of  the  Class.  Just  as 
in  every  band  of  horses  there  is  a  leader,  so  there  is  in 


160  Principles  of  Teaching 

every  group  of  boys  and  girls.  And  as  with  the  leaders,  so 
with  the  followers.  "Get  the  leaders,"  says  a  veteran 
horseman,  "and  you  have  all  the  rest."  It  is  frequently  the 
case  that  a  teacher  does  not  know  intimately  all  of  his 
pupils.  Perhaps  in  many  cases  that  teacher  can  know  well 
a  few  of  the  outstanding  leaders.  He  can  well  accompany 
them  on  hikes,  can  take  them  to  a  theatre,  a  ball  game,  or 
for  a  ride.  If  he  wins  them  they  become  his  lieutenants 
— they  make  his  class.  A  word  from  him  and  these  "under 
officers"  lead  the  whole  class  to  the  desired  reaction.  "Take 
your  leading  pupils  into  your  confidence  and  they  will 
establish  you  in  the  confidence  of  all  the  rest."  The  expe- 
rience is  related  of  a  teacher  sent  into  southern  Utah  to 
take  charge  of  a  class  of  boys  who  had  "dismissed"  three 
teachers  already,  within  the  first  half  year  of  school.  When 
the  newcomer  arrived,  the  air  was  full  of  rumblings  as  to 
what  was  to  become  of  number  four.  He  was  variously 
cautioned  to  make  an  early  departure,  to  go  into  school 
"armed"  to  "expect  anything."  But  this  particular  teacher 
appreciated  the  fact  that  he  was  best  armed  when  backed 
by  the  confidence  and  good  will  of  his  class.  It  was  an 
easy  matter  to  have  pointed  out  for  him  "the  meanest  boy 
of  the  lot."  This  boy  he  sought  out  and  found  playing  a 
game  of  horseshoe.  Invited  to  take  a  place  in  the  game,  he 
entered  the  circle  of  the  "outlaws"  by  winning  decisively 
from  their  champion — "the  meanest  boy."  To  this  boy,  the 
new  teacher  was  a  "real  fellow."  Whatever  he  said,  wentl 
The  word  was  circulated  overnight  among  the  boys  of  the 
town.  The  teacher  already  was  master  of  the  situation. 
"The  meanest  boy,"  instead  of  being  the  chief  outlaw,  now 
took  pride  in  being  chief  lieutenant.  Winning  the  leader 
won  the  group,  and  teacher  number  four  not  only  stayed  the 
year  out,  but  was  petitioned  to  come  back  a  second  year. 


Creating  Class  Spirit  161 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  he  says,  he  taught  school  in  that  town 
for  seven  years. 

4.  Putting  a  Premium  on  Participation.  One  of  the 
most  interesting  classes  the  writer  has  ever  visited  was  a 
theological  class  in  the  Granite  Stake.  The  teacher  was 
committed  to  the  policy  of  taking  as  little  as  possible  of 
the  class  period  himself,  but  he  was  also  committed  to  the 
policy  of  getting  his  pupils  to  do  the  most  possible.  For 
the  particular  day  in  question  he  had  assigned  a  discussion 
of  baptism.  One  member  of  the  class  had  been  asked  to 
discuss  sprinkling  as  the  correct  method,  another  had 
been  assigned  immersion.  The  two  young  men  brought  in 
their  findings  as  if  they  had  been  trained  for  a  debate. 
Within  the  forty  minutes  devoted  to  the  recitation  baptism 
had  been  gone  into  as  thoroughly  as  the  writer  has  ever 
seen  it  gone  into  during  the  course  of  a  single  lesson,  and 
the  members  of  the  class  had  been  delightfully  entertained 
and  enlightened.  When  the  bell  rang  announcing  the  close 
of  the  recitation,  the  class  petitioned  to  have  the  discussion 
continued  the  following  Sunday.  It  was  perfectly  clear 
how  the  teacher  had  built  up  his  enrollment. 

It  is  fundamental  in  human  nature  to  love  social  combat. 
The  clash  of  mind  versus  mind  makes  a  wonderful  appeal. 
Witness  a  political  convention  or  an  open  forum  debate! 
Let  it  be  known  that  a  vital  subject  is  to  be  discussed  by 
men  who  are  really  prepared  and  other  men  bestir  them- 
selves to  be  in  attendance.  Surely  no  subjects  are  full  of 
more  vital  significance  than  questions  of  life  and  life  eter- 
nal. If  a  teacher  will  take  the  pains  to  select  attention- 
compelling  headings  and  then  stimulate  representative 
members  of  his  class  really  to  work  out  something  of  a 
contribution,  he  need  have  no  ieaoc  of  the  success  of  his 


162  Principles  of  Teaching 

class.  Such  procedure  not  only  guarantees  a  good  class 
— it  promotes  faith  on  the  part  of  those  participating  as 
few  other  things  can.  Too  frequently  we  content  ourselves 
with  the  routine  of  commonplace  "talk."  There  is  no  en- 
thusiasm in  mere  routine  as  there  is  none  in  listless  listen- 
ing to  generalities.  Our  effort  should  be  to  make  our  classes 
intellectual  social  centers  with  everybody  participating. 

5.  Promoting  Class  Activities  Out  of  Hours.  The  Sev- 
enties who  harvested  the  grain  for  the  widow  of  one  of  their 
members  did  a  splendid  bit  of  service,  not  only  for  her  but 
for  their  own  quorum.  A  common  objective  in  service 
made  for  a  common  bond  in  fellowship. 

The  Primary  class  that  was  stimulated  to  take  a  basket 
of  flowers  to  one  of  its  sick  members  was  helped  not  only 
in  the  making  of  someone  happy,  but  in  building  up  a  class 
spirit  that  guaranteed  success. 

There  are  so  many  possibilities  open  to  the  teacher  who 
really  cares.  Just  the  other  evening  the  teacher  of  a  class 
of  Bee  Hive  girls  called  them  together  for  a  little  social 
entertainment  that  they  might  talk  over  plans  for  the  ap- 
proaching season.  What  a  capital  attitude?  Not  to  wait 
till  the  season  opened,  but  to  take  the  pains  to  look  up  the 
available,  prospective  class  members  and  make  ready  for  an 
enthusiastic  campaign.  Of  course,  such  a  teacher  will 
succeed. 

Class  socials  of  all  sorts,  baseball  teams,  authors'  clubs, 
bits  of  ward  service,  visits  to  institutions  of  interest — ^scores 
of  worthy  opportunities  present  themselves  always  to  the 
teacher  who  is  anxious  to  build  up  a  genuine  class  spirit. 
And  that  spirit  is  the  one  great  guarantee  of  real  joy  in 
teaching  —  it  makes  a  class  one  which  its  members  will 
always  hold  in  memory. 


Creating  Class  Spirit  163 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XXIII 

1.  Why  is  it  essential  that  a  teacher  build  up  a  class  spirit? 

2.  Give  three  practical  suggestions  on  the  subject  of  beautifying 
classrooms. 

3.  Discuss  the  importance  of  the  attitude  of  a  teacher  in  promot- 
ing class  spirit 

4.  Point  out  possible  methods  for  enlisting  the  co-operation  of 
class  leaders. 

5.  What  do  you  consider  your  best  method  of  stimulating  mem- 
bers to  participate  in  class  discussions. 

6.  What  kind  of  class  activities  contribute  most  to  the  life  of 
your  class? 

7.  Discuss  the  advisability  of  promoting  class  athletic  teams. 

Heupful  References 

Colgrove,  The  Teacher  and  the  School;  Weigle,  Talks  to  Sunday 
School  Teachers;  Dewey,  Interest  and  Effort  in  Education;  O'Shea, 
Everyday  Problems  in  Teaching;  Norsworthy  and  Whitley,  Psy- 
chology of  Childhood. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

CONVERSION— THE  REAL  TEST  OF  TEACHEMG 

Outline — Chapter  XXIV 

Character,  a  great  power  in  conversion. — Our  concern  the  converted 
teacher  and  also  the  converted  pupil. — The  converted  teacher  believes 
what  he  teaches. — The  converted  teacher  practices  what  he  teaches. — 
The  force  of  "Come,  follow  me." — What  makes  for  conversion. — The 
teacher's  obligation  to  kindle  the  spiritual  fire. — His  obligation  to 
feature  testimony-bearing. — His  obligation  to  take  his  pupils  where 
they  will  feel  the  spirit  of  testimony. 

A  number  of  years  ago  a  young  graduate  of  one  of  our 
eastern  universities  was  employed  to  teach  science  in  a 
school  in  Japan.  He  was  employed  with  the  understanding 
that  though  he  was  free  to  advance  whatever  scientific  theo- 
ries he  chose  he  should  say  nothing  about  his  Christian 
religion.  He  accepted  the  conditions  gladly,  and  during  the 
first  year  of  his  service  was  careful  not  even  to  mention 
Christianity.  He  not  only  taught  his  classes  in  science,  but 
he  joined  with  the  boys  in  their  athletics  and  in  their  social 
life  generally.  Being  both  an  athlete  and  a  leader,  he  was 
soon  looked  to  as  the  life  of  the  school.  His  clean  life  was 
an  inspiration.  He  inevitably  set  a  Christian  standard. 
Before  the  end  of  the  second  year,  though  he  had  preached 
never  a  word,  forty  young  men  made  application  for  mem- 
bership in  his  church.  His  life  and  ideals  had  converted 
them  as  no  preaching  could  have  done. 

What  was  true  in  this  case  is  inevitably  true  in  the  case 
of  all  real  teachers.  What  a  man  is  breathes  a  power  of 
conversion  that  no  force  or  argument  can  equal.  Hence  this 
concluding  chapter  —  Conversion,  the  Real  Test  of 
Teaching. 

First  of  all,  we  are  concerned  with  the  conversion  of  the 
teacher;  secondly,  with  the  conversion  of  the  pupil.   They 


Conversion — The  Real  Test  of  Teaching      165 

are  inseparably  interwoven.  Only  the  converted  teacher  can 
make  converts  of  his  pupils.  And  surely  there  is  very  great 
need  of  this  very  thing — the  making  of  real  converts  of  our 
boys  and  girls  that  they  may  come  fully  to  appreciate  the 
significance  of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  Upon  them  rests 
the  carrying  forward  of  that  great  work  which  only  the 
conversion  of  our  pioneer  forefathers  could  have  achieved. 

In  the  first  place,  the  converted  teacher  believes  what  he 
teaches.  There  is  no  half-hearted  attitude  toward  the  sub- 
ject in  hand.  To  him  it  is  both  true  and  vital.  He  teaches 
with  a  positiveness  and  an  assurance  which  grip  pupils. 
What  a  diflference  between  the  speech  in  which  a  speaker 
merely  makes  certain  observations — sets  forth  certain  speci- 
fied facts — and  the  speech  in  which  those  same  facts  are 
heightened  by  that  glow  of  conviction  which  stamps  them 
as  indispensably  essential  to  proper  living.  The  prayer  of 
a  man  who  does  not  believe  in  prayer  is  an  example  of  the 
emptiness  of  unbelief.  There  is  one  minister  in  Chicago 
who  openly  announces  that  God  does  not  and  can  not 
answer  the  prayers  of  mankind.  And  yet  he  prays.  And 
what  mockery  is  his  praying.  Mere  words.  No  man  is 
ever  touched  by  such  an  empty  form.  Such  prayers  have 
none  of  that  Heaven  Force  which  establishes  communion 
with  the  Lord.  Surely  "They  draw  near  me  with  their  lips, 
but  their  hearts  are  far  from  me." 

To  everyone  comes  the  experience  of  listening  to  the 
heavy  phrases  of  him  who  would  argue  and  harrangue  his 
auditors  into  salvation.  How  his  words  seem  not  only  to 
close  their  minds,  but  to  shut  their  hearts  as  well.  He  fairly 
talks  so  loudly  that  they  can't  hear  him.  And  then  some 
humble  follower  of  Him  who  shunned  the  orator's  elo- 
quence moves  to  tears  the  same  audience  by  his  simple 
utterance  of  what  he  knows  and  feels  to  be  true.  He  adds 


166  Principles  of  Teaching 

the  conviction  of  conversion  to  mere  "hard-headedness." 
When  a  man  knows  that  which  he  teaches  is  true  there  is 
a  spirit  that  gives  power  to  what  he  says.  "The  letter  kill - 
eth,  but  the  spirit  giveth  Hfe." 

The  experience  of  a  Montana  raihoad  executive  gives 
force  to  this  thought.  He  told  one  of  our  leaders  how  he 
had  always  been  impressed  with  the  achievements  of  our 
Church.  In  fact,  he  became  such  an  admirer  of  the  wonder- 
ful organization  of  the  "Mormon"  Church  that  he  decided 
to  adopt  the  same  kind  of  organization  in  his  railroad.  To 
quote:  "I  thought  if  I  could  apply  the  same  system  up  here 
that  you  have  in  the  *Mormon'  Church  it  would  work  just 
the  same  for  me  as  it  did  for  you.  I  have  copied  its  plan 
with  the  First  Presidency,  the  Council  of  the  Twelve,  the 
Presiding  Bishop,  and  all  the  other  officers.  I  have  tried  it 
— but  it  wouldn't  work  for  me."  Only  a  Latter-day  Saint 
can  fully  understand  why. 

And  so  the  teacher  who  would  become  a  converter  must 
feel  the  truth  of  what  he  teaches  so  that  a  spirit  of  convic- 
tion extends  from  him  to  his  class  and  so  takes  hold  of  the 
members  that  they,  too,  feel  the  truth  of  what  he  says.  In 
short,  the  real  teacher  must  have  a  testimony  of  the  truth- 
fulness of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  He  must  be  caught 
up  by  that  same  spirit  that  opened  the  heavens  to  the 
Prophet  Joseph  Smith — only  then  can  he  really  teach.  The 
Lord  has  so  revealed: 

"And  they  shall  observe  the  covenants  and  church  articles  to  do 
them,  and  these  shall  be  their  teaching,  as  they  shall  be  directed 
by  the  Spirit; 

"And  the  Spirit  shall  be  given  unto  you  by  the  prayer  of  faith, 
and  it  ye  receive  not  the  Spirit,  ye  shall  not  teach."  (Doc.  &  Gov., 
Sec.  42:13,  14.) 

"Verily  I  say  unto  you,  he  that  is  ordained  of  me  and  sent  forth 
to  preach  the  word  of  truth  by  the  Comforter,  in  the  Spirit  of  Truth, 
doth  he  preach  it  by  the  Spirit  of  Truth  or  some  other  way? 


Conversion — The  Real  Test  of  Teaching      167 

"And  if  it  be  by  some  other  way,  it  is  not  of  God. 

"And  again,  he  that  receiveth  the  word  of  truth,  doth  he  receive 
it  by  the  Spirit  of  Truth  or  some  other  way? 

"If  it  be  some  other  way  it  be  not  of  God: 

"Therefore,  why  is  it  that  ye  cannot  understand  and  know  that 
he  that  receiveth  the  word  by  the  Spirit  of  Truth,  receiveth  it  as 
it  is  preached  by  the  Spirit  of  Truth? 

"Wherefore,  he  that  preacheth  and  he  that  receiveth,  understandeth 
one  another,  and  both  are  edified  and  rejoice  together; 

"And  that  which  doth  not  edify  is  not  of  God  and  is  darkness; 

"That  which  is  of  God  is  light;  and  he  that  receiveth  light  and  con- 
tinuetli  in  God,  receiveth  more  light,  and  that  light  groweth  brighter 
and  brighter  imtil  the  perfect  day."  (Doc.  &  Gov.,  Sec.  50:17-24.) 

In  the  second  place,  the  teacher's  belief  must  be  trans- 
lated into  daily  life.  "Come,  follow  me,"  is  the  admoni- 
tion that  makes  for  conversion.  A  young  man  recently,  in 
characterizing  the  biggest  failure  among  teachers  that  he 
had  ever  known,  remarked,  "He  simply  couldn't  teach  us 
anything.  He  started  in  by  giving  us  a  vigorous  lecture 
against  tobacco,  but  before  a  week  had  passed  we  all  knew 
that  he  himself  smoked.  He  might  just  as  well  have  given 
up  teaching  right  there.  We  couldn't  see  any  truth  in  him 
after  that,  for  the  'smoke'  of  his  own  deception." 

Of  course,  he  was  not  converted.  A  similar  experience 
is  related  of  the  principal  of  a  school  who,  with  his  faculty 
of  teachers,  made  it  a  school  rule  that  there  should  be  no 
playing  of  cards  on  the  part  of  the  students.  The  rule 
recorded,  however,  the  principal  proceeded  to  participate 
in  downtown  card  parties  until  he  established  a  reputation, 
in  the  language  of  the  boys,  as  a  "card  shark."  Not  only 
did  that  principal  find  it  impossible  thereafter  to  combat 
the  evil  of  students  cutting  classes  to  play  cards,  he  lost 
that  confidence  on  the  part  of  the  student  body  without 
which  school  discipline  cannot  be  achieved.  Lack  of  con- 
version— such  conversion  as  leads  a  man  to  practice  what 
he  preaches — cost  him  his  position. 


168  Principles  of  Teaching 

To  the  teacher  who  would  develop  the  power  of  conver  - 
sion,  may  we  make  reference  by  way  of  review  to  those  sug- 
gestions in  an  earlier  chapter  that  make  for  spiritual 
growth: 

1.  Live  a  clean  life. 

2.  Read  the  word  of  the  Lord. 

3.  Do  the  duties  assigned  by  those  in  authority. 

4.  Subscribe  to  all  the  principles  of  the  Gospel. 

5.  Cultivate  a  real  spirit  of  prayer. 

If  the  teacher  is  really  converted,  of  course  the  conver- 
sion of  his  pupils  follows  very  largely  as  a  corollary.  But 
by  way  of  practical  suggestion,  it  may  be  helpful  to  list 
some  things  that  may  be  done  to  promote  a  spirit  of  testi- 
mony on  the  part  of  the  pupils.  At  the  outset  a  teacher 
ought  to  appreciate  just  what  a  testimony  is  and  how  it 
varies  with  the  age  and  experience  of  children.  It  is  clearly 
a  mistake  as  a  general  rule  to  expect  young  children  to  give 
expression  to  a  testimony  such  as  might  be  borne  by  an 
adult.  True,  some  children  enjoy  at  an  early  age  the  spirit 
of  testimony  to  such  an  extent  that  they  do  seem  to  know 
that  the  Gospel  is  true.  But  it  is  wiser  not  to  expect  too 
much.  Then,  too,  testimonies  vary  with  individuals.  Teach- 
ers ought  to  look  out  for  expressions  which  are  character- 
istic of  the  pupil  in  question  rather  than  to  expect  all  pupils 
to  measure  up  to  a  set  standard. 

With  a  proper  conception  of  a  testimony,  the  teacher 
then  owes  certain  rather  definite  obligations  to  his  class. 

He  ought  to  feature  testimony  bearing  rather  than  to 
apologize  for  it.  In  the  teaching  of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus 
Christ  there  can  be  no  more  sacred  opportunity  than  that 
which  allows  pupils  to  open  their  hearts  to  their  Creator. 

Then,  too,  the  teacher  owes  it  to  his  class  to  kindle  the 
spiritual  fire  which  alone  can  make  for  testimony  bearing. 


Conversion — The  Real  Test  of  Teaching      169 

Brother  Maeser  had  a  very  effective  way  of  illustrating  the 
significance  of  this  obligation.  As  he  expressed  the  thought, 
no  one  would  feel  that  he  had  completed  his  task  of  warm- 
ing a  house  if  he  merely  put  into  the  grate  the  necessary 
paper,  wood  and  coal.  He  might  have  all  these,  but  until 
he  struck  the  match  which  would  kindle  the  fire,  no  warmth 
would  be  felt.  And  so,  spiritually,  the  fire  of  a  testimony- 
meeting  needs  to  be  kindled.  All  too  often,  a  teacher  opens 
the  class  hour  with  some  such  statement  as  this,  "Now,  boys 
and  girls,  today  is  Fast  Day.  I  hope  you  won't  let  the  time 
go  to  waste."  What  inspiration  in  such  an  openingl  That 
teacher  has  not  only  not  kindled  the  fire,  he  has  brought 
in  a  lump  or  two  of  coal — hard  at  that — with  no  kindling 
even  as  a  promise  of  a  fire.  On  the  other  hand,  the  success- 
ful teacher  comes  before  his  class  with  a  vital  truth  that 
thrills  him  and  gives  it  a  concrete  expression  which  prompts 
pupils  to  add  similar  experiences  out  of  their  own  lives. 

Then,  too,  the  teacher  may  well  bring  into  his  class  by 
way  of  inspiration  someone  well  established  in  the  faith 
whose  experiences  are  full  of  the  spirit  of  conversion. 
There  are  in  every  ward  in  the  Church  those  men  and 
women  who  know  of  a  surety  that  the  gospel  is  true.  Why 
not  bring  them  in  occasionally  to  stimulate  testimony  bear- 
ing? Might  it  not  be  well,  also,  to  take  the  class  as  a  class 
to  our  Fast  Day  Sacrament  service,  there  to  let  them  enjoy 
the  wonderful  spirit  of  testimony  that  is  so  characteristic 
of  these  meetings?  There  is  a  feeling  of  conversion  that 
attends  these  meetings  that  all  boys  and  girls  must  feel — 
must  feel  so  keenly  that  they  in  turn  will  want  to  give  ex- 
pression to  their  own  convictions. 

And  finally,  as  teachers,  let  us  remind  ourselves  that  in 
this  matter  of  promoting  the  bearing  of  testimonies  we 
should  exercise  a  patience  that  is  full  of  tolerance  and  for- 


170  Principles  of  Teaching 

bearance.  Some  few  individuals  are  converted  suddenly; 
others  respond  to  the  truth  gradually;  and  there  are  those 
who  do  well  if  they  really  respond  to  the  feeling  of  con- 
version at  the  end  of  a  lifetime.  As  one  of  our  leaders  has 
so  beautifully  pointed  out,  the  Master,  Himself,  did  not 
convert  the  world  in  a  day,  nor  a  year — He  has  not  con- 
verted it  in  all  these  centuries.  His  plan  seems  to  be  to 
teach  the  truth  and  wait  patiently  until  the  divinity  in  man 
asserts  itself  —  until  man  walks  by  his  own  light  into 
eternal  truth.  Under  the  inspiration  of  such  example  may 
teachers  well  labor  on  in  earnestness,  happy  in  the  thought 
that  He  will  hasten  in  His  own  due  time  what  to  them 
may  seem  a  long,  slow  process. 

"Perchance,  in  heaven,  one  day  to  me 
Some  blessed  Saint  will  come  and  say, 

'All  hail,  beloved;  but  for  thee 

My  soul  to  death  had  fallen  a  prey'; 

And  oh!   what  rapture  in  the  thought, 
One  soul  to  glory  to  have  brought." 

Questions  and  Suggestions — Chapter  XXIV 

1.  Why  is  conversion  the  real  test  of  religious  teaching? 

2.  What  are  the  outstanding  characteristics  of  a  person  newly 
converted  to  the  Church? 

3.  Discuss  the  significance  of  each  of  the  factors  that  make  for 
conversion. 

4.  Illustrate  how  to  kindle  the  spiritual  fire. 

5.  State  why  or  why  not  you  favor  making  assigrmients  for  testi- 
mony day. 

6.  What  is  a  testimony? 

7.  How  may  children  best  cultivate  a  testimony? 

8.  What  principle  or  practice  means  most  to  you  by  way  of  affirm- 
ing your  own  testimony? 

Helpful  References 

The  Doctrine  &  Covenants,  The  Bible,  The  Book  of  Mormon,  The 
Voice  of  Warning,  Rays  of  Living  Light. 


bibliography 


bibliography 


The  Art  of  Teaching  Driggs 

The  Art  of  Questioning Fitch 

Story  Telling,  Questioning 
and  Studying  Home 

Principles  of  Psychology....]ames 

Fundamentals  of  Child 
Study  Kirkpatrick 

A  Study  of  Child 
Nature  Harrison 

Psychology  of  Childhood 
Norsworthy  and  Whitley 

The  Essentials  of 
Character Sisson 

Principles  of  Teaching 

Thorndike 

Education  for  Character  ....Sharp 

The  Ideal  Teacher... .G.  H.  Palmer 

The  Seven  Laws  of 
Teaching J.  M.  Gregory 

The  Point  of  Contact  in 
Teaching  Dubois 

Interest  and  Effort  in 
Education  Dewey 

The  Boy  Problem Forbush 

Training  the  Boy  McKeever 

Types  of  Teaching Earhart 

How  to  Teach  Religion Betts 

Talks  to  Sunday  School 
Teachers    Weigle 

Everyday  Problems  in 
Teaching  O'Shea 

Talks  to  Teachers James 


Deseret  Book  Co.,  Salt  Lake. 
A.  Flanigan  Co.,  Chicago. 

MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 
H.  Holt  &  Co.,  New  York. 

MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 

R.  R.  Donnelley  &  Sons,  Chicago. 

MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 

MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 

A.  G.  Seiler,  New  York. 

Bobbs,  Merrill  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Houghton-Mifflin  Co.,  New  York. 

The  Pilgrim  Press,  Chicago. 

Dodd,  Mead  &  Co.,  New  York. 

Houghton-Mifflin  Co.,  New  York. 
The  Pilgrim  Press,  Chicago. 
MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 
Houghton-Mifflin  Co.,  New  York. 
The  Abingdon  Press,  New  York. 

Doran  Publishing  Co.,  New  York. 

Bobbs,  Merrill  Co.,  Indianapolis. 
H.  Holt  &  Co..  New  York. 


Bibliography 


173 


How  to  Teach 
Strayer  and  Norsworthy 

The  Making  of  a 
Teacher  Brumbaugh 

The  Learning  Process Colvin 

The  Teacher  and  the 
School  Colgrove 

Pictures  in  Religious 
Education Beard 

The  Nervous  System  Stiles 

The  Classroom  Teacher 
Strayer  and  Englehardt 

The  Recitation Betts 

Attention Pillsbury 

Religious  Education  in  the 
Family  Cope 

Classroom  Method  and 
Management  Betts 

Classroom  Management... .Bagley 


MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 

Sunday  School  Times  Co.,  Phila. 
MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 

Chas.  Scribner  &  Co.,  New  York. 

Geo.  H.  Doran  Co.,  New  York. 
W.  B.  Saunders  Co.,  Phila. 

American  Book  Co.,  New  York. 
Houghton-Mifflin  Co.,  New  York. 
MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 

University  of  Chicago  Press. 

Bobbs,  Merrill  Co.,  Indianapolis, 
MacMillan  Co.,  New  York. 


BRIGHAM  YOUNG  UNiyERSITY 


3  1197  21790  4546